Home

MicroLogix 1200 Programming Manual

image

Contents

1. Instruction Description Page Instruction Description Page ABL Test Buffer for Line 365 NEG Negate 212 ABS Absolute Value 213 NEO Not Equal 197 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 366 NOT Logical NOT 236 ACI String to Integer 367 ONS One Shot 181 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers 355 OR Logical OR 234 ACN String Concatenate 369 OSF One Shot Falling 182 ADD Add 210 OSR One Shot Rising 182 AEX String Extract 370 OTE Output Energize 179 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines 372 OTL Output Latch 180 AIC ASCII Integer to String 357 OTU Output Unlatch 180 AND Bit Wise AND 233 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 318 ARD ASCII Read Characters 374 PTO Pulse Train Output 147 ARL ASCII Read Line 375 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 168 ASC String Search 378 RAC Reset Accumulated Value 140 ASR ASCII String Compare 379 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only 445 AWA ASCII Write with Append 358 REF 1 0 Refresh 286 AWT ASCII Write 361 RES Reset 193 BSL Bit Shift Left 250 RET Return from Subroutine 279 BSR Bit Shift Right 252 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 74 CLR Clear 212 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 189 COP Copy File 248 SBR Subroutine Label 279 CPW Copy W
2. 7 y Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode PA Parameter g E o amp z z o S je can F E 5 8 2 oO g ja je z z ln 2 3 e is le S S S o u la zk 5 L Salk 2E amp is S amp 8 le la E ia 2 la ls la Source e e e e e e e e e e e FIFO e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers or Counters You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMECRTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 258 File Instructions FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload FFU Instruction Type output FIFO Unload CEU gt FIFO N7 0 pest Ni m lt DN gt Execution Time for the FFU Instruction ontro y Length 1 lt CEM gt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Position 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 33 us 0 8 us word 10 4 us long word 36 us 1 5 us long word 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 27 7 us 0 65 us word 9 7 us long word 29 4 us 1 25 us long word 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user
3. Time N7 11 11 3 0 11 2 1 Record 0 20 00 00 TAB 2315 TAB 8190 TAB 4465 Record 1 20 30 00 TAB 2400 TAB 8210 TAB 4375 Record 2 21 00 00 TAB 2275 TAB 18150 TAB 4335 Record 3 21 30 00 TAB 12380 TAB 8195 TAB 4360 Record 4 22 00 00 TAB 2293 TAB 18390 TAB 4375 Record 5 22 30 00 TAB 2301 TAB 8400 TAB 4405 Record 6 23 00 00 TAB 12308 TAB 18100 TAB 4395 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 454 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 5 the formatted string length is 29 characters as shown below Data Time N7 11 11 3 0 11 2 1 Characters 8 1 6 1 6 1 J6 84 14 6 1 6 1 6 29 characters Number of Records Using Queue 5 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes 11 2 1 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 10 bytes Each record c
4. DeviceNet Network Personal E Computer 7 r Ilil icroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1000 Example 3 Local DF1 Half Duplex Network Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or RS 232 higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master i M a Modem 1 MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1200 Slave 1500 Slave SLC 5 04 Slave SLC 5 03 with 1747 KE Interface Module Slave TIP It is recommended that isolation 1761 NET AIC be provided between the controller and the modem Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 407 Configuring a Local Message Setup Screen Message The rung below shows a MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File MG11 0 SN Setup Screen ER The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below This screen is used to setup This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each o
5. d Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode PA A E g2 E Parameter ke E lo ik be 5 i a a SF PF Bis is ls 5 lz oO g l je g le je _ l E le le ld le a JE e Is le Is 2 18 o la e le lu b a S fe 2 E5 la 5 js E 8 e ja lo e la amp g Channel Source Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 AWT ASCII Write AWT _ ASCII Write Channel 0 Source ST14 4 Control R6 1 String Length 40 Characters Sent 0 Error 0 CEN gt CDN gt CER gt ASCII Instructions 361 Example I AWA EN i ASCII WRITE APPEND 10 Channel 0 Ly Source ST37 42 DN If input slot 1 bit 10 is set read 25 characters from Sira a ce an ST37 42 and write it to the display device Then sata j Characters Sent 0 write a carriage return and line feed default r 00 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction The controller sends 25 characters from the start of string ST37 42 to the display device and then sends user configured append characters T
6. Data Files Function Files 2 Address Mode Address Level o 2 E Parameter a g SE 2 T e o S o B 2 a S S g Is IS eles E a jo l9 lo z El wil wif e Is le le E S Ee o le E l xia joa oa OD o k jo e le lu b5 4 E le 2 E lo m la S S e a 8 e E l az S Z a Recipe Number File o e e e e Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 447 Recipe File and Programming Example axjg LaD2 m S E Data Files o Configuring the RCP file E cross Reference E 00 output Bi tt INPUT 1 Using RSLogix 500 locate and select RCP Configuration Files s2 status Right click and select New Ei 83 Binary Cj 14 TIMER Ei cs COUNTER 2 Create a RCP File E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER Di Fo FLOAT Createreprie x el Data Logging E Configuration OK D Status File 0 o t RCP Configuration Files Cancel Force Files New Number of Recipes fl E 00 output Hel E 1 input Name Untitled R Description a Custom Data Monitors r Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files Fi CDM 0 Untitled User Program C Data Log Queue e File This is the number identifying the RCP file It is the Recipe File Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program and ide
7. REF I O Refresh C REF gt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the REF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 see p 469 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 see p 477 0 0 us The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels This includes write outputs service communications all communication channels communications toggle push button DAT MicroLogix 1500 only and comms housekeeping and read inputs The REF instruction has no programming parameters When it is evaluated as true the program scan is interrupted to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the REF instruction The REF instruction cannot be executed from an STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine TIP Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the middle of a program scan This condition needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction ATTENTION A Input and Output Instructions 287 The watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing the REF instruction You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non terminating program l
8. Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 478 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time DH 485 N A 1 14 1 10 N A N A N A N A N A 1 06 at 19 2K 1 09 at 9 6K Modbus T 21 T 12 T 09 T 08 T 08 T 08 T 08 T 08 T 00 AscI2 1 52 1 33 1 24 1 20 1 19 1 18 1 18 1 17 1 00 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors only Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Appendix C System Status File The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to IMPORTANT ibe status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 480 System Status File Status File Overview Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The status file S contains the following words Address Function Page 8 0 Arithmeti
9. 1 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level gt Mode PA Parameter E g E o iS z z a he STi ls 8 le S 8 oO o W je S S l z S Ie l lw 9 JE g ts Je Is lS o lv la e z ua b a E a E 2 E l5 a a Els l8 le la J Ea Elsa Source Length e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Example A SWP Source Value before executing SWP instruction abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzabcdefg Swap yee ey Source Value before executing SWP instruction badcfehgjilknmporqtsvuxwzyabcdefg The underlined characters show the 13 words where the low byte was swapped with the high byte Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 15 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation They are typically time based or event driven Instruction Used To Page SQC Sequencer Compare Compare 16 bit data with stored data 268 S00 Sequencer Output Transfer 16 bit data to word addresses 271 SOL Sequencer Load Load 16 bit data into a file 274 Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each
10. STS Selectable Timed Start lime l Execution Time for the STS Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 57 5 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 50 7 us 0 0 us The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts The STI instruction has one operand e Time This is the amount of time Cin milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 to 65 535 milliseconds The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows If a zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and STI 0 TIE is cleared 0 If the STI is disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI 0 TIE is set 1 If the STI is currently timing and the set point is changed the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time the STI times out immediately For example if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds and the STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start of rung Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below STS
11. Parameter Options Programming Software Default RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS asserti
12. 4 102 Chapter 5 High Speed Counter Overview 644 vs Ba es Oe heN 5 109 Programmable Limit Switch Overview 5 109 High Speed Counter HSC Function File 5 110 High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements Summary 5 112 HSC Function File Sub Elements onana Gea ae on 4 5 113 HSL High Speed Counter oad 69 ep Puls ek Ba aed 5 139 RAC Reset Accumulated Value 0005 5 140 Programmable Limit Switch PLS File 5 141 Chapter 6 PTO Pulse Train Output oona a wow dees eee tee 6 147 Pulse Train Output Function oa aaa auaa aaa 6 148 Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File aaa 6 153 Pulse Train Output Function File Sub Elements Summary 6 154 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 005 6 168 PWM Funcom ecs suser tenei ereen a E o eni 6 169 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File 6 169 Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary 6 170 Chapter 7 XIC Examine if Closed XIO Examine if Open pcod aww de dkakion e Cone Fal 7 177 OTE OUTER SIZES aee i San So he ee Et we yt tee E 7 179 OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch tee a tos eng praia bug a 7 180 ONS One SHO ie rer ee ie hed aed BERE Dae Ew SUE des 7 181 OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling vs ose ett BERND REE EO SY 7 182 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview 2a yah iiss cee yO a gt ee ed 8 185 TON Timer On Delay ye tesco fel dc 6 ay
13. 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DOW SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 504 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File OS Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 57 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller OS Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 58 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 59 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller Processor Catalog Number Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 60 ASCII A to ZZ status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the processor Processor Series Address Data Format Range T
14. Instruction Used To Page PTO Pulse Train Output Generate stepper pulses 148 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Generate PWM output 169 PTO Pulse Train Output Gas P E IMPORTANT The PTO function can only be used with the controller S PTO Number 0 embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules Mroiietta The PTO instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PTO Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 75 6 us 24 4 us MicroLogix 1500 72 6 us 21 1 us Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 148 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Function Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BXB and 1762 L40BXB controllers each support one high speed output A MicroLogix 1500 controller utilizing a 1764 28BXB Base Unit supports two high speed outputs These outputs can be used as standard outputs not high speed or individually configured for PTO or PWM operation The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller The pulse profile has three primary components e Total number of pulses to be generated e Accelerate decelerate intervals e Run interval The PTO instruction along with the HSC and PWM functions are
15. jo e z l gt oO g v e R 2 l selele is ka lm 9 JE g Is le Is JE n lt q N l a RS 2 o a lb lo S la lE 2 Elb la S F 6 2 a 6 s a z S a Source A Source B Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a false to true rung transition Source B is appended to Source A and the result is put in the Destination Only the first 82 characters 0 to 81 are written to the destination If the string Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 370 ASCII Instructions AEX String Extract AEX String Extract Source ST10 0 Index 1 Number 5 Dest ST10 3 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 length of Source A Source B or Destination is greater than 82 the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AEX Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later When Instruction Is True False 14 8 us 2 9 us character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 12 4 us 2 6 us character 0 0 us The AEX instruction creates a new string by taking a portion of an existin
16. In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in S 24 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N15 0 20 N15 20 TIP In the SLC and ML1000 controllers there are some instructions that clear S 24 after the instruction completes For this reason you must insure that the index register is loaded with the intended value prior to the execution of an indexed instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 108 Programming Instructions Overview Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Indirect Addressing Example An equivalent example using indirect addressing is shown below In place of using the index register S 24 the user can designate any other valid word address as the indirect address Multiple indirect addresses can be used within an instruction The following ADD instruction uses an indirect address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indirect offset value is 20 stored in N7 3 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indirect offset to perform to instruction Indirect ADD Working ADD Add Add Source A N7 N7 3 Source A N7 20 SourceB 25 Source B 25 Dest N15 N7 3 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in N7 3 Working Address Source A N72 Destination N7 0 20 N15 20 High Speed Counter
17. The MOD Mode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and is accessible in the control program as a read only variable HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B SN ojl of By GW N Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold HSC Mode 0 Up Counter Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 129 HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used Example 1 f on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 fT lon U Joff 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500
18. Controller OSR When Rung Is OSF When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 3 4 Us 3 0 us 2 8 US 3 7 US MicroLogix 1500 3 2 us 2 8 US 2 7 US 3 4 Us Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Relay Type Bit Instructions 183 TIP The OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 does not provide the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers For the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers use the ONS instruction Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state as follows e Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false to true rising edge change of state of the rung e Use the OSF instruction when an event must start based on the true to false falling edge change of state of the rung These instructions use two parameters Storage Bit and Output Bit e Storage Bit This is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan e Output Bit This is the bit address which is set based on a false to true OSR or true to false OSF rung transition The Output Bit is set for one program scan To re activate the OSR the rung must become false To re activate the OSF the rung must become true OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation Rung State Transition Stor
19. ions servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 475 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the Micrologix 1500 processor The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types e Input D and Output O e Bit B Integer N e Timer T Counter C and Control R Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 476 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Operand Address Operand Address Operand Form Time ps Form Time ps Form Time ps Ot M ORI m3 IVR 2b 0 0 12 3 0 1 0 5 9 LEI 21 9 0 12 4 0 1 6 5 T4 DN 5 7 B3 4 8 0 0 14 1 T 1 DN 20 4 B 1 19 9 oP 14 5 T DN 20 7 B 20 1 B3 2 54 T4 ACC 2
20. Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level gt i PA l n Parameter Te lE j e o a SISS z2 5 gialelels Sle felon 2 8 E HERE o ojan am n gt lo e Ve kal Ljan l Seear oje aleale lel Sle le Hl aS lle lS Sla l a ja S S rla Source ejeje elele ejeojojojojo ojojojo elele elelje ejeje Destination e e e elele ejojojojojoj ojo eje elele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 SCL Scale SCL Scale Source N7 0 0 lt Rate 10000 N7 1 0 lt Offset N7 2 0 lt Dest N7 3 0 lt Math Instructions 215 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SCL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 5 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 8 7 us 0 0 us The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate slope value The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination The following equations express the linear relationship between the input value and the resulting scaled value scaled value rate x source 10000 offset where e rate scaled max scaled min Ginput max input min e offset scaled min inpu
21. Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Controller Memory and File Types 57 1 Specialty files for Data Logging are only used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Specialty files for Recipes are only used by MicroLogix 1500 Series C processors 2 The PTO and PWM files are only used in MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 3 The DAT files are only used in MicroLogix 1500 controllers 4 The floating point and programmable limit switch files are available in MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C controllers 5 The string file is available in MicroLogix 1200 controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and later and 1764 LRP processors Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 58 Controller Memory and File Types User Memory User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic data table files I O configuration etc in the controller User data files consist of the system status file I O image files and all other user creatable data files bit timer counter control integer string long word MSG and PID A word is defined as a unit of memory in the controller The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words Memory consumption is allocated as follows e For data files a word is the equivalent of 16 bits of memory For example 1 integer data file element 1 user word 1 long word file element
22. Error Conditions The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value is greater than Source string length The destination is not changed in any of the above conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Instruction Type input Execution Time for the ASR Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 9 2 us 4 0 us matching character 0 0us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 7 5 us 3 5 us matching character 0 0 us Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings The controller looks for a match in length and upper lower case characters If two strings are identical the rung is true if there are any differences the rung is false Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 380 ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source A is the location of the first string used for comparison e Source B is the location of the second string used for comparison Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used
23. Last 100 Sec Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 35 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller Gin 100 us increments Data File Overwrite Protection Lost Address Data Format Type User Program Access 36 10 binary Oor1 status read write When clear 0 this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller protected data files in the controller were not overwritten or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded When set 1 this bit indicates that data has been overwritten SeeUser Program Transfer Requirements on page 64 for more information SeeSetting Download File Protection on page 63 for more information RTC Year Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 37 word 1998 to 2097 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 YR SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 502 Sys
24. MOV Move Instruction Type output MOV Move Source N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the MOV Instruction Dest N7 1 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 8 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 US 0 0 us long word 6 8 us 0 0 us The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Using the MOV Instruction When using the MOV instruction observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow is handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 238 Move Instructions If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Source can be a constant or an address e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MOV Instruction Valid Ad
25. OPP Output PTO 0 0PP longword 0to2 147 483 647 status read only Pulses Produced 32 bit INT The PTO OPP Output Pulses Produced is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub system Using High Speed Outputs 161 PTO Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADI Accel Decel PTO 0 ADI bit Oor 1 control read write Pulses Independent The PTO ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent bit is used to define whether the acceleration and deceleration intervals will be the same or if each will have a unique value When this bit is set 1 separate profiles are used When this bit is clear 0 the PTO will operate with the deceleration profile as a mirror of the acceleration profile If separate acceleration and deceleration profiles are desired you must choose a long integer file number and a starting element There must be four long elements available in the file Element 1 Acceleration Count Element 2 Deceleration Count Elements 3 and 4 reserved The choice of selecting a common profile or separate profiles must be made at the time of programming This cannot be changed once the program is downloaded into the controller The selection of the ramp type must be made prior to going to run The acceleration and decele
26. 1 0 Configuration 35 1769 OF2 Output Data File For each module words 0 and 1 in the output data file contain the channel 0 and channel 1 output data Bit Position SGN Sign bit in two s complement format Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 36 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1769 IFAXOF2 Input Data File The input data file provides access to input data for use in the control program over range indication for the input and output channels and output data feedback as described below gt Bit Position 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 0 0 O 10 JO 0 JO J0 1 ISGN Analog Input Data Channel 1 0 O 10 JO 10 JO J0 2 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 2 0 O 10 JO I0 JO J0 3 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 3 0 O I0 JO I0 JO J0 4 Not Used 13 12 111 110 5 Not Used HO Not Used H1 Not Used E1 JEO 01 00 6 SGN Output Data Echo Loopback for Output Channel O O 0 O 10 JO 10 10 7 SGN Output Data Echo Loopback for Output Channel 1 O 10 O 10 JO 10 10 1 All unused bits are set to 0 by the module IMPORTANT Input words 6 and 7 contain the Output Data Echo Loopback information for The bits are e SGN output channels 0 and 1 respectively Bits 0 through 6 and Bit 15 of words 6 and 7 should always be set to zero in your control program If
27. 5 o 2 ja la ja z S a e e e e e e e e Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 372 ASCII Instructions AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AHL Ascii Handshake Lines Channel AND Mask 0002h OR Mask 0000h Control R6 2 Channel Status 0000h lt Error 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a true rung The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCH String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Number value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Index value greater than the length of the Source string The Destination string is not changed in any of the above error conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AHL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 109 4 us 11 9 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 89 3 us 10 8 us The AHL instruction is used to set or reset the RS 232 Request to Send RTS handshake control line for a modem The controller uses the two masks to determine whether to set or reset the RTS control line or leave it unchanged The
28. Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the IMERRTANT Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 231 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 232 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 236 Logical Instructions NOT Logical NOT Instruction Type output NOT NOT Source N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the NOT Instruction Dest N7 1 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 8 1 us 0 0 us The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit by bit one s complement and then place the result in the destination Truth Table for the NOT Instruction Destination A NOTB Source 1 1 11 1 11 10 11 10 0 10 10 10 1 11 10 10 Destination O JO JO JO JO 1 JO 1 1 1 11 11 JO JO 11 41 For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 231 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 232 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 13 Move Instructions The move instructions modify and move words Instruction Used to Page MOV Move Move the source value to the destination 237 MVM Masked Move Move data from a source location to a selected 240 portion of the destination
29. Size in Elements Size in elements defaults to 1 For coil input commands 1 2 5 and 15 elements are in bits For register commands 3 4 6 and 10 elements are in words Target Device Message Timeout Message timeout is specified in seconds If the target does not respond within this time period the message instruction will generate a specific error see MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 441 The amount of time that is acceptable should be based on application requirements and network capacity loading A 2 second message timeout is generally sufficient as long as only one message is triggered at a time Modbus Data Address decimal The default Modbus Data Address is 1 The Range is 1 to 65 536 Slave Node Address decimal The default Slave Node Address is 1 The Range is 0 to 247 Zero is the Modbus broadcast address and is only valid for Modbus write commands 5 6 15 and 16 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 434 Communications Instructions Remote Messages Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The controller is also capable of remote or off link messaging Remote messaging is the ability to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local network This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge or gateway to the other network Remote Networks DH 485 and DH Networks The illustration below shows two networks a DH 485 a
30. TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file The address level of the source must match the sequencer file If file is a word type then source must be a word type If file is a long word type then source must be a long word type The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set e Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file this is also the
31. TIP The Output High Data OHD is only written when the High preset HIP is reached The Output Low Data OLD is written when the low preset is reached TIP Output High Data is only operational when the counter is counting up Output Low Data is only operational when the counter is counting down If invalid data is loaded during operation an HSC error is generated within the HSC function file The error will not cause a controller fault If an invalid parameter is detected it will be skipped and the next parameter will be loaded for execution provided it is valid You can use the PLS in Up high Down low or both directions If your application only counts in one direction simply ignore the other parameters The PLS function can operate with all of the other HSC capabilities The ability to select which HSC events generate a user interrupt are not limited Addressing PLS Files The addressing format for the PLS file is shown below Format Explanation PLSf e s PLS Programmable Limit Switch file f File number The valid file number range is from 9 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Sub Element delimiter s Sub Element number The valid sub element number range is from 0 to 5 Examples PLS10 2 PLS12 36 5 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 PLS File 10 Element 2 PLS File 12 Element 36 Sub Element 5 Output
32. KED FOAD N7 10 Ne Destination Position_ LIFO N7 12 EM N7 11 4 N7 12 0 Control R6 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 zengi Seo 3 LFU instruction N7 14 2 LEU unloads data from 3 LIFO UNLOAD a EU stack N7 12 at 4 L N7 1 DN iti Dest N7 11 E position eel 5 34 words are allocated ae oF 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 J at N7 12 ending at N7 45 LFL and LFU Instruction Pair So rc 8 N7 10 m gt 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 available position 9 in this case 2 Dandina and IInlaadina af Ctanl 4A719 This instruction uses the following operands e LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 265 e Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If LIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or double words in the stack Word
33. counter C or control R file e Destination The starting destination address where the data is written e Length The length operand contains the number of elements The length can range from 1 to 128 word 1 to 64 dong word or 1 to 42 3 word element such as counter Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 250 File Instructions TIP The source and destination operands must be of the same file type unless they are bit B and integer N Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 y p Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode a J o 5 Parameter t E g g 7 z z ec a a S R B ls e a S gt E oO oi je 8 le le l l E IB le ly 14 JE e is le 5 JE S o l k la kele El h lE e E 2E EIS IS S le a El ls S la Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination ele elelele e EA Length e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 150 IMPORTANT BSL Bit Shift Left 0 Series C and higher controllers only You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BH
34. gt Ctr 0 Overflow 13 Reserved 14 Ctr 0 Underflow Ctr 1 CurrentCount Ctr 1 CurrentCount 15 Ctr 0 RisingEdgeZ 16 vpi A Ctr 0 InvalidDirectWrite Ctr 1 StoredCount Ctr 1 StoredCount mo ee O a o ees 18 Ctr 1 CurrentRate Ctr 1 CurrentRate Ctr 0 RateValid 19 20 Ctr 0 PresetWarning Ctr 1 Pulselnterval Ctr 1 Pulselnterval 21 22 C1iPW RV Ic IDW REZ CUdf COvf Ctr 1 StatusFlags gt Ctr 1 Overflow 23 Reserved 24 Ctr 1 Underflow Ctr 2 CurrentCount Ctr 2 CurrentCount 25 Ctr 1 RisingEdgeZ Ctr 1 InvalidDirectWrite 26 Ctr 1 InvalidCounter Ctr 2 CurrentRate Ctr 2 CurrentRate 21 Ctr 1 RateValid Ctr 1 PresetWarning Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 43 28 C2PW RV IC IDW CUdf COvf Ctr 2 StatusFlags gt Ctr 2 0verflow 29 Reserved 30 Ctr 2 Underflow Ctr 3 CurrentCount Ctr 3 CurrentCount SU 8 E Ctr 2 InvalidDirectWrite z Ctr 2 InvalidCounter Ctr 3 CurrentRate Ctr 3 CurrentRate 33 Ctr 2 RateValid Ctr 2 PresetWarning Ctr 3 0verflow Ctr 3 StatusFlags gt Ctr 3 Underflow Ctr 3 InvalidDirectWrite Ctr 3 InvalidCounter Ctr 3 RateValid Ctr 3 PresetWarning Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 44 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1769 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Data Organization The scanner uses the input and output data images to transfer data
35. 2 The PTO instruction is started and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate ACCEL parameters which define the number of ACCEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid Using High Speed Outputs 149 3 The ACCEL phase completes 4 The RUN phase is entered and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output 5 The RUN phase completes 6 Decelerate DECEL is entered and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate parameters which define the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 7 The DECEL phase completes 8 The PTO instruction is DONE While the PTO instruction is being executed status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running TIP PTO status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the same as the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence behavior of a PTO
36. 2 user words 1 timer data file element 3 user words TIP Each input and output data element consumes 3 user words due to the overhead associated with T O forcing e For program files a word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction 1 gt with one operand For example 1 XIC instruction which has 1 operand consumes 1 user word 1 EQU instruction which has 2 operands consumes 2 user words 1 ADD instruction which has 3 operands consumes 3 user words e Function files do not consume user memory TIP Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller 1 These are approximate values For actual memory usage see the tables in Appendix A and B of this manual Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Controller Memory and File Types 59 MicroLogix 1200 User Memory The MicroLogix 1200 controller supports 6K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 2K words as shown below 2 0K 0 5K 0K Data Words 0K Program Words 4K 4 3K See MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 463 to find the memory usage for specific instructions MicroLogix 1500 User Memory MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Processor The 1764 LSP processor supports over 7K of memory Memory can be used for program fil
37. ADD Add Source A N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions Source B N7 1 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 ADD word 2 7 uS 0 0 us SUB long word 11 9 us 0 0 us Subtract SUB word 3 4 us 0 0 us Source A N7 0 0 lt long word 12 9 us 0 0 us source B ae MicroLogix 1500 ADD word 2 5 us 0 0 us Dest Me long word 10 4 us 0 0 us K SUB word 2 9 us 0 0 us long word 11 2 us 0 0 us Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value Source A Source B and place the sum in the Destination Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Math Instructions 211 MUL Multiply DIV Divide Instruction Type output MUL Multiply Source A N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions Source B N7 1 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 IMUL word 6 8 us 0 0 us aig long word 31 9 us 0 0 us Divide DIV word 12 2 us 0 0 us SOUNE A ae long word 42 8 us 0 0 us Source B Ml MicroLogix 1500 MUL word 5 8 us 0 0 us Dest N7 2 long word 27 6 us 0 1 us a DIV word 10 3 us 0 0 us long word 36 7 us 0 0 us Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value Source A x So
38. Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge HSC Mode 1 Examples Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Input Terminals 1 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 I on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 4 on U off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 5 f Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 130 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO
39. E g g E f S amp S z a S a s S 5 F E o v jo 8 jO lilt le l la a 9 IE e ls le IS ls o v a z BI ea EREE aE El lS la E la 2 la fF 8 a File ele e e e e e e e Mask o e e e e e e e e e Source e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only S00 Sequencer Output Sao File Mask Dest Control Length Position Sequencer Output B3 0 N7 0 N7 1 R6 0 1 lt 0 lt cen gt DN gt You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO Mikka PVV STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS 10S and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQO Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is Tue False MicroLogix 1200 word 23 2 US 7 1 us long word 26 6 us 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 0 us 6 3 us long word 23 1 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last w
40. Execution Time for the SBR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 11 0 us 1 0 us The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RET Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 11 0 us 0 0 us The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction user interrupt or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 280 Program Control Instructions SUS Suspend SUS _ Suspend Suspend ID 1 TND Temporary End CTND gt Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type output The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de energized The suspend ID and the suspend file program file number or subroutine file number identifying where the suspend instruction reside
41. High Limit lt Low Limit High Limit lt Test lt Low Limit false High Limit lt Low Limit Test gt High Limit or Test lt Low Limit true The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinations e If the Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses e If the Test parameter is a word or long word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant a word or a long word address But the Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants When mixed sized parameters are used all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter For instance if a word and a long word are used the word is converted to a long word The data ranges are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Data Files Function Files a 3 Address Level gt Mode n l Parameter sje E w z F SF S Eige le El o F aM je R l2 j LL z E li z la v 93 E e ls lx S E ol l a kez El h s a El E5 IE l
42. October 2009 Fault Messages and Error Codes 511 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0021 EXPANSION POWER A power failure is present on the Non User Re apply power to the expansion I O bank FAIL EPF expansion I O bank See Important note below MicroLogix 1500 only This error code is present when the controller is powered and power is not applied to the expansion 0 bank This is a self clearing error code When power is re applied to the expansion 1 0 bank the fault is cleared See Important note below If this fault occurs while the system is in the RUN mode the controller faults When expansion 1 0 power is restored the controller clears the fault and re enters the RUN mode IMPORTANT If you change the mode switch while this fault is present the controller may not re enter the RUN mode when expansion I O power is restored If an EPF condition is present and expansion I O power is OK toggle the mode switch to PROGRAM and then to RUN The fault should clear and the controller enters the RUN mode TIP This error may also occur if there is a hardware failure on e Cycle power on your unit the bus with either a MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix e Contact your local Rockwell Automation 1500 controller representative if the error persists 0022 WATCHDOG TIMER The program scan time exceeded the Non Recoverable e Determine if the program is caught in a EXPIR
43. and then selecting the tab for the DF1 Master channel Example Active Node Table 4Data File 52 STATUS Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 F DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node Table 0 1000 0000 0000 00 09000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 9000 0000 90000 00 9000 0000 90000 00 9000 0000 9000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 9000 0000 0000 00 16 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 90000 0000 00 09000 0000 090000 00 0900 0000 90000 00 09900 0000 9000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 09000 0000 0000 00 Protocol Configuration 533 Debug Errors Protection Mer gt Radix Structured ha Help Properties Usage At power up or after reconfiguration the master station assumes that all slave stations are inactive A station is shown active only after it responds to a poll packet DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Slave the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Contro
44. m Output Control Output CV 0 OutputMax C J 0 Output Min Cv j 0 SealedEnorSE 0 EnorCode 0 Cancel Help PID Setup x 7 p Flags a p 5P CCCECCCCECECEEGE 7222 The table below shows the input parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User For More Program Information Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 320 PV Process Variable user defined word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 320 MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write 320 MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write 321 OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only 321 OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 322 0 disabled o Control Variable High PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 to 100 control read write 322 imit CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 to 100 control read write 323 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 320 Process Cont
45. 14 13 12 11 110 J9 anne ata U to Word Lo a ol ow N So 1 10 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32768 0 l0 J0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved S1 SO 5 U0 J00 U1 01 reserved Scaled for PID Format Bit Position rd 15 14 13 12 anne 11 10 9 ata 0 to Wo oo oa oT P oo N T 0 J0 IChannel1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved ST J50 Ud 00 UT 701 reserved The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 and 1 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error 1 0 Configuration 23 e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1762 IF20F2 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format z Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0 10 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 0 l0 40 1 10 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 0 l0 40 Scaled for PID Format z Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 41 J0 0 0 10 Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 383 0 l0
46. 2 The xx in this error code means that the error occurs at the location of the last properly configured Expansion 1 0 module 1 You should use this information in conjunction with the specific error code to determine the source of the problem 3 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 516 Fault Messages and Error Codes Contacting Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for Automation for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following information ready Assistance e controller type series letter and revision letter of the base unit e series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the processor on bottom side of processor unit TIP You can also check the FRN by looking at word S 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File e controller LED status e controller error codes found in 2 6 of status file Rockwell Automation phone numbers are listed on the back cover of this manual To contact us via the Internet go to http www rockwellautomation com Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Appendix E Protocol Configuration Use the information in this appendix for configuring communication protocols The following protocols are supported from any RS 232 communication channel e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex e DF1 Radio Modem e Modbus RTU e ASCII This appendix is
47. 225 lt Dest N7 1 190 lt Conversion Instructions 229 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the GCD Instructions Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 8 2 us 0 0 us When Rung Is True False 9 5 us 0 0 us The GCD instruction converts Gray code data Source to an integer value Destination If the Gray code input is negative high bit set the Destination is set to 32767 and the overflow flag is set Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table GCD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 z P Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o E c o 5 Parameter p v E gt oO g jo z n e ss lw S o je E lt a a S i o a io fe lz lu o a E a e z a lo m ja E la F S la E a al S lo Source e e e e e e e Destination e o o Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controlle 0 0 Cary Jalwaysrest S 0 1 Overflow set if the Gray code input is negative otherwise is reset S 0 2 Zero Bit set if the destination is zero otherwise reset 0 3 Sign Bit always reset 5 0 Overflow Trap set if the Overflow Bit is set other
48. 5 Parameter S Elli a S a i SFR Slsis 568 o ola jojo o S je la an El L 5l lo E N lt q N l a kA 2 ol fon fen fee z ja B fs S em e Z E lm a S S e la lE Sls la S lS la Structure Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Compare Instructions Chapter 9 Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data Instruction Used To Page EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 197 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a 197 second value LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second 198 value lt LEQ Less Than or Equal To Test whether one value is less than or equal 199 to a second value lt GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than a 198 second value gt GEQ Greater Than or Equal To Test whether one value is greater than or 199 equal to a second value gt MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Test portions of two values to see whether 200 they are equal LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the range of 201 two other values Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 196 Compare Instructions Using the Compare Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Most of the compare instructions use two parameters Source A and S
49. 7 j6 5 4 3 2 f1 0 xX x x x r r r r r r r r r r r r gt Word r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IA16 1769 IQ16 and 1769 IQ16F Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 z Bit Position 15 14 13 12 1 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r r F r r r r r r F r r r f r r r read 1769 1032 Input Data File For each input module slot x word 0 in the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 32 1 0 Configuration g Bit Position h5 j4 j3 j2 m J10 0 Ir r r r r r 1 r r r r r r r read Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 33 1769 IQ6X0W4 Input Image For each module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to input terminals 0 through 5 bits 6 through 15 are not used Input Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X xX xX x x x IX Xx x fr k k rokr fr gt Word o co a ol A oo N r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IQ6X0W4 Output Image Fo
50. ACK step 3 does not occur Instead either no response or a negative acknowledge NAK is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear 0 No response may be caused by e the target node is not there e the message became corrupted in transmission e the response was corrupted in response transmission A NAK may be caused by e target node is busy e target node received a corrupt message e the message is too large When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ER bit is set 1 indicating that the message instruction failed 5 Following the successful receipt of the packet the target node sends a reply packet The reply packet contains one of the following responses e successful write request e successful read request with data e failure with error code At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction following the target node s reply the controller examines the message from the target device If the reply is successful the DN bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 If it is a successful read request the data is written to the data table The message instruction function is complete If the reply is a failure with an error code the ER bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 The message instruction function is complete 6 If the DN or ER bit is set 1 and the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared 0 the next time the message instruction is scanned See MSG Instruction Ladde
51. B3 0 ADD 0000 J E Add 0 Source A N7 N10 1 0 lt Source B 1234 1234 lt Dest N11 33 0 lt e Address N7 N10 1 e In this example the element number to be used for source A in the ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10 1 If the value of location N10 1 15 the ADD instruction operates as N7 15 Source B e In this example the element specified by N10 1 must be between 0 and 255 because all data files have a maximum individual size of 256 elements TIP If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in N10 1 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed because a file boundary will be crossed This may not generate a controller fault but the data location is invalid unknown Programming Instructions Overview 105 Indirect Addressing of a File 0001 LIM B3 0 COP Limit Test J E Copy File Low Lim 10 0 Source N N50 100 10 10 lt Dest N7 0 N50 100 Length 15 10 lt High Lim 25 25 lt e Address NIN50 100 10 e Description In this example the source of the COP instruction is indirected by N50 100 The data in N50 100 defines the data file number to be used in the instruction In this example the copy instruction source A is defined by N N50 100 10 When the instruction is scanned the data in N50 100 is used to define the data file to be used for the COP instruction If the value of location
52. CS0 4 MOP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue When CS0 4 MOP is set 1 the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication s portion of the operating scan The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The example rung shows a conditional SVC which is processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 390 Communications Instructions TIP You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MSG Message MSG Read Write Message Setup Screen MSG File MG9 0 3 EN DN ER Communications Instructions 391 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MSG Instruction Controller Rung Condition When Rung Is True False MicroLogix Steady State True 20 0 us 6 0 us 1200 False to True Transition for Reads 230 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 264 us 1 6 us per word MicroLogix Steady State True 17 0 us 6 0 us 1500 False to True Transition for Reads 205 0 us 1764 LSP False to True Transition for Writes 228 us 1 4 us per word MicroLogix Steady State True 17 0 us 6 0 us 1500 Communications via base unit or 1764 LRP communications port
53. Hz H OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz DC Duty Cycle e 9 456 45 6 DCS Duty Cycle Status e g 456 45 6 pi n Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the PWM to generate a waveform at the specified frequency Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or O 0 3 Output Frequency Frequency of the PWM 0 to 20 000 Hz PWM Duty Cycle Controls the output signal of the PWM 1 to 1000 DC 1000 DC 0750 DC 0500 DC 0250 DC 0000 100 075 050 025 000 Output ON Constant no waveform Output ON 025 Output OFF Output ON 050 Output OFF Output ON 075 Output OFF Output OFF Constant no Waveform Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 564 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Example The following example will generate a waveform on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 250Hz and a 50 Duty Cycle Function Files Iof Xx HSC PTO PWM stTi Jen ATC oat TP MM alel H OUT Output RS Run Status HIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status HNS Normal Operation Status EH Enable Hard Stop ES Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code OF Output Frequency Hz H OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz DC Duty Cycle e g 456 45 6 DCS Duty Cycle Status e g 456 45 6 on ao So The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File 2 PVM Pulse Width M
54. Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC Start of PTO Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 a aaa aay Start of PTO Using High Speed Outputs 153 Pulse Train Outputs bes the oo 500 a vs ay see a ee e a with two elements PTOO 1702 L24BXB 1702 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB PTO Function File and PTO1 1764 28BXB only These elements provide access to PTO configuration data and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the Pulse Train Outputs TIP If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing 4 Function Files iol x Hsc PTO pwm sti en RTC oat TP MM alel E PTO 0 OUT Output DN Done DS Decelerating Status RS Run Status AS Accelerating Status FP Ramp Profile CS Control Stop 1S Idle Status ED Error Detected Status NS Normal Operation Status HJPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent JP Jog Pulse JC Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated OPP Output Pulses Produced ADP Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 Publication 17
55. LFL LIFO LOAD Source IF Control Length Position LFU LIFO UNLOAD LIFO Dest Control Length Position EN N7 10 HDN N7 12 Rao PEM 34 g EU N7 12 LDN Rao MEM 34 g LFL and LFU Instruction Pair This instruction uses the following operands Destination Position _ N7 11 N7 12 E LFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 Source N7 13 N7 14 soon A UNSO N7 10 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 33 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Landing and Ilnlandina af Ctanl 4AT19 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 262 File Instructions e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack The data size of the source must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If LIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 ong word e LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this elem
56. MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Chapter 16 JMP Jump to Label 02 0 lt JMP gt Program Control Instructions Use these instructions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time create a more efficient program and troubleshoot a ladder program JMP Jumpto Label Jump forward backward to a corresponding 277 LBL Label label instruction ma JSR Jump to Subroutine Jump to a designated subroutine and return 278 SBR Subroutine Label 279 RET Return from Subroutine 279 SUS Suspend Debug or diagnose your user program 280 TND Temporary End Abort current ladder scan 280 END Program End End a program or subroutine 281 MCR Master Control Reset Enable or inhibit a master control zone in 281 your ladder program Instruction Type output Execution Time for the JMP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 11 0 us 0 0 us The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number Jumps can be forward or backward in ladder logic within the same program file Multiple JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999
57. N50 100 27 this instruction copies 15 elements of data from N27 10 N27 10 to N27 24 to N7 0 N7 0 to N7 14 TIP TIP If a number larger than 255 is placed in N50 100 in this example a controller fault occurs This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files In addition the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the instruction in this example an integer file This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element If the data at N50 100 is less than 10 or greater than 25 the copy instruction is not processed This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 106 Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing of Bit B3 0 B3 0 0002 JE CD B25 0 10 0003 CEND gt e Address B3 B25 0 e Description In this example the element to be used for the indirection is B25 0 The data in B25 0 defines the bit within file B3 If the value of location B25 0 1017 the XIC instruction is processed using B3 1017 TIP If a number larger than 4096 or larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in B25 0 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed Exceeding the number of elements in the data file would cause the file bound
58. Note Each mode for the HSC will configure the inputs for different functionality In this example the HSC will count input pulses coming into I 0 0 when the total number of pulses counted equals the High Preset CHIP the HSC will jump to subroutine file 3 The HIP is set for 5000 pulses in this example Also once the HIP is reached the HSC will then reset HSC 0 ACC to zero 0 and start counting again Important Itis assumed that the user has connected a device to I 0 0 to generate pulses Note The following ladder logic does not need to be entered into File 2 however this allows for easy viewing of the accumulated counts from the HSC 0 ACC IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to an HSC Error Code 1 Invalid File Number for PEN has been entered HSC_ML 1500 Sy Project 1 E Help Sy Controter i Controler Properties a Provcessur Slatus Function Files JU IO Contiguration BE Channel Configuration E Program Fies B sysu B sys1 an2 LADS HSC SUB Bian _ oLx Knowledgebase Quick Starts 567 MOV Move Source HSC 0 ACC 0 lt Proper wiring of a single ended encoder Typical Allen Bradley 845TK when configuring HSC MOD for Mode 6 Quadrature Counter The following diagram illustrates connecting an encoder to the MicroLogix 1500 but the same wiring can be appl
59. Page TON Timer On Delay Delay turning on an output on a true rung 188 TOF Timer Off Delay Delay turning off an output on a false rung 188 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay turning on an output from a true rung 189 The accumulator is retentive CTU Count Up Count up 192 CTD Count Down Count down 192 RES Reset Reset the RTO and counters ACC and status 193 bits not used with TOF timers For information on using the High Speed Counter output s see Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 109 Timers in a controller reside in a timer file A timer file can be assigned as any unused data file When a data file is used as a timer file each timer element within the file has three sub elements These sub elements are e Timer Control and Status e Preset This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out When the accumulator reaches this value the DN status bit is set TON and RTO only The preset data range is from 0 to 32767 The minimum required update interval is 2 55 seconds regardless of the time base e Accumulator The accumulator counts the time base intervals It represents elapsed time The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767 Timers can be set to any one of three time bases Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 186 Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Timer Base Settings Time Ba
60. Scale with Parameters so ccs ahh bn ee dw Fe Sm 10 216 SQR Square Root 2 0 0 i aea ee ee 10 218 Chapter 11 Using Decode and Encode Instructions 11 219 DCD Decode 4 to 1 0f 16 0 000 06 cc cee 11 220 ENC Encode TO AO O 9h ae bdevts ts ode eboney GM ide bhatt te Se te 11 221 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 222 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 226 GED Gray Codere 648 plnene Pare ok ow i ba 11 229 Chapter 12 Using Logical Instructions 00 00005 12 231 Updates to Math Status Bits 00 12 232 AND Bit Wise AND ji i ae ach hock eRe are Ke i 12 233 OR Logical ORs stunata ee eka eS eee bea eee es 12 234 XOR Exclusive ORS oo amp Sinbad ged oda Se ok Bae eS ee 24 12 235 9 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Table of Contents 10 Move Instructions File Instructions Sequencer Instructions Program Control Instructions Input and Output Instructions Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 NOT Logical NOT 8 aes naie do aes Be ee OR ORS 12 236 Chapter 13 MOV MOVE vaa aans Basten eh 206 ES ad Reh ee ee ha 13 237 MVM Masked MOVE an dice ee Bee OGY Re SE ew aes 13 240 Chapter 14 CPW Copy Word saaana aaaea 14 246 COP Copy File spices nsira rni nioni evei err Eri 14 248 Fite PI Filen a Soke Nie Gad DA LED A Ree OE See ew 14 249 BSL Bit Shift Left gael dead o
61. Size in Elements Error ER o m Target Device Message done DN o Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST o MB Data Address 1 65536 Message Enabled EN 0 Slave Node Address dec Error Error Codef Hex 0 No errors Error Description Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections follow Communications Instructions 433 This Controller Parameters If a Channel configured for Modbus Master is selected in the Channel field of the Message Setup Screen the following Modbus Command options will become available e 01 Read Coil Status Oxxxx e 02 Read Input Status 1xxxx e 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxxx e 04 Read Input Registers 3xxxx e 05 Write Single Coil Oxxxx e 06 Write Single Register 4xxxx e 15 Write Multiple Coils Oxxxx e 16 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx Data Table Address Local file types must be Binary B or Integer N for Modbus commands Starting data table address for coil input bit commands 1 2 5 and 15 require a bit address Starting data table addresses for register commands 3 4 6 and 16 require a word address
62. TIP If source is zero the destination is zero and the math status is zero the flag is set to 1 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow Isets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise resets The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 222 Conversion Instructions FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD FRD From BCD Source S 0 0000h lt Dest N7 0 0 lt Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit jalways resets Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FRD Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 14 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 12 3 us 0 0 us The FRD instruction is used to convert the Binary Coded Decimal BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode on Parameter E g g E a S Q I js S z E a bes OT Joe 5 2 z l S o ln jo lo jo SE lo a la JE
63. ToThisCounter_0 16 Range12To15 0 ToThisCounter_1 Range12T015 1 HiLimOrDirWr Range12T015 1 HiLimOrDirWr 17 Range12T015 0 Type 18 od or Range12T015 0 LoadDirectWrite Range12T015 1 LowLimit Range12T015 1 LowLimit 19 Range12T015 0 Invert 20 Out15 Outi4 Outi3 Outi2 Out11 OutiO Out09 OutOs OutO7 OutOG OutOS OutO4 OutO3 OutO2 OutO1 Out00 Range12To15 1 OutputControl 0 15 n Inv Low Type ToThisCtr eee ES Range12T015 1 ToThisCounter_0 22 Range12To15 1 ToThisCounter_1 Range12T015 2 HiLimOrDirWr Range12T015 2 HiLimOrDirWr 23 Range12To15 1 Type 24 E A ae wea Range12T015 1 LoadDirectWrite Range12T015 2 LowLimit Range12T015 2 LowLimit 25 Range12T015 1 Invert 26 Out15 Outi4 Outi3 Outi2 Out11 OutiO Out09 Out08 OutO7 OutOG OutOS OutO4 OutO3 OutO2 OutO1 Out00 Range12T015 2 OutputControl 0 15 2 Inv Low Type ToThisCtr ila 2 Config E Range12T015 2 ToThisCounter_0 28 Range12T015 2 ToThisCounter_1 Range12T015 3 HiLimOrDirWr Range12T015 3 HiLimOrDirWr 29 Range12T015 2 Type a Range12To15 2 LoadDirectWrite Range12T015 3 LowLimit Range12T015 3 LowLimit s g 31 Range12T015 2 Invert Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 41 Out10 Out09 OutOs OutO7 Out06 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 Range12To15 3 OutputControl 0 15 Range12T015 3 Config Range12T015 3 ToThisCounter_0 Flags 32
64. When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true the PWM instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state the enable status bit is reset 0 immediately e Set 1 PWM is enabled e Cleared 0 PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false PWM Output Frequency OF Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PWM OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PWM function This frequency can be changed at any time PWM Operating Frequency Status OFS Using High Speed Outputs 175 Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OFS PWM Operating PWM 0 0FS word INT 0to 20 000 status read only Frequency Status The PWM OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PWM sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub system PWM Duty Cycle DC Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1to 1000 control read write The PWM DC Duty Cycle variable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub system Changing this variable in the co
65. a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http support rockwellautomation com Installation Assistance If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information that s contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running United States 1 440 646 3434 Monday Friday 8am 5pm EST Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any States technical support issues New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number see phone number above to obtain one to your distributor in order to complete the return process Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representat
66. aK Cont Apniy Hej Problem 2 The HSC instruction does not accumulate counts and the Error Code ER shows a value of 1 Solution A file number was entered into PFN but the value entered was less then 3 or greater then 255 or the file number entered was correct however the file does not exist Create the NEW program file by Right mouse clicking on Program Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 569 3 Processor Status 3 Function Files AW 1O Contiguration BE channel contiguration 2 rora Fi O o0 output E n PUT D s2 status D 63 simary E T4 TIMER Problem 3 Some of my outputs will not turn On or Off when the ladder logic appears to indicate that they should Solution OMB Output Mask Bits Verify what the OMB has been configured for in the HSC function file If an output s has been assigned to the HSC for control then the output s will not be controlled anywhere else in the ladder program Only the HSC will have control over these outputs Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 570 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17605 Quick Start Message MSG Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Specifications The MicroLogix 1200 amp 1500 processors contain a total of 12 Message Buffers 8 Incoming Any incoming MSG s Communications and or responses t
67. different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions In this implementation the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated which corresponds to distance traveled and how many pulses to use for each acceleration deceleration period The number of pulses not used in the acceleration deceleration period defines how many pulses are generated during the run phase In this implementation the acceleration deceleration intervals are the same TIP With MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and higher the accelerate decelerate intervals are no longer required to be the same Independent values can now be defined for these intervals The ADI bit in the PTO function file is used to enable this feature See page 154 Within the PTO function file there are PTO element s An element can be set to control either output 2 00 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB or output 3 00 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only The interface to the PTO sub system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true
68. increases when accessing a function file Under normal operation the controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program If you require the communications port to be scanned more often or if the ladder scan is long you can add an SVC Service Communications instruction to your control program The SVC instruction is used to improve communications performance throughput but also causes the ladder scan to be longer Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the control program When the rung is scanned the controller services any communications that need to take place You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits The table on page 389 shows the available status file bits TIP The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the Communication Servicing Selection Bit CSS and Message Servicing Selection Bit MSS in the Channel 0 Communication Configuration File For best results place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault DII STI or I O Event subroutine Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 388 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Channel Select When using the SVC instruction you must select the channel to be serviced The channel select variable is a one wor
69. status and command information between the scanner and the controller The basic structure is shown below Refer to the Compact I O DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual publication 1769 UMO009 for more detailed information Input Data Image The input data image is transferred from the scanner module to the controller Word Description Data Type 0 to 63 Status Structure 64 word array 64 and 65 Module Status Register 2 words 66 to 245 Input Data Image 180 word array Output Data Image The output data image is transferred from the controller to the scanner module Word 0 and 1 Module Command Array 2 to 181 Output Data Image 180 word array The following table shows the bit descriptions for the Module Command Array Word Bit Operating Mode 0 0 1 Run 0 Idle 1 1 Fault 2 1 Disable Network 3 Reserved 4 1 Reset oto 15 Reserved 1 0 to 15 Reserved 1 DO NOT manipulate Reserved Bits Doing so may interfere with future compatibility 1769 SM1 Compact 1 0 to DPI SCANport Module 1 0 Configuration 45 The 1769 SM1 Compact I O to DPI SCANport module provides a Compact I O connection for up to three DPI or SCANport enabled drives or power products It can be used with a MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C or higher Refer to the 1769 SM1 Compact O DPI SCANport Module User Manual publication 1769 UM010 for detailed information on using the module Publication 1762 RM001
70. with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead ATTENTION ee to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you a e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequence IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product THe vay Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert h people that dangerous voltage may be present Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Firmware Revision History Firmware Upgrades New Information Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as publication 1762 RMO01E EN P October 2003 To help you locate new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this parag
71. x20 ms 1 to 65535 counts 20 ms increments 50 counts NAK retries 0 to 255 3 retries ENQ retries 0 to 255 3 retries Stop Bits not a setting always 1 1 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Protocol Configuration 523 With MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 a DF1 Half Duplex Master driver has been added to complement the DF1 Half Duplex Slave driver already available in the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers TIP DF1 Half Duplex Master driver can be used with the following controllers e MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only DF1 Half Duplex Protocol DF1 Half Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network In contrast to the DF1 Full Duplex protocol communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix controller as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers support Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices addresses 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts Note When configuring a message instruction set the target node address to 1 for broadcast messages Broadcast messages are handled as follows DF1 Half Duplex Master Driver Broadcast
72. 0 0 1 0 2 RTC Dat TPL MM BHI cso ios R L TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled HAS Auto Start ED Error Detected L SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts 000 IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to a STI Error Code 1 Invalid File Number for PFN has been entered Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 576 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 FAS LAD 3 STI Biles ADD Add m Source A Source B Dest Notes on using Interrupt bits If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the above example If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if the interrupt executes or not Knowledgebase Quick Starts 577 17655 Quick Start Real General Information Time Clock RTC The RTC provides Year Month Day Day of Month Day of Week Hour Minute and Second information to the RTC Function file in the controller The RTC module is located in the processor unit under the processor cover Shown Below Like the Memory Module the RTC can be removed or inserted und
73. 0 1 2 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Purple Paint Recipe B3 0 B30 B30 RCP Recipe 1 0 2 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation White Paint Recipe B3 0 B3 0 B3 0 RCP il ri J Recipe 2 0 1 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 450 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Application Explanation of Operation When B3 0 0 is energized and B3 0 1 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 0 is executed loading the following values to create Yellow paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 500 e N7 2 0 e T4 0 PRE 500 When B3 0 1 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 1 is executed loading the following values to create Purple paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 0 e N7 2 500 e T4 0 PRE 500 When B3 0 2 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 1 are de energized Recipe File 0 Recipe number 2 is executed loading the following values to create White paint e N7 0 333 e N7 1 333 e N7 2 333 e T4 0 PRE 1000 Monitor the N7 data file Notice the values change after each bit is toggled This example describes Joading values from a RCP file to data table addresses However note that by changing the RCP file operation from Load to Store values can be loaded by ladder logic into the recipe databas
74. 0 DA binary bit Oor1 control read write 333 UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit Oor1 status read write 333 LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit Oor 1 status read write 334 SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit Oor1 status read write 334 PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit Oor 1 status read write 334 DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit Oor1 status read only 334 EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit Oor1 status read only 335 IS Integral Sum PD10 0 1S long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 335 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only 335 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Process Control Instruction 327 Controller Gain K Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Gain K word 3 is the proportional gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 0 to 327 67 when RG 1 Set this gain to one half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms below are set to zero TIP Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 332 Reset Term T Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type
75. 0 POTO Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPD Data 1 TPI 0 POT1 Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPO Error Code TPI 0 ER Word bits 0 to 7 0 3 Status Read Only TP1 Error Code Word bits 8 to 15 The data resident in TPI 0 POTO represents the position of trim pot 0 The data resident in TPI 0 POT1 corresponds to the position of trim pot 1 The valid data range for both is from 0 counterclockwise to 250 clockwise Error Conditions If the controller detects a problem with either trim pot the last values read remain in the data location and an error code is put in the error code byte of the TPI file for whichever trim pot had the problem Once the controller can access the trim pot hardware the error code is cleared The error codes are described in the table below Trim Pot Error Codes Error Code Description 1 Trim pot subsystem detected but data is invalid 2 Trim pot subsystem did not initialize 3 Trim pot subsystem failure Memory Module Information Function File Function Files The controller has a Memory Module Information MMD File which is updated with data from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type memory module and or real time clock are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program If a memory module and or real time clock is not
76. 015 CR 45 2D 055 l 77 4D 115 M 09 16D 55 Im AN 14 OE 016 ISO 46 2E 056 78 4E 6 IN 110 6E 156 In AO 15 OF 017 JSI 47 2F 057 79 4F 7 l0 111 6F 157 lo AP 16 10 020 DLE 148 30 060 J0 80 50 20 IP 112 170 160 p Q 7 11 021 DC1 149 31 061 1 81 51 21 Q 113 171 61 q AR 8 12 022 DC2 50 32 062 2 82 52 22 IR 114 172 62 r AS 9 13 023 DC3 51 33 063 13 83 53 23 IS 115 173 63 Js AT 20 14 024 DC4 152 34 064 l4 84 54 24 IT 116 74 64 t AY 21 15 025 INAK 53 35 065 l5 85 55 25 JU 117 175 65 Ju Ay 22 16 026 SYN 154 36 066 J6 86 56 26 IV 118 76 6 lv AW 23 17 027 ETB 55 37 067 7 87 57 27 IW 119 177 67 Jw AX 24 18 030 ICAN 156 38 070 l8 88 58 30 IX 120 178 170 Ix AY 25 19 031 EM 57 39 071 9 89 59 31 Y 121 79 171 y AZ 26 1A 032 SUB 158 3A 072 f 90 5A 132 Z 22 7A 172 z Al 27 1B 033 ESC 59 3B 073 91 5B 133 23 ZB 173 H N 28 1C 034 IFS 60 3C 074 lt 92 5C 134 N 24 7C 174 29 1D 035 IGS 61 3D 075 93 5D 35 25 ZD 175 l INK 30 1E 036 RS 62 3E 076 gt 94 5E 36s A 26 7E 176 Nes 31 1F 037 US 63 3F 07 1 95 5F 137 27 ZF 177 DEL The standard ASCII character set includes values up to 127 decimal 7F hex The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Controllers also support an extended character set decimal 128 to 255 However the extended character set may display different characters depending on the platform you are using Decimal values 0 through 31 are also assigned Ct
77. 1 10 J0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 l0 1762 IF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for either configuration is shown below 1762 IF4 Input Data File The bits are defined as follows Bit Position 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 SGNO Channel 0 Data 1 SGN1 Channel 1 Data 2 SGN2 Channel 2 Data 3 SGN3 Channel 3 Data 4 reserved s3 S2 S1 SO 5 U0 00 U1 01 U2 102 U3 03 reserved 6 reserved Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 24 1 0 Configuration e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is above the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an over range condition The bits reset when the over range condition clears e Ulx Under range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is below the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an under range condition The bits reset when
78. 1769 0B32 digital output modules 34 Added reference to 1769 SM1 Compact 0 to DPI SCANport Module 44 For memory module information function file added functionality types 4 and 5 for MM2 and MM2RIC 71 Added notes about using the Channel Status screen in RSLogix 500 to reset communication diagnostic counters For the new 87 to 97 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only FRN 8 the Clear function resets both channel 0 and channel 1 Previously only channel 0 would be reset The Channel Status screen is unique for each protocol Therefore examples of the RSLogix 500 screens were added below each Diagnostic Counter Block definition table Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 For This New Information See Page Added DF1 Half Duplex Master Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP 191 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only of Comms Status file Added DF1 Radio Modem Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 192 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only of Comms Status file Added Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer of Comms Status file 95 Modified Active Node Table Block information to reflect addition of new communication options and added Active Node 98 Table screenshot from
79. 2 62 counter C 8 790 floating point F 2 62 10 206 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1200 1 20 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1500 7 37 input I 2 62 input and output addressing examples 1 46 integer N 2 62 long word L 2 62 message MG file 27 392 organization and addressing 20 353 output 0 2 62 PID PD 19 317 programmable limit switch PLS 5 147 protecting data files 2 63 status S file C 479 string ST file 20 353 timer T 8 185 data logging 22 451 22 458 Quick Start example F 588 data table 1 598 DCD instruction 11 220 decode 4 to 1 of 16 instruction 17 220 Defaults Output Array 1 40 DeviceNet network configuration 21 423 DF1 full duplex protocol 522 configuration parameters E 522 description F 522 DF1 half duplex protocol F 523 configuration parameters F 529 E 533 E 536 E 538 description F 523 DF1 protocol half duplex F 523 DH485 communication protocol 578 configuration parameters E 519 DH485 network configuration parameters F 579 description E 518 protocol 578 token rotation F 578 DIN rail 7 598 DIV instruction 10 271 divide instruction 10 211 DLG Quick Start example F 588 DLG Instruction 22 457 download 1 599 DTE definition 1 599 E Ell function file 18 308 embedded 0 1 77 EMI 1 599 ENC instruction 77 227 encode 1 of 16 to 4 instruction 11 221 encoder definition 1 599 quadrature 5 132 END instruction 16 287 EQU instruction 9 797 equal instruct
80. 2009 80 Function Files DAT Function File MicroLogix 1 nl TIP This section describes the DAT Function File For og 300 0 y instructions on operating the DAT see the MicroLogix 1500 User Manual publication 1764 UM001 Data Access Tool DAT configuration is stored in the processor in a specialized configuration file called the DAT Function File The DAT Function File which is part of the user s control program is shown below HSC PTO PwM sti Ell L DP Data Access Terminal present H FIP F1 key Pressed H FIL F1 Key Latched F2P F2 Key Pressed H F2L F2 Key Latched PST Power Save Timeout minutes 0 255 H FMA Firmware Major TBF Target Bit File DFT DAT Functional Type Rev 1 x H FMI Firmware Minor Rev x 1 HE CN 4 Catalog Number TIF Target Integer File goaHoa o ao o o o o o o gt lo x RTC DAT P MMI BHI cso cs gt The DAT function file contains the Target Integer File the Target Bit File and the Power Save Timeout parameter These three parameters are described in the table below Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access Target Integer File DAT 0 TIF Word int Control Read Only Target Bit File DAT 0 TBF Word int Control Read Only Power Save Timeout DAT 0 PST Word int Control Read Only Target Integer File TIF The value stored in the TIF location identifies the integer file with which the DAT wil
81. 2009 Modbus RTU Slave A half duplex serial communication protocol modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the desired voltage level network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The typical amount of current seen at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or deactivated They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter offline When a device is not scanning controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller Glossary 603 offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage cur
82. 278 L label instruction 16 278 ladder logic 7 607 last 100 uSec scan time status C 507 latching inputs 1 49 LBL instruction 16 278 least significant bit LSB 7 607 LED light emitting diode 7 607 LEQ instruction 9 799 LES instruction 9 198 less than instruction 9 798 less than or equal to instruction 9 799 LFL instruction 14 267 LFU instruction 14 264 LIFO Last In First Out 7 607 LIFO load instruction 14 267 LIFO unload instruction 74 264 LIM instruction 9 207 limit instruction 9 207 load memory module always bit C 485 load memory module on error or default program bit C 484 local messages 21 405 logic 1 601 logical instructions 12 231 logical NOT instruction 12 236 logical OR instruction 12 234 low byte 7 607 major error code status C 495 major error detected in user fault routine status bit C 492 major error halted status bit C 487 manuals related 1 16 mask compare for equal instruction 9 200 masked move instruction 13 240 master control relay MCR 7 607 master control reset instruction 76 287 math instructions 10 203 math overflow selection bit C 489 math register status C 497 maximum scan time status C 498 MCR instruction 16 287 memory 2 56 clearing controller memory 2 67 memory mapping MicroLogix 1200 1 0 1 20 MicroLogix 1500 Compact 1 0 1 37 memory module boot status bit C 493 memory module compare bit C 489 Index 611 memory module information function file 3 77 fault override 3 78
83. 535 Added Modbus Master information to section on Modbus RTU Protocol 544 to 555 Added new Appendix Knowledgebase Quick Starts for configuring function file applications 559 Added list of Function Files to List of Instructions on the inside back cover page of the manual Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Table of Contents Important User Information a6 2 cs Hod bo ere per eat Awe 1 2 Summary of Changes Firmware Revision History noaa cook at wares Raw 1 5 Firmware Upgrades o oncsa cin uarra recia POLES SS 1 5 New Information n s anaa aaa 1 5 Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual ooon a 40 oa Aloe rea y 1 15 Purpose of this Manual sca As naaa a aaa 1 15 Common Techniques Used in this Manual 1 15 Related Documentation n o aaao 1 16 Rockwell Automation Support o o aaaea 1 16 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration Embedded TOs cre iper gotia iaa ah E A Be E 1 17 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O onana naaa 1 19 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping 1 20 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion VO e duncan g i eed y reig hae debut E R Meads 1 28 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion O Memoty Mapping ranna a a toy e o a 1 31 VOAddressino eaei apaan eukana aE a ADOT RS Aes 1 46 1 CP PORNO is teh d roa Rate oe es amp ana d 1 48 Input Filtering cr ee ae ar ea eee ce a eae er 1 48 atc hime Inputs oaks ace Fa hd A ROOK bak Stk PWR eS Y 1 49 Configuring Expansion
84. 63 62 INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64 yl ca Data block is shifted one bit at Source Bit a time from bit 69 to bit 32 1 23 06 This instruction uses the following operands e File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated e Control The control operand is the address of the BSR s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last highest bit position e Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 254 File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the
85. 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 i R Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode sS Parameter g E o Ez a oO Ss ie S pi j z g 2 z oO z lo 2 e o j 2 i n 2 Sls e S l o l l a e lz h Base E E5 le je S S 8 le la 6 Ela Is la Source e e e e e e e e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e e e e Destination o e o jo ele ele ele 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 3 See Important note abou In earlier firmware versio indirect addressing communications or hard IMPORTANT ns when the MVM instruction was configured to execute with a Long Word Source value set to zero the processor could potentially lose ault This was corrected in MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 firmware You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MVM instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are
86. 8 dns ea Be Big 8 188 TOF Timer Off Delay isi5 Seo 25 stb ooh Gate aie noe a 8 188 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 5 74 ie ee ee es 8 189 How Counters Work 78644 85449 etches Satis as 8 190 Compare Instructions Math Instructions Conversion Instructions Logical Instructions Table of Contents CTU Count Up CTD COUNt WOW seme eere ma a tans aa ee aches oe 8 192 WED 2 RESED hited ig wry duo i a Me dots ah ea aod a ge 8 193 Chapter 9 Using the Compare Instructions 0 4 9 196 EQU Equal NEQ Not Equal 45 wo 2 amp Rensene es Os de Sih es amp hak 9 197 GRT Greater Than LES Less Thann ota olen yng a ts Ek AON a DES 9 198 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal TO 924 36 4 hee bes blade as bb 9 9 199 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal 005 9 200 LM LIC eSt a5 fb tore a a aha d Pett ROG a BOY eee 9 201 Chapter 10 Using the Math Instructions 0 000005 10 204 Updates to Math Status Bits 00 10 205 Using the Floating Point F Data File 10 206 ADD Add SUB SUDA CE eup is a be e o nae peed GETE Sea ay beet 10 210 MUL Multiply DIV Diyides ratori iire EEEE a ny Ea EN 10 211 NEG gt Nesate ga ams tateei ad aa Sb Ptah Raed Ba bas 10 212 CIRA Clea 5 Schacter vacate te desks veh E Gy die ioe hod Sor pd a eS 10 212 ABS Absolute Value Fa ork Ee Ee be oe 10 213 O SCA akan pre an Dae eo OAS SOR OR wed ek Dace 10 215 SGP
87. Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used In this example we are illustrating a limit instruction where e Low Limit Numeric value from 32 768 to 32 767 entered from the programming software e Test Value TPI 0 POTO This is the current position value of trim pot 0 e High Limit N7 17 This is the data resident in Integer file 7 element 17 The Test Value TPI 0 POTO and High Limit N7 17 are direct addressing examples The Low Limit is immediate addressing Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 104 Programming Instructions Overview Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Indirect Addressing Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller This functionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications recipe management batch processing and many others Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 support indirection indirect addressing for Files Words and Bits To define which components of an address are to be indirected a closed bracket is used The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing Indirect Addressing of a Word
88. C5 0 CD CD count down enable CTU Count Up CTD Count Down CTU Count Up t C CU gt Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt lt DN gt Accum 0 lt CTD Count Down L CCU gt Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt CDN gt Accum 0 lt rung state is true Instruction Type output e rung state is false e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions Controller CTU When Rung Is CTD When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 9 0 us 9 2 us 9 0 us 9 0 us MicroLogix 1500 6 4 us 8 5 us 7 5us 8 5 us Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Timer and Counter Instructions 193 RES Reset R6 0 aX RES gt gt The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false to true rung transition When the CTU rung makes a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count The CTD instruction operates the same except the count is decremented TIP If the signal is coming from a field device wired to an input on the controller the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time assuming 50 duty cycle This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false to true transitions from the incoming device Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RES Ins
89. Conversion Instructions 221 Instruction Type output Fibods tof 16 to 4 See A D e Execution Time for the ENC Instruction Dest TA Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 7 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 6 8 us 0 0 us The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit looking for the first bit set The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Source Bits Destination Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15to04 03 02 01 00 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X x X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 l X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 x determines the state of the flag
90. E o co S w bH a lt 3 zle S z F E 5 2 5 z S g a je a E zla 2 Z ls e S 5 s o _ lv a e le lu bh le amp 2 IE I I ie S Io ES Ss a le 2 ie 8 la Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source pi e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e o o o o o e e e o o ele e 1 DAT files are valid for the Mic 2 The Data Log Status file can oi 3 See Important note about indirect addressing oLogix 1500 only PTO and PW nly be used by the MicroLogix files are valid for Micr 500 1764 LRP Processor oLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 4 Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction The NOT instruction only has one source value Updates to Math Status Bits Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files After a logical instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow always resets S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise res
91. EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 113 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 n a not applicable HSC Function File All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Sub Elements Program File Number PFN Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access PFN Program HSC 0 PFN word INT 0 to 7 control read only File Number 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when HSCO counts to High Preset or Low Preset or through Overflow or Underflow The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 See also Interrupt Latency on page 293 Error Code ER Description Address Data Format yS Modes Type User Program Access ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The ERs Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system are displayed in this word Errors include HSC Error Codes Error Code Name Mode Description Number less than 3 greater than 255 or does not exist 2 Invalid Mode n a Invalid Model Preset 2to7 High preset is less than or equal to low preset 4 Invalid Overflow 0 t
92. Element Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 366 ASCII Instructions ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ACB _ Ascii Chars In Buffer Channel 0 Control R6 1 Characters 2 lt Error 0 lt lt en gt CDN gt lt ER gt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit N is set The instruction is put in the ASCII instruction queue the Queue bit EU is set and program scan continues The instruction is then executed outside of the program scan However if the queue is empty the instruction executes immediately Upon execution the Run bit RN is set The controller determines the number of characters up to and including the termination characters and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no termination characters were found The Found bit FD is set if the POS field is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACB Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 103 1 12 1 MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 84 2 us 11 0 us Use the ACB instruction to determine the number of characters in the buffer On a false to true transition the controller determines the total number of characters and records it in the POS field of the
93. Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File on page 308 for more information Real Time Clock RTC This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock time of day function See Real Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Trim Pot Information TPI This file type contains information about the Trim Pots See Trim Pot Information Function File on page 76 for more information Memory Module MMI This file type contains information about the Memory Module See Memory Module Information Information Function File on page 77 for more information Data Access Tool DAT This file type contains information about the Data Access Tool See DAT Function File Information MicroLogix 1500 only on page 80 for more information MicroLogix 1500 only Base Hardware Information BHI This file type contains information about the controller s hardware See Base Hardware Information Function File on page 83 for the file structure Communications Status cS This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller See File Communications Status File on page 84 for the file structure 1 0 Status File 10S This file type contains information about the controller 1 0 See Input Output Status File on page 99 for the file structure Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Real Time Clock Function File Function Files 71 The real time clock provides year month da
94. If all paths are false the outputs are made false de energized RTU Remote Terminal Unit save To save a program to a computer hard disk scan The scan is made up of four elements input scan program scan output scan and housekeeping scan time The time required for the controller to complete one scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sinking device provides a direct path to ground Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 606 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 sourcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sourcing device or circuit provides a power status The condition of a circuit or system terminal A point on an I O module that external devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off Throughput consists of input delays program scan output delays and overhead true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault write To send data to another device For example the processor writes data to another
95. Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Parameter oO Time e e e e e ume 1 Function Files Address Address Level Mode PLS RTC PTO PWM CS Comms DLS Data Log Immediate Indirect Long Word Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 297 1 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use Indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO EO RTON PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files UID User Interrupt Disable Instruction Type output UID User Interrupt Disable RIT Types Execution Time for the UID Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Tnterrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit EIl Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selecta
96. Interrupt Enable 0 H UIL User Interrupt Lost 0 H UIP User Interrupt Pending 0 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled 0 LAS Auto Start 0 ED Error Detected 0 L SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts 0 Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the STI Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 575 STI 0 PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the SPM value has timed out The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file G to 255 STI 0 AS Auto Start defines if the STI function will automatically start when the MicroLogix 1500 enters run or test STI 0 UIE User Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the STI subroutine from processing STI 0 SPM Setpoint in milliseconds defines the interval that the interrupt will scan the PFN sub routine Example The following example configures the STI to execute sub routine file 3 PFN 3 every 2 seconds SPM 2000 In the subroutine file there is an ADD instruction simply adding the value of 1 to N7 0 each time the sub routine is scanned This example also sets the User Interrupt Enable bit and the Auto Start bit allowing the STI to execute Function Files aa or Jen L PFN Program File Number 3 ER Error Code 0 H UIK User Interrupt Executing 0 H UIE User Interrupt Enable 1 UIL User Interrupt Lost 0 H UIP User Interrupt Pending
97. L40BXB and 1764 28BXB e When OUT 3 PTO pulses output 3 00 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only TIP Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running stops all output pulses and causes a PTO error PTO Done DN Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access DN Done PTO 0 DN bit Oor1 status read only The PTO DN Done bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DN bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully e Cleared 0 When the rung the PTO is on is false If the rung is false when the PTO instruction completes the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 156 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Decelerating Status DS Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS fbit Oor1 status read only The PTO DS Decel bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase
98. Limit LIM instruction Test LIM instruction High Limit LIM instruction Source MEQ instruction Mask MEQ instruction Compare MEQ instruction Math Source A Source B Input SCP instruction Logical Source A Source B Move Source Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 460 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Retrieving Reading Records Accessing the Retrieval File Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Data is retrieved from a data logging queue by sending a logical read command that addresses the Data Log retrieval file The oldest record is retrieved first and then deleted The record is deleted as soon as it is queued for transmission If there is a power failure before the transmission is complete the record is lost The data is retrieved as an ASCII string with the following format lt date gt lt UDS gt lt time gt lt UDS gt lt 1 Data gt lt UDS gt lt 2 Data gt lt UDS gt lt UDS gt lt Last Data gt lt NUL gt e where lt date gt mm dd yyyy ASCII characters date is optional lt time gt hh mm ss ASCII characters time is optional lt UDS gt User Defined Separator TAB COMMA or SPACE lt X Data gt ASCII decimal representation of the value of the data lt NUL gt record string is null terminated e f the Real Time Clock module is not present in the controller lt date gt
99. Low Source Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 143 PLS Example Setting up the PLS File 1 Using RSLogix 500 create a new project give it a name and select the appropriate controller Select Processor Type ay xj Processor Name PLS 1747 L511 5701 CPU 1K Men Cancel Bul 1764 Micrologix 1500 LRP Series C Bul 1764 Micrologix 1500 LRP Series B Help Bul 1764 Micrologix 1500 LSP Series C 1764 Micrologix 1500 LSP Series B 1764 MicroLogix 1500 LSP Series A Bul 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series C 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series B A Bul 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series A Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 Analog Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 DH 485 HDSlave Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 1747 L40A 24 115 VAC In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40B 24 115 VAC In 16 TRIAC Out zl Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout aB_DF1 1 fi Decimal 1 Who Active fio Sec Octal 2 Right click on Data Files and select New Program Files SYS0 SYS1 Lab 2 Cross Ei oo c E n Ine Ei s2 s Ci B3 BINARY UnHide Properties Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 144 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch oF LAU Z eo Fes B Cross Reference E o0 OUTPUT E n Input E s2 STatus Ci 53 BINARY i T4 TIMER i c5 COUNTER E R6 CONTROL El N7 INTEGER E F8 FLOAT E PLs10 Publi
100. MCR instructions note that e You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction e You cannot nest one MCR zone within another e Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone TIP The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone ATTENTION f ea wt instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical A operations outside the zone if necessary Chapter 17 IIM Immediate Input with Mask IIM Slot Mask Length Immediate Input w Mask 1 0 0 N7 0 1 Input and Output Instructions The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page IIM Immediate Input with Mask Update data prior to the normal input scan 283 IOM Immediate Output with Update outputs prior to the normal output scan 285 Mask REF 1 0 Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the 286 1 0 scan write outputs service communications read inputs Instruction Type output TIP This instruction is used for embedded I O only It is not designed to be used with expansion I O Execution Time for the IIM Instr
101. Messages A broadcast write command initiated by the DF1 half duplex master is received and executed by all DF1 half duplex slaves A broadcast write command received by the DF1 half duplex master after polling a DF1 half duplex slave is received acknowledged and re broadcast without being executed by the DF1 half duplex master It is treated like any other slave to slave command except that no acknowledgement is expected after re broadcast DF1 Half Duplex Slave Driver Broadcast Messages When a broadcast write command is initiated by a DF1 half duplex slave it is queued up just like any other MSG command until it receives a poll from the DF1 half duplex master After transmitting the broadcast write Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 524 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 command the DF1 half duplex slave receives an acknowledgement that the DF1 half duplex master received the packet without error When the DF1 half duplex master re broadcasts the broadcast write command the initiating DF1 half duplex slave receives and executes the command along with all of the other slave nodes receiving the broadcast packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned Choosing a Polling Mode for DF1 Half Duplex Master A master station can be configured to communicate with slave stations in either Message based polling mode or Standard polling mode The pros and cons of each polling mode are described
102. Not val id for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 266 File Instructions SWP Swap Instruction Type output SWP Swap A A PAR Execution Time for the SWP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B and higher 13 7 us 2 2 us swapped word 10 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher 11 7 us 1 8 us swapped word 10 0 us Use the SWP instruction to swap the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit integer or string file The SWP instruction has 2 operands e Source is the word address containing the words to be swapped e Length is the number of words to be swapped regardless of the file type The address is limited to integer constants For bit and integer filetypes the length range is 1 to 128 For the string filetype the length range is 1 to 41 Note that this instruction is restricted to a single string element and cannot cross a string element boundary Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SWP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102
103. O is all I O residing at slot 1 and higher encoder A device that detects position and transmits a signal representing that position executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FET Field Effect Transistor DC output capable of high speed operation FIFO First In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file file A collection of data or logic organized into groups Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 600 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 full duplex A mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A mode of communication where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage device in a personal computer high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word housekeeping The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and services communications input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies an electrical signal to the controller input scan The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals inrush current The temporary surge of current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program
104. October 2009 382 ASCII Instructions Using In line Indirection This allows you to insert integer and long word values into ASCII strings The Running bit RN must be set before the string value can be used The following conditions apply to performing in line indirection e All valid integer N and long word L files can be used Valid range is from 3 to 255 e File types are not case sensitive and can include either a colon or semicolon e Positive value symbol and leading zeros are not printed Negative values are printed with a leading minus sign Commas are not inserted where they would normally appear in numbers greater than one thousand Examples For the following examples N7 0 25 N7 1 37 L8 0 508000 L8 1 5 Valid in line direction Input Flow rate is currently N7 0 liters per minute and contains L8 0 particles per liter contaminants Output Flow rate is currently 25 liters per minute and contains 508000 particles per liter contaminants Input Current position is N7 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is 37 at a speed of 5 RPM Invalid in line indirection Input Current position is N5 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is N5 1 at a speed of 5 RPM TIP Truncation occurs in the output string if the indirection causes the output to exceed 82 characters The appended characters are always applied to the output Publi
105. Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 2 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Communications Mode Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 3 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 3 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Communications Active Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 4 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 4 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Scan Toggle Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 9 binary Oor1 status read write The controller changes the status of this bit at the end of each scan It is reset upon entry into an executing mode System Status File 501
106. P October 2009 508 Fault Messages and Error Codes Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in the Run or test mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults See User Fault Routine on page 294 for information on creating a user fault subroutine Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0001 NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the Non User e Re download or transfer the program controller memory This occurs e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix 1500 only e if a power down occurred during oniy program download or transfer e Contact your local Rockwell Automation from the memory module representative if the error persists e RAM integrity test failed e FLASH integrity test failed MicroLogix 1200 only 0002 UNEXPECTED RESET e The controller was unexpectedly Non User e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and reset due to a noisy environment u
107. P October 2009 Chapter 19 The PID Concept Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Proportional Integral Derivative PID instruction The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature pressure liquid level or flow rate using process loops The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module For temperature control you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on off output for driving a heater or cooling unit An example appears on page 337 The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time Interrupt STI mode In the timed mode the instruction updates its output periodically at a user selectable rate In the STI mode the instruction should be placed in an STI interrupt subroutine It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned The STI time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the same in order for the equation to execute properly See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information on STI interrupts PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point A flow rate fluid level example is shown below Feed Forward Bias Set Point Error PID x gt Equation py Flow Rate Process Control Variable Output
108. Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit Oor1 control read write The SC bit is cleared when setpoint scaling values are specified Process Control Instruction 333 Loop Update Too Fast TF Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TF Loop Update Too PD10 0 TF binary bit Oor1 status read write Fast The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations If this bit is set correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine Reset and rate gains will be in error if the instruction operates with this bit set Derivative Action Bit DA Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit Oorl control read write When set 1 the derivative rate action DA bit causes the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable PV When clear 0 this bit allows the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV CV Upper Limit Alarm UL Tuning Parameter Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Desc
109. Program Files Bi svso syS1 u2 Data Fics Cross Reference M o0 output D n eur D s status Monn mmiame Channel 1 DF1 Radio Modem Messages Sent 0 Messages Received 9 LackofMemoy 0 Modem Lines Clear Communication Status Function DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Undelivered Messages 0 Duplicate Messages Received 0 BadPacketsReceived 0 RTS CTS Status Field Diagnostic File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Lack of Memory CSx 17 The number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have available memory Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 542 Protocol Configuration Communication Status Function DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Status Field Diagnostic File Location Definition Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that could not be sent by the processor due to bad modem handshake signals Duplicate Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packet Received CSx 16 The number of data packets received by the processor that had bad checksum or were truncated RTS Request to Send CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking l
110. Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking hi Error Detection CRC Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem the following parameters can be changed for Channel 0 DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration 537 DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Store and Forward Store and Forward allows messages between two out of radio range nodes to be routed through 0 File Number one or more in radio range nodes This is the data table file number used for the Store amp Forward Table Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 1 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission
111. RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 405 Local Messages The controller is capable of communicating using local or remote messages With a local message all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network but the network is still classified as a local network Remote messages use a remote network where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a device to another network Remote networks are discussed on page 434 Local Networks The following three examples represent different types of local networks Example 1 Local DH 485 Network with AlC 1761 NET AIC Interface AIC SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC AIC AIC o BI E Personal Computer bead tal iian io E mt Ul iai MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 406 Communications Instructions Example 2 Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI DNI SLC 5 03 with 1747 SDN DNI PanelView 550
112. RSLogix 500 For the Pulse Train Output PTO Function added a NOTE that the accelerate decelerate intervals are no longer required to be 148 the same Independent values can now be defined for these intervals Updated RSLogix 500 screen shot of PTO Function File to show new ADI bit 153 Updated to show new ADI bit 154 Added section PTO Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI 161 Revised section PTO Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 ADP 162 Added Error Code 3 Undefined Accel Decel to PTO list of error codes 167 Added footnote regarding Masked Move Instruction MVM enhancement 241 For PID instruction parameter Control Variable Percent CVP changed User Program Access from read write to status 324 read and modified text below CVP table to correct previously incorrect information Added DATA n sub element addressing format to section that describes Addressing String Files 353 Added NOTE about using the ASCII Clear Buffers ACL instruction to clear DF1 communication buffers 356 Added DF1 Half Duplex Master and Modbus RTU Master to list of protocols that can be used for messaging 386 Modified Message File Sub Elements configuration information to reflect addition of Modbus Master 392 Added Message File Target Location Information for Target Device Modbus Device and the FRN level that supports this 1395 Added Modbus messaging information to the Message File Sub Element 17 Status Bits table 396 Added info
113. S 0 0 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes OverFlow Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 0 1 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 Whenever this bit is set 1 the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is also set 1 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes Zero Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 0 2 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 482 System Status File Sign Flag A
114. SPM The valid range is 0 01 to 10 24 seconds Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 330 Process Control Instruction Zero Crossing Deadband ZCD Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access ZCD Zero Crossing PD10 0 2CD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Deadband The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint This means that the deadband is in effect only after the process variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum or 0 to 16 383 when no scaling exists Feed Forward Bias FF Tuning Parameter Address_ Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access FF Feed Forward PD10 0 FF word 16 383 to 16 383 control read write Bias INT The feed forward bias is used to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output Scaled Error SE Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type UserProgram Descriptions Format Access SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint The format of the difference SP PV or E PV SP is determined by the control mode CM bit See Control Mode CM on
115. Selectable Timed Start n on naa aaa 18 296 Table of Contents 11 UID User Interrupt Disable 0 0 18 297 UIE User Interrupt Enable i463 eas dake ny eee Es 18 299 UIF User Interrupt Flush teak axed ee dew eo 18 300 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File 18 301 Using the Event Input Interrupt CEI Function File 18 308 Chapter 19 Process Control Instruction The PID Concept 000000000 cee eee 19 315 The PID Equation oos ces acordu vk Galen ae IN Dea 19 316 PDO Data Fle aa no ky PKA PERRY a Da DES E a OKs 19 317 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 19 318 put Parameters ninast fed a aba a wah ne a ete 19 319 Qi put Parameters tae x cari h ior Ok eee a Na eee Bs 19 324 Tuning Parameters oe Naas Os Mid eg bo Ah b Aeh 19 326 Runtime ErrOfS oe ck dire oe be od hil Gey gah hl ace Baek 19 336 Analog I O Scaling a 42h os ade a Calls Be ee 19 337 Application NOLES reren eS Ea ee eters EO Gd 19 338 Application Examples 2 1424 46 puck adam ead ny WS Hoe 19 343 Chapter 20 ASCII Instructions General Information ng aglaw dagnbe e wr dne ete de bags 20 349 ASCH INSthaChOns 4 205 2 Gt ie hee ee ess Rate Bx 20 349 Instruction Types and Operation 0 20 350 Protocol Overview ao 2 o8E6R oes US Fas BOT Bod 20 352 String ST Data File hha hs Sb does beds a 20 353 Control Data Pile 2 isi pala ae hdd Gat kee 20 354 ACL ASCII Clear BUnCES
116. T O Using RSLogix S004 ae die Get dg Rie ok ea ee Gio de Go 1 53 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Controller Memory 2 0 0 0 000 cee 2 56 Types Data Pee Sec ch Abed oe ie aca rate eta ns eae 2 62 Protecting Data Files During Download 2 63 Static File Protection Gu ve cho Ge A OIG dh hie eG ae Hee 2 65 Password Protection oona aaao 2 66 Clearing the Controller Memory noaoae 2 67 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock 2 68 Chapter 3 Function Files OVEVIEW 0 eee eee aSa 3 70 Real Time Clock Function File naaa a ait ae nage tee 3 71 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 3 74 Trim Pot Information Function Bile 5 e lt 4424 6e42404 24 3 76 Memory Module Information Function File 3 77 DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only aoaaa Ox e Ge aos Oe PLS PERS 3 80 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Table of Contents 8 Programming Instructions Overview Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using High Speed Outputs Relay Type Bit Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Base Hardware Information Function File 3 83 Communications Status File 4 4 aq pe nh neta hand hg ae a 3 84 Input Output Status Bile nwt tata Vad aia ed tad owed aoa 3 99 Chapter 4 Instiicion S t s preies aad Haag dee Este Rot He aon a easy 4 101 Using the Instruction Descriptions
117. The example above messages the SLC 500 Date and Time data S 37 S 42 to the Micrologix 1500 RTC each time the SLC processor is powered up and placed into the RUN mode or each time the Time Synchronization Bit B3 0 0 is enabled ATTENTION Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Valid years for the Micrologix 1200 and 1500 begin with 1998 Any date time year values prior to 1998 that are sent to a Micrologix controller will generate a MSG Error Code 10h Knowledgebase Quick Starts 587 For each processor that requires its RTC to be synchronized a MSG write will be required This is done simply by duplicating the above ladder logic referencing a different Control Block i e N100 0 MSG1 N100 20 MSG2 N100 40 MSG3 etc and specifying a different node address in the MSG set up screen Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 588 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 18728 Quick Start Data Logging DLG Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 General Information The Data logging feature allows the creation of memory queues to capture or store application data as a record for later retrieval Each record is stored in a user configured battery backed queue The size of memory where queues are stored is 48K bytes this is independent of the rest of the processor memory The Data logging feature allows the capture or storage of application data as a record for later retrieval Each record is stored in a u
118. True False MicroLogix 1200 MCR Start 1 2 Us 1 2 us MCR End 1 6 us 1 6 us MicroLogix 1500 MCR Start 0 8 us 0 8 us MCR End 1 0 us 1 0 us The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bounded by an MCR instruction pair The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a start MCR zone rung as shown below a 0030 aoe CMCR gt Ladder Logic within MCR Zone 0032 0033 lt MCR gt Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 282 Program Control Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true execution proceeds as if the zone were not present When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false All non retentive outputs within the MCR zone are reset MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications When you program
119. Underflow defines the lower count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated When the underflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 136 Using the High Speed Counter and Pro grammable Limit Switch overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the underflow variable the control program must toggle Clow to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Output Mask Bits OMB Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary control read only The OMB Output Mask Bits define which outputs on the controller can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program intera
120. Usage in Words Words 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p 477 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 4 8 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Real Time Clock Adjust RTA 2 6 4 1 426 8 false to true transition Retentive Timer On RTO 2 2 15 8 3 4 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 8 7 2 5 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 27 0 3 8 0 0 44 7 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 6 3 20 1 3 9 6 3 22 7 44 Sequencer Load SOL 6 3 19 1 3 4 6 3 21 1 3 9 Sequencer Output sao 6 3 20 0 3 9 6 3 23 1 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 22 3 1 5 0 0 26 0 2 5 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 50 7 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 0 2 9 3 3 0 0 11 2 3 5 Suspend SUS N A N A 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications svec 0 0 166 1 4 1 0 service one channel word Service Communications 0 0 327 1 4 1 0 service two channels word Swap SWP 0 0 11 7 1 8 11 5 swapped word Temporary End TND 0 0 1 0 0 5 Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 14 3 1 8 Off Delay Timer TOF 10 9 2 5 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 2 5 15 5 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 10 6 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 0 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open X10 0 0 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 2 3 2 8 0 0 8 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors 2 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communica Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009
121. Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 4 and 5 Modbus Master not used 8 MG11 0 CHN Channel bits 07 00 0 for Channel 0 1 for Channel 1 N Word read write Slot bits 15 08 0 to 16 9 MG11 0 NOD Target Node Number Y Word read write Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Message File Element Communications Instructions 393 Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 10 MG11 0 MTO Message timeout setting or preset in seconds y Word read write 11 PCCC and CIP Number of bytes to read write Word read only Modbus Master Number of Modbus elements to read write 12 Target Location information See tables on page 393 for options Y Word _ read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Yy Word read write 15 Y Word read only 16 Control bits See Control Bits table on page 395 for details N 16 bits read write 17 Status bits and Range parameter See table on page 396 for details Mixed 16 bits read only 18 MG11 0 ERR Error code See Error Codes on page 441 N Word read only 19 Time since message started in seconds N Word read only 20 Reserved Word read only 21 Internal message start time in seconds N Word read only 22 Enhanced error information The low byte is the same as element 18 N Word read only ERR The high byte contains an additional error code For comms module messaging the h
122. a message is in the queue that message is then allocated a buffer At that time the data associated with the message is read from within the controller TIP If a message instruction was in the queue the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present when the message instruction was first processed The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic Buffers are allocated and released as the need arises and message queuing occurs if buffers are full The controller initiates read and write messages through available communication channels when configured for the following protocols e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex Master e DF1 Half Duplex Slave e Modbus RTU Master For a description of valid communication protocols see Protocol Configuration on page 517 SVC Service Communications SVC Service Communications Channel Select 1 Communications Instructions 387 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SVC Instruction Controller When Rung Is 1 True False MicroLogix 1200 208 us 1 6 us per word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP or 1764 LRP with 166 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us one channel selected MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor with both 327 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us channels selected 1 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time
123. a user created file called a FIFO stack This instruction s counterpart FIFO unload FFU is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the FIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL HIFO LOAD N7 10 AN Destination Position _ FIFO N7 12 HOn 7 12 L EM N7 11 h N7 12 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 kositign 2 FFU instruction N7 14 2 Fry unloads data from 3 FIFO UNLOAD EU stack N7 12 at 4 FIFO N7 12 HDN position 0 N7 12 Dest N7 11 EM 5 34 words are allocated aa ey 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Source N7 10 gt FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N745 33 available position 9 in this case Laadina and Inlaadina af Ctanl 4HAT 192 This instruction uses the following operands Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 256 File Instructions e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack The address level of the source must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If FIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Cong word e FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack e Control Th
124. address of the BSL s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the first dowest bit position e Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 252 File Instructions BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 3 sok Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode PA l Parameter E g 2 E o 2 2 f SEP l ls EE S o la jo jo jo l _ l E lig e ln
125. approximates 20 seconds Now set the rate Ty equal to a value 1 8 that of the reset term For our example the value 4 is used to provide a rate term of 0 04 minutes per repeat Place the process in the AUTO mode If you have an ideal process the PID tuning is complete To make adjustments from this point place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode enter the adjustment then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode This technique of going to MANUAL then back to AUTO ensures that most of the gain error is removed at the time each adjustment is made This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself eliminating all of the integral buildup You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previous tuning adjustments Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System To ensure that your process is linear and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled do the following 1 Place the PID instruction in MANUAL and enter the following parameters type 0 for MinS type 100 for MaxS type 0 for CO Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 346 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 2 Enter the REM RUN mode and verify that PV 0 3 Type 20 in CO 4 Record the PV 5 Type 40 in CO 6 Record the PV 7 Type 60 in CO 8 R
126. are displayed in this register The error codes are shown in the table below Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 3 No Yes Yes Undefined Acceleration Count and Deceleration not defined during going to run mode Accel when Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI is set 1 Decel 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PTOO and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hard stop is detected This error does not Detected fault the controller To clear this error scan the PTO instruction on a false rung and reset the EH Enable Hard Stop bit to 0 2 No No Yes Output The configured PTO output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PTO to operate Error This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 No Yes No Frequency The operating frequency value OFS is less than 0 or greater tha
127. be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying user configured variables in one or more data files in the controller This situation can occur when an application needs to be updated but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact This capability is referred to as Data File Download Protection The protection feature operates when e A User Program is downloaded via programming software e A User Program is downloaded from a Memory Module Setting Download File Protection Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types e Output O e Input D e Binary B e Timer T e Counter C e Control R e Integer N e Floating Point F e String ST e Long Word L e Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG e Programmable Limit Switch PLS TIP The data in the Status File cannot be protected Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 64 Controller Memory and File Types Access the Download Data File Protect feature Genera using RSLogix 500 programming software For File 7 each data file you want protected check the Type N Memory Module Download item within the Name INTEGER M Memory Module Download Lo cancet_ aw Her Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 protection box in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse clic
128. being used Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down 131 HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 111 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 f on U Toff on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example 2 on U loff If on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 5 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 111 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 111 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 on off on off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on IU Toff IN on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 E
129. below Message Based Polling Mode Message based polling mode is best used in networks when communication with the slave stations is not time critical and where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station It is not recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for systems where slave station initiated messages are going to be used With Message Based polling mode the only time a master station communicates with a slave station is when a message MSG instruction in ladder logic is triggered to that particular slave station s address This polling mode gives the user complete control through ladder logic over when and how often to communicate with each slave station If multiple MSG instructions are triggered simultaneously they will be executed in order one at a time to completion i e the first MSG queued up will be transmitted and completed to done or error before the next queued up MSG is transmitted Any time a message is triggered to a slave station that cannot respond for instance if its modem fails the message will go through retries and time outs that will slow down the execution of all the other queued up messages The minimum time to message to every responding slave station increases linearly with the number of slave stations that cannot respond If the Message based sele
130. bit was toggled 5 times causing the 5 entries to be recorded in the Que 6 Select Read Log This will retrieve the data from the ML1500 processor FYI Data CANNOT be viewed in the Data Log Utility The utility only allows retrieval of the data stored in the Queues and creates an off line file Once the Read Log has completed the following screen will appear confirming the number of records that have been read from the Queue s il Connected to DATA_LOG 5 records read from 1 queue Disconnect Read Status zx FYI Remember that once the data records have been read from the MicroLogix the queue is automatically cleared 7 Click Save Data Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 QUE Queue 0 Queue 0 Queue 0 Queue 0 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 593 8 Enter a file name In our example My_DLG_Data was used Make note of the filename about to be created and the directory it is being saved to for later reference A ax Save in Am Documents x e ef EB History a Desktop a My Computer was cy Fie name My_DLG_Data x Sae AE J Lee Save as type CSV Files csv x Cancel 9 Using Microsoft Excel open the data file that was created FYI If you are unable to locate your file in Excel remember Files of type must be changed to Text Files or All files in order to locate your saved file The headings for each column are not store
131. by the EII sub system is displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Ell Error Codes Error Recoverable Fault Description Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist 2 Invalid Input Valid numbers must be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Selection 3 Input Selection Ells cannot share inputs Each Ell must have a unique input Overlap Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 310 Using Interrupts EIl User Interrupt Executing UIX User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIX User Interrupt Executing Ell 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EI mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN The EII mechanism clears the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine The EII UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an EII interrupt is executing EIl User Interrupt Enable UIE User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable Ell 0 UIE binary bit control read write Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable EII subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the EII
132. c5 COUNTER i R6 CONTROL Ei N7 INTEGER Ci mari x message data file 11 Message File Sub Elements process the message instruction The MG data file shown at left is accessed using the MG prefix Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file For example MG11 0 is the first element in Each MSG instruction must use a unique Element in a MSG File The MSG element for each MSG instruction holds all of the parameters and status information for that particular MSG instruction Each MSG File Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 24 as shown in the following table Message File Element Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 0 to 1 Reserved Word read only 2 Messaging Type 0 for PCCC 1 for CIP 2 for Modbus Master Word read only 3 for PCCC Messaging bits 07 00 CMD code bits 15 08 FNC code derived Word read only for CIP Messaging bits 07 00 Service Code bits 15 08 Supplemental Object Path Data Count for Modbus Master bits 07 00 Function Code bits 15 08 reserved 4 Internal Physical Address Word read only 5 MG11 0 RBL PCCC Remote Bridge Link ID Y Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 0 and 1 Modbus Master not used 6 MG11 0 LBN PCCC Local Bridge Node Address Y Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 2 and 3 Modbus Master not used 7 MG11 0 RBN PCCC Remote Bridge Node Address Y
133. cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit STI Timed Interrupt Enabled TIE User Program Access TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI 0 TIE binary bit control read write Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type The TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism When set 1 timing is enabled when clear 0 timing is disabled If this bit is cleared disabled while the timer is running the accumulated value is cleared 0 If the bit is then set 1 timing starts This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle STI Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the STI Timed Interrupt Enable TIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Using Interrupts 307 STI Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected STI 0 ED bin
134. control read write 175 DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to1000 status read only 175 ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0to32 767 control read write 176 ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2 to5 status read only 176 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 171 PWM Output OUT Element Address Data Range Type User Program Access Description Format OUT PWM Output PWM 0 0UT word INT 2or3 status read only The PWM OUT Output variable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program The outputs are defined as 00 0 2 or O0 0 3 as listed below e 00 0 0 2 PWM modulates output 2 of the embedded outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB e 00 0 0 3 PWM modulates output 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only PWM Decelerating Status DS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit Oor1 status read only The PWM DS Decel bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the deceleration phase of the output profile e
135. control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 17064 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 e Control is the control data file See page 354 e Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error descriptions ASCII Instructions 367 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACB Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files gt Mode N E cs o z Parameter Eo lg ls K 5l a S jo 5 2 ae o Sit FANES 3 3 E gt o g jo o _ l a a e is le 5 E e o lv alb l E a Ele Elala E BEB e sige lila 8 ia Channel Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element ACI String to Integer ACI String to Integer Source Dest ST10 0 N7 0 0 lt Instruction Ope
136. created file called a FIFO stack The data is unloaded using first in first out order After the unload completes the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL Souce N7 10 w Destination Position _ FIF N7 12 sae 712 HEM N7 11 N7 12 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 Fastin F FFU instruction N7 14 2 Fry unloads data from 3 FIFO UNLOAD EU stack N7 12 at 4 FIFO N7 12 HDN position 0 N7 12 Dest N7 11 HEM 5 34 words are allocated ina ee 6 for FIFO stack starting Position g 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 Eg 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 available position 9 in this case Danadina and Lnlandina af Ctanl HAIT 12 This instruction uses the following operands e FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 259 e Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If FIFO is a long word size fil
137. details of each block in the Communications Status File General Status Block of Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code 1 Length 2 Format Code 3 Communications Configuration Error Code Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 86 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 General Channel Status Block 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfied the bit is cleared 0 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 when the queue is empty 3 SSB Selection Status Bit This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode It is always set 4 CAB Communications Active Bit This bit is set 1 when at least one other device is on the DH 485 net
138. detect if an error is present in the EII sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set look at the specific error code in parameter EII 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 313 EIl Edge Select ES Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only The ES Edge Select bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt This bit allows the EII to be configured for rising edge off to on 0 to 1 or falling edge on to off 1 to 0 signal detection This selection is based on the type of field device that is connected to the controller The default condition is 1 which configures the EII for rising edge operation EIl Input Select IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access IS Input Select EII 0 1S word INT control read only The IS Anput Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 to 7 which correspond to 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 314 Using Interrupts Notes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN
139. device with a message write instruction A ABL instruction 20 365 ABS instruction 10 213 absolute value instruction 10 213 ACB instruction 20 366 accuracy timer 8 187 ACI instruction 20 367 ACL instruction 20 355 ACN instruction 20 369 active nodes status C 496 C 497 ADD instruction 10 210 address 1 597 Addressing considerations 527 addressing direct addressing 4 103 1 0 1 28 immediate addressing 4 103 indirect addressing 4 104 indirect addressing of a bit 4 706 indirect addressing of a file 4 705 indirect addressing of a word 4 104 modes 4 103 using in line indirection 20 382 AEX instruction 20 370 AHL instruction 20 372 AIC instruction 20 357 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1 597 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance D 516 allow future access setting 2 68 AND instruction 12 233 application 1 597 ARD instruction 20 374 arithmetic flags C 487 ARL instruction 20 375 ASC instruction 20 378 ASCII definition 7 597 ASCII character set 20 384 ASCII clear buffers instruction 20 355 ASCII control data file 20 354 ASCII file 20 353 ASCII handshake lines instruction 20 372 ASCII instruction error codes 20 383 ASCII instructions 20 349 error codes 20 383 status bits 20 353 20 354 Index timing diagram 20 387 ASCII integer to string instruction 20 357 ASCII number of characters in buffer instruction 20 366 ASCII protocol parameters 20 352 ASCII read characters instruction 20 374 ASCII read line instruction 20 375 A
140. e Is e S l n N l SUNSA 2 o lw jo e jz lu B Jo S la lE 2 EF Ib m la S leo FIG e Je E e ls Ja l IS lo Source e e o o e ele e 2 Destination eje eje eje 1 See Important note abo t indirect addressing 2 See FRD Instruction Source Operand on page 223 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Conversion Instructions 223 FRD Instruction Source Operand The source can be either a word address or the math register The maximum BCD source values permissible are e 9999 if the source is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the source is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in S 14 If the source is the math register it must be directly addressed as S 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise rese
141. edge of the external input e The input image is normally on 1 and changes to off 0 for one scan Falling Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Numi er X 1 Scan Num er X 2 Scan Number X 3 Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value ee Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 52 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Falling Edge Behavior Example 2 External Input Latched Status Input File Value TIP IMPORTANT Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan L _ The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for falling edge behavior the input file value is normally on off for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected 1 0 Configuration 53 Configuring Expansion Expansion O ee pita ae for o the A Configuri
142. example Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 590 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Data Loa Oueue Configuration Number of Records fico 9 Separator Character o Space C Comma C Tab x h Date Stamp I Time Stamp Address to Log Accept Delete Current Address List IMPORTANT NOTE Integer file N10 must be created with a length of 5 or the software will not compile the ladder program Also a 1764 RTC 1764 MM1RTC 1764 MM2RTC must be installed and configured if the Date and Time stamp are to be used If an RTC module is not installed amp configured the data for these fields will contain zeros 6 Click OK when completed 7 Click OK and accept the Data Log Que window 8 Once the N10 file has been created enter the following values for each 7 3 Data File N10 dec DATA N10 0 Radix Decimal E Smb L S Columns 10 x Desc mo Properties Usage Help 9 Download the program to your MicroLogix 1500 LRP 10 Go On Line 11 Toggle the Data Logging Enable B3 0 0 bit Off to On a total of 5 times Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 591 Using the Data Logging Utility Software to recover data If any other software package such as RSLINX has control of the computers communication port or if the wrong COM port is selected or a A processor other then the 1764 LRP is connected to the computer you will not be able to conti
143. file 5 770 high speed counter load instruction 5 139 high speed outputs 6 747 housekeeping 7 600 HSC Quick Start example F 565 HSC function file 5 770 HSL instruction 5 739 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 1 601 I O addressing 1 28 1 0 configuration 1 17 I O forcing 1 48 0 refresh instruction 17 286 identifying controller faults D 507 IIM instruction 17 283 immediate input with mask instruction 17 283 immediate output with mask instruction 17 285 in line indirection 20 382 input and output instructions 17 283 input device 7 600 input filter selection modified status bit C 494 input filtering 1 48 input scan 7 600 input output status file 3 99 inrush current 1 600 instruction 7 600 instruction execution time B 477 instruction set definition 7 600 MicroLogix 1200 execution times A 463 MicroLogix 1500 execution times 8 471 overview 4 107 INT instruction 18 295 interrupt subroutine instruction 18 295 interrupts interrupt instructions 78 295 interrupt subroutine INT instruction 18 295 latency 18 293 overview 18 289 selectable timed start STS instruction 18 296 user fault routine 78 294 user interrupt disable UID instruction 18 297 user interrupt enable UIE instruction 18 299 user interrupt flush UIF instruction 78 300 IOM instruction 17 285 IOS function file 3 99 J JMP instruction 16 277 JSR instruction 16 278 jump 1 607 jump to label instruction 16 277 jump to subroutine instruction 76
144. illustration shows the rung you can use to unlatch the overflow trap bit Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 206 Math Instructions Using the Floating Point F Data File Floating Point Data File Structure Floating Point Element File Description Floating point files contain IEEE 754 floating point data elements One floating point element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in each floating point file 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 sl Exponent Value Mantissa High Word Low Word 1 S Sign Bit Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Floating point numbers are represented using the IEEE 754 format where e Bit 31 is the sign bit This bit is set for negative numbers note that negative zero is a valid value e Bits 23 to 30 are the exponent e Bits 0 to 22 are the mantissa The value represented by a 32 bit floating point number not one of the exception values defined on page 207 is given by the following expression Note the restoration of the suppressed most significant bit of the mantissa 15x 2 xA m where s is the sign bit 0 or 1 e is the exponent 1 to 254 m is the mantissa 0 lt f lt 1 The valid range for floating point numbers is from 3 4028 x 1038 to 3 4028 x 10 Definitions Overflow o
145. in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 84 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length LEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if the appended characters or inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters plus the number of append characters this number could be 82 83 or 84 depending on how many append characters are used e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 360 ASCII Instructions AWA Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102
146. in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files Mode N l E o E Parameter E lo le e R El a a 3 is e 5 S S a la jo l jo le _ l E lg le lo la E le Is l 5 l2 IE O jm ja e Z ua Bb a 5 lz E 2 amp B wi EA a e 8 2 a j la S la Source A e e e Source B 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation If the string length of Source A or Source B exceeds 82 characters the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the rung goes false Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 381 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions Rung Condition ON OFF Enable Bit EN ON OFF 7 Queue Bit EU ON OFF Running Bit RN ON OFF Done Bit Error Bit ON DN or ER OFF 1 2 6 34 5 1 5 2 6 3 4 rung goes true instruction successfully queued instruction execution complete NOTE The RN bit is not addressable 1 2 3 4 instruction scanned for the first time after execution is complete 5 6 via the Control R file rung goes false instruction execution starts Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P
147. inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 using RTD inputs only These bits can be used in the control program for error detection There is no under range error for a direct resistance input because 0 is a valid number e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 using either RTD or resistance inputs These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 39 1769 IT6 Thermocouple Module Input Data File The input data file contains the analog values of the inputs Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Analog Input Data Channel 4 Analog Input Data Channel 5 0C7 10C6 OCS 0C4 0C3 0C2 0C1 OCO S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 IS2 S1 S0 UO 00 jU1 01 jU2 02 U3 03 jU4 04 U5 05 U6 06 U7 07 The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bit for channels 0 through 5 and CJC sensors S6 and S7 This bit is set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program This condition occurs when the first analog to digital conversion is stil
148. ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w lr w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w r w Ir w Ir w r w read and write 1769 0B32 Output Data File For each module slot x word 0 in the output data file contains the control program s directed state of the discrete output points E Output Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 l0 0 ir w lr w Ir w Ir w Ir w lr w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w r w Ir w Ir w 1 fr w Ir w Ir w ir w Ir w r w r w r w Ir w Ir w lr w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w r w write Analog 1 0 Configuration 1769 IF4 Input Data File For each input module words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Bit Position h5 f 113 12 m 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 B3 l2 1 Jo 0 ISGN Analog Input Data Channel 0 1 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 1 2 SGN_ Analog Input Data Channel 2 3 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 3 4 not used S3 IS2 IS1 SO 5 U0 00 U1 101 U2 02 U3 03 Set to 0 The bits are defined as follows e SGN Sign bit in two s complement format e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range exists for that channel e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection
149. is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Timer Accuracy Time Base Accuracy 0 001 seconds 0 001 to 0 00 0 01 seconds 0 01 to 0 00 1 00 seconds 1 00 to 0 00 If your program scan can exceed 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction on a different rung identical logic in a different area of the ladder code so that the rung is scanned within these limits Repeating Timer Instructions Using the enable bit EN of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program TIP Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time is lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be scanned at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 188 Timer and Counter Instructions TON Timer On Delay TON Timer On Delay L C EN gt Timer 74 0 Time Base 1 0 lt DN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TON Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 18 0 us 3 0 us MicroLogix 1500 15 5 us 2 5 us Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an ou
150. is formatted as 00 00 0000 and lt time gt is formatted as 00 00 00 e The Communications Device determines the number of sets of data that have been recorded but not etrieved See the Data Log Status File on page 458 e The controller performs a the data integrity check for each record If the data integrity check is invalid a failure response is sent to the Communications Device The data set is deleted as soon as the failure response is queued for transmission TIP For easy use with Microsoft Excel use the TAB character as the separator character You can use a dedicated retrieval tool or create your own application Retrieval Tools There are a number of retrieval tools designed for use with Palm OS Windows CE Windows 9x and Windows NT You can download these free tools from our web site Visit http www ab com micrologix Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 461 Information for Creating Your Own Application Controller Receives Communications Packet Command Structure SE No Field Function Description DST Destination Node SRC Source Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code Set to zero 0 TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes FNC Function Code Byte Size Number of bytes to be read Formatted string length see equation below File Number Always set to zero 0 File Type Must be A5 hex Element Number Queue numbe
151. is not attached ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 days may result in ATTENTION ae eye invalid RTC data if power is removed from the controller RTC Battery Life Expectancy Function Files 73 Battery State Temperature Time Duration Operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 5 years Storage 40 C to 25 C 40 F to 77 F 5 years minimum 26 C to 60 C 79 F to 140 F 3 years minimum 1 The operating life of the battery is based on 6 months of storage time before the real time clock is used Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 74 Function Files RTA Real Time Clock Instruction Type output Adjust Instruction Execution Time for the RTA Instruction Controller When Rung Is RTA True False Real Time Clock Adjust MicroLogix 1200 47 us 3 7 Us 556 2 us false to true transition MicroLogix 1500 4 1 us 2 6 us 426 8 us false to true transition The RTA instruction is used to synchronize the controllers Real Time Clock RTC with an external source The RTA instruction will adjust the RTC to the nearest minute The RTA instruction adjusts the RTC based on the value of the RTC Seconds as described below IMPORTANT The RTA instruction will only change the RTC when the RTA rung is evaluated true after it was previously false false to true transition The RTA instruction will have no effect if the rung is a
152. left most character of the string e Search is the address of the string you want to examine e Result is the location from 1 to 82 that the controller uses to store the position in the Search string where the Source string begins If no match is found result is set equal to zero Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files Mode l Parameter s g B E o s S w a S FF 3 s le 5 s S oie le le io l _ l E le le o la la le le l IS B US o m m zu b l E ali 2 x a wi EJ a e E Q a j la S S ja Source e e e e e e e e Index e e Search Result e e e e e e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASR ASCII String Compare ASR ASCII String Compare Source A ST10 8 Source B ST10 9 ASCII Instructions 379 Example 1 ASC J E String Search 0 Source ST38 40 Index 35 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set search the string String Search ST52 80 in ST52 80 starting at the 36th character for Result N10 0 the string found in ST38 40 In this example the position result is stored in N10 0
153. manipulate string data When a string control instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately It is never sent to the ASCII queue to wait for execution The following tables list the ASCII string control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series A AIC Integer to String MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ACI String to Integer AIC Integer to String ACN String Concatenate ASC String Search AEX String Extract ASR ASCII String Compare ASCII Port Control These instructions use or alter the communication channel for receiving or transmitting data The following tables list the ASCII port control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series A ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AWT ASCII Write 1 For the MicroLogix 1200 Series A these instructions only transmit data MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ABL Test Buffer for Line ARD ASCII Read Characters ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ARL ASCII Read Line ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AWT ASCII Write ASCII Instructions 351 When the ACL ASCII Clear Buffer instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately and caus
154. o 435 Gers May pee Pe ES 20 355 AIC ASCII Integer to SiS saws aaau aaa aaa 20 357 AWA ASCII Write with Append 20 358 AWF S ASCU Wte in e a a wade ete a e E EaD 20 361 ABL Test Buffer for Line onana aaa aaau 20 365 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 20 366 ACI String to Integer o P neue ass Be RG Ai A es 20 367 AGN String Concatenate vind re wen he he ke 20 369 AEX String Extract 0 ee 20 370 AHL ASCII Handshake Lunes fs on auh a Gua Ged ial waded 20 372 ARD ASCII Read Characters juin vo See he Pe 20 374 ARL ASCII Read Line nonoa a etal owed be pk bees 20 375 ASG String Searc B deere uee BPA Rae ed Reet e Ba 20 378 ASR ASCII String Compare 0000 20 379 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions 20 381 Using In line Indirection 0 0 0 0 0 0 00005 20 382 ASCII Instruction Error Codes a did ot Gt dae aes 20 383 ASCH Character Set Sve kin ea teks 43 Sa ee 8 Lees 20 384 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Table of Contents 12 Communications Instructions Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time System Status File Fault Messages and Error Codes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 21 MessacinO Overviews pai 2
155. page 484 for more information Function Files 79 LPC Load Program Compare The LPC Load Program Compare bit shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Memory Module Program Compare on page 489 for more information LE Load on Error The LE Load on Error bit represents the status of the load on error setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program on page 484 for more information LA Load Always The LA Load Always bit represents the status of the load always setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module Always on page 485 for more information MB Mode Behavior The MB Mode Behavior bit represents the status of the mode behavior setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Power Up Mode Behavior on page 485 for more information Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October
156. programming terminal is connected online via channel 0 and you are monitoring the Channel Status of channel 1 when you click on the Clear button only the channel 0 diagnostic counters will be reset the channel 1 diagnostic counters will not be reset Diagnostic Counter Blocks are shown for e DH 485 on page 88 e DF1 Full Duplex on page 89 e DF1 Half Duplex Slave on page 90 e DF1 Half Duplex Master on page 91 e DF1 Radio Modem on page 92 e Modbus RTU Slave on page 93 e Modbus RTU Master on page 95 e ASCII on page 97 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 88 Function Files DH 485 Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 0 9 Total Message Packets Received 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Oto7 Message Packet Retries 8to15 Retry Limit Exceeded Non Delivery 12 Oto7 INAK No Memories Sent 8to15 NAK No Memories Received 13 Oto7 Total Bad Message Packets Received 8to15 Reserved 14 to 22 Reserved Channel Status gq Channel 0 Active Nodes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Messages Received Messages Sent Messages Retried Retry Limit Exceeded Sent NAK No Memory Received NAK No Memory oid 5 x DH 485 Total Bad Packets Received oid B B bd bo B 0 10 20 30 olololo o
157. reference of the array Refer to the Compact I O High Speed Counter User Manual publication 1769 UM006 for detailed information The default value for the Output Array is all zeros 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description 0 Outi5 Out14 Out13 Outi2 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 OutO7 OutOG OutOS Out04 OutO3 OutO2 Out01 Out0O OutputOnMask 0 OutputOnMask 15 1 Outi5 Outi4 Outi3 Outi2 Outi OutiO Out09 Out08 OutO7 OutOG OutOS Out04 OutO3 OutO2 Out01 Out0O OutputOffMask 0 OutputOffMask 15 2 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R09 R08 R07 R06 R05 R04 R03 R02 R01 R00 RangeEn 0 RangeEn 15 3 Reserved 4 RBF ResetBlownFuse 5 RPW RREZ Zinh Zinv Dinh Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr0ControlBits Ctr0En 6 RPW RREZ Zinh Zinv Dinh Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr1ControlBits 7 RPW Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr2ControlBits CtrOSoftPraset 8 RPW Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr3ControlBits CtrOResetCountOverflow 9 Reserved 10 Ctr0ResetCountUnderflow Range12T015 0 HiLimOrDirWr Range12T015 0 HiLimOrDirWr 11 CtrODirectionInvert CtrODirectionInhibit CtrOZInvert 12 Range12T015 0 LowLimit Range12T015 0 LowLimit Ctrozinhibit 13 CtrOResetRisingEdgeZ Ctr0ResetCtrPresetWarning 14 Out15 Outi4 Outi3 Outi2 Out11 OutiO Out09 OutOs OutO7 OutOG OutOS OutO4 OutO3 OutO2 OutO1 OutOO Range12T015 0 OutputControl 0 15 15 Inv Low Type ToThisCtr rete ag aaa us Range12T015 0
158. relay type bit instructions monitor and control the status 177 of bits Timer and Counter TON TOF RTO CTU CTD RES The timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or 185 the number of events Compare EQU NEQ LES LEQ GRT GEQ MEQ LIM The compare instructions compare values by using a specific 195 compare operation Math ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR ABS SQR SCL SCP SWP The math instructions perform arithmetic 203 operations Conversion DCD ENC TOD FRD GCD The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform 219 conversions between binary and decimal values Logical AND OR XOR NOT The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on words 231 Move MOV MVM The move instructions modify and move words 237 File CPW COP FLL BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL LFU The file instructions perform operations on file data 245 Sequencer SQC SQO SOL Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have 267 consistent and repeatable operations Program Control JMP LBL JSR SBR RET SUS TND MCR END The program flow instructions change the flow of 277 ladder program execution Input and Output IIM IOM REF The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting 283 for the input and output scans User Interrupt STS INT UID UIE UIF The user interrupt instructions allow you to i
159. selected user interrupts Once a user interrupt is disabled the User Interrupt Enable bit UIE for the selected interrupt will be cleared or reset to a zero 0 This stops the interrupt from executing To re enable an interrupt the UIE bit must be set to a one 1 or a UIE instruction must be used The following table indicates the types of interrupts disabled by the UID Elment Decimal Value Corresponding Bit a Oe JE bia bet o aS JE bi om STi Saecable meamor Mo foo CS o Note Bits 7 to 15 must be s t to zero To disable interrupt s follow these steps 1 Select which Interrupt s to disable from the above table 2 Locate the decimal value for each Interrupt s 3 Add the decimal values together if more then one Interrupt was selected 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 04 32 04 36 Enter this value in the UID instruction Notes on using Interrupt bits If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the above example Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 584 Knowledgebase Quick Starts If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if
160. set 1 these bits indicate that the channel is in a Hold Last State condition e Words 6 and 7 These words reflect the analog output data echo of the analog value being converted by the digital analog converter not necessarily the electrical state of the output terminals They do not reflect shorted or open outputs It is only important to use the loopback function of input words 6 IMPORTANT and 7 if the controller supports the Program Mode or Fault Mode functions and if it is configured to use them 1769 IFAXOF2 Output Data File The output data file applies only to output data from the module as shown in the table below BitPosiin 5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 JO 0 ISGN Analog Output Data Channel 0 0 0 l0 JO JO JO 1 ISGN Analog Output Data Channel 1 0 j0 J0 JO 0 l0 J0 IMPORTANT Bits 0 through 6 and Bit 15 of output data words 0 and 1 should always be set to zero in your control program If they are not set to 0 the invalid data flag Ex will be set for that channel However the channel will continue to operate with the previously converted value If a MVM Move with Mask instruction is used with a mask of 7F80 hexidecimal to move data to the output words writing to bits 0 through 6 and bit 15 can be avoided Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 38 1 0 Configuration Specialty 1 0 Configuration 1769 IR6 RTD resistance Module Input Data File The
161. set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set e Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 e Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Position is incremented on each false to true transition Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 274 Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table 00 Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 r Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode an l Parameter E 2 E
162. shows how the math status bits are updated upon execution of the ABS instruction Updates to Math Status Bits When Both Operands Are Integers e Carry Is set if input is negative otherwise resets e Overflow Is set if the signed result cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e Carry Is reset e Overflow Is set if the signed result is infinity NAN or cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 214 Math Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table ABS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2
163. step Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file The primary advantage of sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory These instructions monitor and control 16 word or 32 Cong word discrete outputs at a time in a single rung You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 268 Sequencer Instructions S0C Sequencer Compare Sac Sequencer Compare CEN gt File B3 0 Mask N7 0 CDN gt Source 1 0 0 Control R6 0 CFD gt Length 1 lt Position 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQC Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 23 5 US 7 1 us long word 26 3 US 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 1 us 6 3 us long word 22 7 US 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address the sequencer file for the control of sequential machine operations When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The mask can be fixed or variab
164. the 1764 LRP controller that will receive data from the DeviceNet device and or the starting data file location that will be sent to the destination DeviceNet device Expansion Comms Port CIP Generic N70 5 0 Custom Network Device Size in Bytes Receive and Send Since all data transmitted on DeviceNet is byte based you must enter the number of bytes that will be received and sent You must make sure that enough memory is available in the destination device Word elements within 1764 LRP controllers contain 2 bytes each These include Bit and Integer data files Long word and Floating point elements contain 4 bytes each For receive the Size in bytes entered must be greater than or equal to the number of bytes than the DeviceNet device will return DeviceNet devices return a fixed number of bytes depending on the Class and Service If Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 428 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 more data is returned than expected the message will error and no data will be written If less data is returned than expected the data will be written and the remainder of the bytes will be filled with zeros In the example screen shown below N7 0 will receive 2 bytes 1 word of data Target Device MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 a CIP Generic Read Input Point Read Parameter Generic Set Attribute Single Generic Get Member Generic Set M
165. the BXB models of the MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the PTO tab then select the next to PTO 0 See Below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 560 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Function a x RTC oat Tet mmi gt DN Done H DS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status HAS Accelerating Status L AP Ramp Profile HIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status HNS Normal Operation Status L JPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status HJP Jog Pulse HJC Jog Continuous H EH Enable Hard Stop H EN Enable Status follows rung state LER Error Code H OF Output Frequency Hz H OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz HJF Jog Frequency Hz TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated OPP Output Pulses Produced L ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 1 mooaoooooococococo0co0c9con rd Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 561 Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the PTO to generate pulses PTO 0 O0UT Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or O 0 3 PTO 0 OF Output Frequency Frequency of pulses 0 to 20 000 Hz Data less then zero and greater then 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO 0 TOP Total Output Pulses Determines total number of pulses to be generated by the controller PTO 0 ADP Accel Dec
166. the amount of programming required in the system and makes PID setup much easier The example shows a 1769 IF4 module The IF4 has 4 inputs which are individually configurable In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction Input 1 word 1 is configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction This configures the analog data for the PID instruction Field Device Input Signal Analog Register Scaled Data gt 20 0 mA 16 384 to 17 406 20 0 mA 16 383 4 0 mA 0 lt 40mA 819 to 1 The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500 Simply double click on the I O configuration item in the Controller folder and then double click on the specific I O module The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical Simply address the PID control variable CV to the analog output address and configure the analog output to Scaled for PID behavior Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 338 Process Control Instruction Application Notes Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Module 1 1769 IF4 Analog 4 Channel Input Module x Expansion General Configuration Analog Input Configuration Generic Extra Data Config Wado cpe Word 1 u IV Enable 50Hz V Enable Jeo Hz Input Range Input Range fotoiovoc 4 to 20 m Data Format Data Format E
167. the pull down menu When asked Do you want to close connection select Yes This will only close the connection from HyperTerminal to the RS 232 port The connection will remain active FYI It will appear as though HyperTerminal has disconnected It has not the connection is still established only HyperTerminal is no longer running 6 Open the Data Logging Utility 7 Select in the DLG Utility the COMM port that the PC modem is configured for 8 Click Connect DISCONNECTING MODEM 1 1 Ensure the DLG Utility has been shutdown 2 2 Start HyperTerminal Do not re connect 3 3 Open the previously configured Datalog 4 Type to place modem in command mode Do not press the ENTER KEY Your modem will respond OK 5 Type ATH 6 Press Enter This will send the disconnect command to modem Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 596 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides RS 232 isolation to an RS 485 Half Duplex communication link Catalo
168. the right of the LSB represent a value greater than one half of the LSB the result is rounded up by adding one LSB If the bits to the right of the LSB represent a value of exactly one half LSB the result is rounded up or down so that the LSB is an even number Addressing Floating Point Files The addressing format for floating point data files is shown below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 208 Math Instructions Format Explanation Ff e F Floating Point file f File number The valid file number range is from 8 default to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Examples F8 2 Floating Point File 8 Element 2 F10 36 Floating Point File 10 Element 36 Programming Floating Point Values The following table shows items to consider when using floating point data IMPORTAN These rules do not apply to the SCP instruction See page 217 for the rules for that instruction Considerations When Using Floating Point Data When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e f either Source is NAN then the result is NAN e All overflows result in infinity with the correct sign e All underflows result in plus zero e All denormalized Source values are treated as plus zero e Results are always rounded using the Round to Even rule e f Destination is an integer and the result is NAN or infinity a saturated result 32768 or 327
169. the under range condition clears e SGNx The sign bit for channels 0 through 3 1762 OF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog output module status data for use in the control program 1762 OF4 Input Data File Bit Position ss ss S CCS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Reserved S03 S02 S01 SO0 1 Reserved UOO 000 U01 1001 U02 1002 U03 1003 The bits are defined as follows e SOx General status bits for output channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error e OOx Over range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal above the user range and can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears e UOx Under range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal below the user range They can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the minimum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 25 1762 OF4 Output Data File For each module slot x words
170. to 2 You can also specify LEN or POS Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 355 Format Explanation Bit delimiter b Bit number The valid bit number range is from 0 to 15 The bit number is the bit location within the string file element Bit level addressing is not available for words 1 and 2 of the control element Examples R6 2 R6 2 0 13 R18 1 LEN R18 1 P0S Element 2 control file 6 Bit 13 in sub element 0 of element 2 control file 6 Specified string length of element 1 control file 18 Actual string length of element 1 control file 18 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers ACL Ascii Clear Buffers Channel Transmit Buffer Receive Buffer No Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACL Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1200 When Instruction Is True clear buffers both 249 1 us receive 28 9 us transmit 33 6 us False 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later clear buffers both 203 9 us receive 24 7 us transmit 29 1 us 0 0 us The ACL instruction clears the Receive and or Transmit buffer s This instruction also removes instructions from ASCII queue Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 356 ASCII Instructions TIP For MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 and higher the ACL instruction can also be used to clear the DF1 communication buffers when the channel is c
171. transition the controller reports the number of characters in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 e Control is the control data file See page 354 e Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ABL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 r Address ata Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode A S Parameter E E jo amp S S je z 2 z amp JaA s Je S 2 1 jo S L z gt l g v je S J j g l lm a JE e ls le ls S e V e FE f I lt a a a l ce ihe Re 2 o v la e jz lu o la E a e a B G a S a E 6 2 a 6 la S IS fa Channel EEn E el Control Tt tT tT tt E Bae 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control
172. unused The first 12 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because they do not correlate to any physical outputs on the base unit The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 138 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Output HPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary control read write The HPO High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 136 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output LPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary control read write The LPO Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 136 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the
173. value lt preset value e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false To reset the accumulator of a retentive timer use an RES instruction See RES Reset on page 193 How Counters Work The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 the counter status overflow bit OV is set 1 If the count goes below 32 768 the counter status underflow bit UN is set 1 A reset RES instruction is used to reset 0 the counter 32 768 0 32 767 Count Up Counter Accumulator Value Count Down Underflow Overflow Using the CTU and CTD Instructions Counter instructions use the following parameters e Counter This is the address of the counter within the data file All counters are 3 word data elements Word 0 contains the Control and Status Bits Word 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value Timer and Counter Instructions 191 Word Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Word 0 CU CD DN OV UN Not Used Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value CU Count Up Enable Bit CD Count Down Enable Bit DN Count Done Bit OV Count Overflow Bit UN Count Underflow Bit e Preset When the accumulator reaches this value the DN bit is set The pre
174. with data from the output file Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IOM cannot be used with expansion 1 0 e Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs The mask value can range from 0 to OXFFFF 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Mask O JO J0 JO JO 10 JO 0 0 0 J4 JT 1 ft yt 1 Real Outputs Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word e Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 286 Input and Output Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below IOM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 E g Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode 2 l e z Parameter A S E lo amp t 5 le e z a ks SFP Bis E k ZI 3 g la le lg le le f Eille gla Ele l le 5S IE IS o l lw la ie le lu 5 lo S la E Z IE IG IG la S IF 8 le a E 6 la 2 3 a Slot Mask e e e e e e e e e Length
175. within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PTO 0 ER The ED bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in an error state PTO Normal Operation Status NS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit Qor1 status read only The PTO NS Normal Operation Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state A normal state is ACCEL RUN DECEL or DONE with no PTO errors The NS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state PTO Enable Hard Stop EH Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH_ bit Oor 1 control read write The PTO EH Enable Hard Stop bit is used to stop the PTO sub system immediately Once the PTO sub system starts a pulse sequence the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit The enable hard stop aborts any PTO sub system operation idle normal j
176. 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the COP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 19 08 us 0 8 us word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 15 9 us 0 67 us word 0 0 us The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 z Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode PA Parameter E 2 E z z 8S Felge le Sls o in lo l jlo j _ l SE i l l ln IW JE L lS le lS F 5 o v a Z ja D a fe 2 D rj FA a 6 2 a 5 la S ja Source ele elelelele e else r Destination e o e o ojojo o elite m Length e 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 15 00 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM IMPORTANT STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files The source and destination file types must be the same except bit B and integer N they can be interchanged It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied as shown in the following table Maximum Lengths for the COP Instru
177. 0 23 N50 49 7 39 N50 39 50 50 7 8 N50 8 N50 48 8 24 N50 24 N50 49 8 40 N50 40 50 50 8 9 N50 9 N50 48 9 25 N50 25 N50 49 9 41 N50 41 50 50 9 10 N50 10 N50 48 10 26 N50 26 N50 49 10 42 N50 42 50 50 10 11 N50 11 N50 48 11 27 N50 27 N50 49 11 43 N50 43 50 50 11 12 N50 12 N50 48 12 28 N50 28 N50 49 12 44 N50 44 50 50 12 13 N50 13 N50 48 13 29 N50 29 N50 49 13 45 N50 45 50 50 13 14 N50 14 N50 48 14 30 N50 30 N50 49 14 46 N50 46 50 50 14 15 N50 15 N50 48 15 31 N50 31 N50 49 15 47 N50 47 50 50 15 The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data register as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is read write or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 82
178. 0 List of Instructions and Function Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Table of Contents 14 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Common Techniques Used in this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual e the purpose of this manual e related documentation e conventions used in this manual e Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers It describes the procedures you use to program and troubleshoot your controller This manual e gives you an overview of the file types used by the controllers e provides the instruction set for the controllers e contains application examples to show the instruction set in use The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is u
179. 0 through 3 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 13 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 2 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 3 Data 0 to 32 760 N gt gt Word oO CO CO oj OC CO N oj o oj O oO O O O Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 through 2 but checks the sign bit 15 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA Scaled for PID Format Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 12 Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 380 1 1 Channel 2 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 3 Data 0 to 16 380 N gt Word oj oj oj O oj ojl ojl ojl oO CO CO oO CO CO Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 and 1 but checks the sign bit 15 and bit 14 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA If bit 15 equals zero and bit 14 equals 1 the module sets the output value to 10 5V dc or 21 mA Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 26 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Specialty 1 0 Configuration 1762 IR4 RTD resistance Module In
180. 0 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 7 9 us 0 0 us The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the OR Instruction Destination A OR B Source A 1 1 11 1 11 10 1 JO JO 10 10 0 41 J1 JO 10 Source B 1 11 10 JO 11 41 41 11 11 11 JO JO JO JO J1 11 Destination 1 1 41 1 11111111 11 1 JO JO 11 11111 Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the IMPORTANT Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 XOR Exclusive OR XOR _ Bitwise Exclusive OR Source A N7 0 0000h lt Source B N7 1 0000h lt Dest N7 2 0000h lt Logical Instructions 235 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the XOR Instruction Controller Data Size WhenRunglss True False MicroLogix 1200 word 3 0 us 0 0 us long word 9 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 US 0 0 us long word 8 9 us 0 0 us The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Destination A XOR B Source A 1 1 1 1 11 JO 11 10 JO 10 JO JO 71 11 JO JO Source B 1 1 JO JO J1 11 111111 11 JO JO JO JO n n Destination 0 0 11 11 JO 1 JO 1 1 41 JO JO 41 1 41 41
181. 00000 lt Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the DCD Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 0 9 us 0 0 us The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one bit of the destination word All other bits in the destination word are cleared The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Source Bits Destination Bits 15to04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x not used Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4
182. 01F EN P October 2009 552 Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map Detail MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code decimal 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space 1 515 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 2 30001 to 30256 Read Modbus Input Register space 4 30501 Modbus Data Table Coil File Number 4 30502 Modbus Data Table Contact File Number 4 30503 Modbus Data Table Input Register File Number 4 30504 Modbus Data Table Holding Register File Number 4 30506 Pre Send Delay 4 30507 Modbus Slave Address 4 30508 Inter character Timeout 4 30509 RTS Send Delay 4 30510 RTS Off Delay 4 30511 Parity 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30513 Presentation Layer Error Count 4 30514 Executed Function Code Error 4 30515 Last Transmitted Exception Code 4 30516 File Number of Error Request 4 30517 Element Number of Error Request 4 30518 Function Code 1 Message Counter Read Single Output Coil 4 30519 Function Code 2 Message Counter Read Discrete Input Image 4 30520 Function Code 3 Message Counter Read Single Holding Register 4 30521 Function Code 4 Message Counter Read Single Input Register 4 30522 F
183. 03F is generated if the execution of the instruction exceeds the data table space e A Major fault 0044 is generated if a write attempt fails to the RTC function file This only occurs when attempting to write invalid data to the RTC function file Examples of invalid data are setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 247 Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table CPW Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Adress Mode Level al S Parameter E 2 E o 8 s z z S bees eee rakte e ELSIE o ls _ i n n Lg 5e olg SEAMS ANHMHHHHAAAHH Aae ia Ela lelsia Source ele e ele e ejejojojojojoj jo e ele e Destination e e eje e elelelelele ele e Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM IMEORTANT STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 248 File Instructions COP Copy File COP Copy File Source N7
184. 1 EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EII 0 EIE binary bit control read write 312 AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only 312 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 309 Event Input Interrupt Function File E11 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information ED Error Detected Ell 0 ED binary bit status read only 312 ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only 313 IS Input Select EII 0 1S word INT control read only 313 Ell Function File Sub Elements EIl Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access word INT control read only PFN Program File Number _ Ell 0 PFN PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is called executed when the input terminal assigned to EII 0 detects a signal A valid subroutine file is any program file to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller It is programmed and operated the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EN Ell Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only Any ER Error Code detected
185. 1 3 4 10 4 31 6 3 4 Limit LIM 6 1 6 4 2 3 13 6 14 4 40 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 465 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Master Control Reset MCR Start 1 2 1 2 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR End 1 6 1 6 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 1 8 1 9 1 8 3 1 3 9 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 2 4 2 5 0 0 8 3 2 0 Message Steady State MSG 6 0 20 0 2 9 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 230 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 264 1 6 Transition for Writes word Multiply MUL 0 0 6 8 2 0 0 0 31 9 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 78 2 0 0 0 11 8 3 0 Negate NEG 0 0 2 9 3 0 0 0 12 1 3 0 Not Equal NEQ 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 5 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 2 4 2 5 0 0 9 2 2 5 One Shot ONS 1 9 2 6 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 2 2 8 0 0 9 2 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 3 7 2 8 5 4 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 3 0 3 4 5 4 Output Enable OTE 1 1 1 4 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 1 0 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 1 1 0 6 Proportional Inte
186. 10 0 CVH Control Variable High and PD10 0 CVL Control Variable Low A disabled 0 value disables OL Output Limiting Control Variable High Limit CVH Output Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access CVH Control PD10 0 CVH_ word INT 0to100 control read write Variable High Limit When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVH Control Value High you enter is the maximum output in percent that the control variable attains If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH the CV is set overridden to the CVH value you entered and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit CUL is set If CV exceeds the maximum value the output is not overridden and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set Process Control Instruction 323 Control Variable Low Limit CVL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVL Control PD10 0 CVL word 0 to 100 control read write Variable Low Limit INT When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVL Control Value Low you enter is the minimum output in percent that the Control Variable attains If the calculated CV is below the minimum value the CV is set overridden to the CVL value you entered and the lower limit alarm bit CLL i
187. 101 11 11 41 JO J1 JO JO JO JO JO 1 1 JO JO 11 11 11 1 11 1 11 11 JO J0 JO JO JO JO JO JO Mask Mask 1 01 10 JO 1 11 1 1 11 1 JO JO JO JO 41 1111 11 JO JO 1 1 f 71 41 11 JO JO JO JO n 71 Intermediate Result Intermediate Result 1 11 10 fO 1 JO f1 0 10 JO JO fO JO JO JO JO 11 1 JO JO 1 1 f1 1 JO f0 JO JO fO JO f0 J0 Comparison of the Intermediate Results not equal The source mask and compare values must all be of the same data size either word or long word The data ranges for mask and compare are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFF Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 LIM Limit Test LIM _ Limit Test Low Lim N7 0 0 lt Test 0 0 lt High Lim N7 1 0 lt Compare Instructions 201 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MEQ Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Address x Joe eee Lg ie Data Files Function Files SS Mode Level i sS Parameter E se E i lt cc nm S 5 z o alale lso j l l Els l In nE Llll SMAA lun fla S aE ISIE IG Sle S15 E18 S aleia Elale Sia Source elel elelel
188. 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Example 1 off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 on on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold HSC Mode 3 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSC0 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 off on off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U loff on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 l Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge Y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC
189. 11 Reserved N bit read only 10 MG11 0 0 EW Enabled and Waiting N bit read only 1 MSG Enabled and Waiting O MSG not Enabled and Waiting 1 to Reserved N bit read only 9 0 MG11 0 0 R For PCCC Messaging Y bit read only Range 1 Local 0 Remote For CIP Messaging Target 1 Comms Module 0 Network Device For Modbus Messaging Range 1 Local Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 397 Control Bits Parameters General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channet 0 Enw ER fo Taget Device Message done ON lo Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Messaye Enabled EN o Local Node Addr dec 2 octal 2 Local Remote mO Ero CodefHex 0 r Error Description Ignore if Timed Out TO Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 TO Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Timed Out Bit TO can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control You can create your own timeout routine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer When the timer times out you can set the TO bit which removes the message from the system The controller resets the TO bit the next time the associated MSG r
190. 1200 10 9 us 0 8 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 7 us Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off When used on a rung the bit address being examined can correspond to the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or expansion I O or internal addresses data or function files Examples of devices that turn on or off e a push button wired to an input addressed as I1 0 4 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 178 Relay Type Bit Instructions e an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O00 0 2 e a timer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN e a bit in the bit file addressed as B3 16 The instructions operate as follows XIO and XIC Instruction Operation Rung State Addressed XIC Instruction X10 Instruction Bit True Off Returns a False Returns a True True On Returns a True Returns a False False Instruction is not evaluated Instruction is not evaluated Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 ee Address Data Files Function Files amp G Address Level gt Mode PA l Para
191. 16 4 L8 5 2 B 1 2 20 4 T 1 ACC 2 20 4 L 1 20 4 B 2 21 0 T ACC 2 121 6 LEI 20 1 B3 1 5 9 14 1 5 9 T4 4 9 B3 6 5 T4 7 1 T 1 19 7 B 1 1 21 6 T 1 21 8 TEL 19 8 BEL 22 3 TE 22 4 T4 ACC 5 1 L8 2 5 5 T4 1 ACC 16 0 T 1 ACC 19 9 L 1 2 20 4 T4 ACC 7 5 TI ACC 20 5 L 2 21 0 T 1 ACC 121 8 0 1 2 5 4 L8 1 5 9 T ACC 22 9 0 0 2 12 8 L8 6 5 Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using an Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressing ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction 2 5 us Source A N7 Source A 4 8 us Source B T4 ACC Source B 5 1 us Destination N Destination 20 1 us Total 32 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 us 4 8 us 5 7 us True case e XIC 0 0 us 4 8 us 4 8 us False case Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 477 MicroLogix 1500 Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet i below Scan Time Worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion I O is used 53 us Expansion Input Words X 3 us or X 7 5 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 10 ps Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution time
192. 17 286 refresh instruction 17 286 related publications 1 76 relay 1 604 relay logic 7 604 Index 613 relay type instructions 7 177 remote messages 21 434 remote packet support E 521 RES instruction 8 793 reserved bit 7 605 reset accumulated value instruction 5 140 reset instruction 8 793 restore 1 604 RET instruction 16 279 retentive data 7 605 retentive data lost status bit C 493 retentive timer on delay instruction 8 789 return from subroutine instruction 16 279 RS 232 definition 1 605 RTA instruction 3 74 RTC day of month status C 502 day of week status C 503 function file 3 71 hours status C 502 minutes status C 503 month status C 502 Quick Start example F 577 seconds status C 503 year status C 507 RTC Synchronization Quick Start example F 585 RTC synchronization Quick Start example F 585 RTO instruction 8 189 RTU definition 7 605 run mode 1 605 rung 1 605 S save 1 605 SBR instruction 16 279 scale instruction 10 215 scale with parameters instruction 10 216 scan 1 605 scan time 1 605 last 100 Sec scan time status C 507 maximum scan time status C 498 scan time worksheet MicroLogix 1200 A 469 MicroLogix 1500 B 477 scan toggle status bit C 500 SCL instruction 10 215 SCP instruction 10 216 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 614 Index selectable timed interrupt Quick Start example F 574 selectable timed interrupt STI function file 18 301 selectable timed start instruction 78 296 sequencer com
193. 1764 LRP False to True Transition for Reads 234 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 257 us 1 4 us per word Communications via Compact I O communication module i e 1769 SDN False to True Transition for Reads 206 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 234 us 1 4 us per word Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed The example below shows a message instruction 0000 B age ah 3 0 MSG Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG11 0 CDN gt Setup Screen CER gt If B3 0 is on 1 the MSG rung is true and MG11 0 is not already processing a message then MG11 0 is processed If one of the four buffers is available the message and its associated data are processed immediately TIP How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channel s communication protocol the baud rate of the communications port the number of retries needed Gif any and the destination device s readiness to receive the message Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 392 Communications Instructions The Message Element The MSG instruction built into the controller uses a MG data file to TEST RSS ioj x Data Files Cross Reference Ei OUTPUT Ei 1 INPUT E s2 STATUS Ei B3 BINARY El T4 Timer Ei
194. 2 Input Filter Selection Modified Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 13 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware ASCII String Manipulation Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 15 binary Oor1 status read This bit is set 1 whenever an invalid string length occurs When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 This bit applies to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B Controllers System Status File 495 Major Error Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 6 word 0 to FFFF status read write This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to occur SeeIdentifying Controller Faults on page 507 to learn more about troubleshooting faults Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 496 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 7 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS code is written to this location S 7 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode
195. 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates LIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 Cong word e Position This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 dong word The position is decremented after each unload LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 i i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode PA J Parameter 2 E cc a ne 8 5 Js 3 5 z g la jo 18 jo B le j Lt ln a JE e le ls e 15 oO v ja e Z ja B o B EE 2 amp D prr FA a 3 2 a E j ja 2 S ja LIFO e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length e e Position 1 See Important 2 Control file on note about indirect addressing y
196. 2 1 x Count HSC Mode 6 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B HSC Mode 6 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example 1 fl off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 y off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 3 Count input B leads count input A care tt rising edge falling edge Blank cells don Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 133 Inputs I1 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B With External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 7 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Comments Terminals Bit 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Example 1 f off 0 off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 coun
197. 2 147 483 647 ong word The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative See Updates to Math Status Bits on page 205 for more information SOR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 A Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E g E LS z a S ie ls 3 5 z s g la le lg le l l z Elz le le g la Ele S Ie S 2 5 o l lv la le lz 5 ua h E E E SERB EG amp i8 8 le la 4 fa z S la Source e e e e e e e e e e Destination o e jojo o o 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values Instruction Used To Page DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on the 220 corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 221 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks
198. 2009 You cannot use Indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions Controller OTL When Rung Is OTU When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 0 0 us 1 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 0 us 0 9 us 0 0 us The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions OTL turns on a bit while OTU turns off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION gt t Since these are latching outputs once set or reset they remain set or reset regardless of the rung condition Relay Type Bit Instructions 181 ONS One Shot N7 1 _ ONS 0 In the event of a power loss any OTL controlled bit including field devices energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when power was lost ATTENTION gt Under error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value ATTENTION gt Address
199. 2009 Parameter Target Device Message Timeout Communications Instructions 419 Description Defines the amount of time the controller waits for the reply before the message errors A timeout of 0 seconds means that the controller waits indefinitely for a reply Valid range is from 0 to 255 seconds Data Table Address 500CPU and PLC5 message types For a Read this is the address in the processor which is to return data Valid file types are S B T C R N and L For a Write this is the address in the processor which receives data Valid file types are O S B T C R N L and RTC 2 4 Data Table Offset This is the word offset value in the common interface file byte offset for PLC device in the target processor which is to send the data 485CIF message types MB Data Address Specifies the Modbus address in the target device Valid range is from 1 to 65 536 Local Slave Node Specifies the node number of the device that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 to 31 Address for DH 485 protocol 0 to 254 for DF1 protocol 0 to 63 for DeviceNet or 0 to 247 for Modbus Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote Modbus messages are local only 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 2 485CIF write ST to 485CIF only 3 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only 500 Series B and later Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 420 Communica
200. 35 B51 35 B51 83 4 B51 4 B51 52 20 B51 20 B51 68 36 B51 36 B51 84 5 B51 5 B51 53 21 B51 21 B51 69 37 B51 37 B51 85 6 B51 6 B51 54 22 B51 22 B51 70 38 B51 38 B51 86 7 B51 7 B51 55 23 B51 23 B51 71 39 B51 39 B51 87 8 B51 8 B51 56 24 B51 24 B51 72 40 B51 40 B51 88 9 B51 9 B51 57 25 B51 25 B51 73 41 B51 41 B51 89 10 B51 10 B51 58 26 B51 26 B51 74 42 B51 42 B51 90 11 B51 11 B51 59 27 B51 27 B51 75 43 B51 43 B51 91 12 B51 12 B51 60 28 B51 28 B51 76 44 B51 44 B51 92 13 B51 13 B51 61 29 B51 29 B51 77 45 B51 45 B51 93 14 B51 14 B51 62 30 B51 30 B51 78 46 B51 46 B51 94 15 B51 15 B51 63 31 B51 31 B51 79 47 B51 47 B51 95 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Base Hardware Information Function File Function Files 83 The bit number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data bit as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Prote
201. 62 RMO001F EN P October 2009 154 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output The variables within each PTO sub element along with what type of Function File behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below All examples illustrate PTO 0 Terms and behavior for Sub Elements Summary PTO 1 MicroLogix 1500 only are identical Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Range lype UserProgram For More Format Access Information OUT Output PTO 0 0UT word INT 2 or 3 control fread only 155 DN Done PTO 0 DN bit Oor1 status read only 155 DS Decelerating Status PT0 0 DS bit Oor1 status read only 156 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit Oor1 status read only 156 AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit Oor1 status read only 156 RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit Oor1 control read write 157 IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit Oor1 status read only 157 ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit Oor1 status read only 158 NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit Oor1 status read only 158 JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit Oor1 status read only 165 JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit Oor1 status read only 166 ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent PTO 0 ADI bit Oor1 control read write 161 JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bit Oor1 control read write 165 JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit Oo
202. 62 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Double click on the Channel Status 4 gt Channel Contiguration Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen Protocol Configuration 531 DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status Data for DF1 Half Duplex Master E Project Help Controter Controller Properties Q Processor Status o Function Files Ju 1O Configuration E SEER Oy Program Files SvS0 syS1 n2 S E Data Fics B Cross Reference P 00 output O n neur D s2 stans Monn nmam E 4 We 4 Channel Status Channel 1 DF1 Half Duplex Master Messages Sent 0 Messages Retried 0 Messages Received fo sds Undelivered Messages 0 Duplicate Messages Received 0 Bad Packet No ACK Sent eo Max Normal Poll List Scan 100ms 0____ Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms Modem Lines RTS CTS Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms D Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms Clear Communication Status Function DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Status Field Status File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Polls Sent CSx 15
203. 67 for word or 2 147 836 648 or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a Saturated result is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored The saturated results are If Destination is an integer and the result is positive overflow Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If Destination is an integer and the result is negative overflow Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 long word Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Math Instructions 209 Considerations When Using Floating Point Data Updates to Math Status Bits e Carry is reset e Overflow Is set if the result is infinity NAN or if a conversion to integer overflows otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if the lower 31 bits of the Floating Point Data result is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set bit 15 for word bit 31 for long word or floating point data otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 210 Math Instructions ADD Add SUB Subtract Instruction Type output
204. 86 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 12 1 103 1 3 3 Buffer Absolute Value ABS 0 0 3 8 ASCII String to Integer ACI 0 0 17 6 7 2 1 5 0 0 24 6 11 6 char 1 5 char ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 249 1 receive 28 9 transmit 33 6 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 me 11 5 2 0 char Add ADD 0 0 2 3 3 0 0 11 9 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 1484 2 9 25 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 11 3 109 4 5 3 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0 0 29 3 5 2 1 4 0 0 82 0 1 6 char And AND 0 0 2 2 2 8 0 0 9 2 3 0 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 464 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Read Characters ARD 11 8 132 3 49 7 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Read Line ARL 11 7 139 7 50 1 14 3 char ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 16 2 4 0 6 0 Long Word addressing level does no
205. A waveform at the specified frequency with the specified duty cycle is output 4 The rung that the PWM is on is solved false 5 The PWM instruction is IDLE While the PWM instruction is being executed status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PWM instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running TIP PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PWM instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements Each element can be set to control either output 2 00 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB or output 3 00 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only Function file element PWM 0 is shown below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 170 Using High Speed Outputs z Function Files IES HSC PTO PWM sti Jen RTC DAT TP MMi lt gt OUT Output DS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status AS Accelerating Status H PP Profile Parameter Select HIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status Normal Operation Stat
206. Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Bulletins 1762 and 1764 Instruction Set Reference Ti SSS is ew p gt Rockwell Automation Important User Information Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc
207. Bit 1 0 last state 0 0 last state 1 1 1 0 1 0 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered Using the MVM Instruction When using the MVM instruction observe the following e Source Mask and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words or all long words To mask data set the mask bit to zero to pass data set the mask bit to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address TIP Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered as shown in the shaded areas in the following table Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MVM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Move Instructions 241 Mask Example Word Addressing Level Word Value in Value in Binary Hexadecimal 15 174 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 15 4 3 12 1 T0 Value in Destination FFFF 1 11 11 11 11 11 1111 111 111111 111 Before Move Source Value 5555 O 11 JO 1 JO 11 1011 101101110 0 1 Mask FOFO 171 11 11 0 JO 010111111110 010 Value in Destination 5F5F O 14 JO 1 1 1 414147041 0 1 1 1 1 After Move e Valid constants for the mask are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483
208. Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault MicroLogix 1500 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Mode Switch Position Halted Mode Behavior at Power Up Program False Don t Care Don t Care Program True Program w Fault Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault Run False Last State REM Suspend or Suspend Suspend Any Mode except REM Suspend or Suspend Run Run Don t Care Run True Don t Care Don t Care Run w Fault 1 Run w Fault is a fault condition just as if the controller were in the Program w Fault mode outputs are reset and the controller program is not being executed However the controller enters Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 See also MB Mode Behavior on page 79 System Status File 487 Mayor Error Halted Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 13 binary Oor1 status read write The controller sets 1 this bit when a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition and word S 6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller e turns all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED e or enters the User Fa
209. Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PWM Run Status RS Element Description Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Access RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit Oor 1 status read only The PWM RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program e Set 1 Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 172 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 e Cleared 0 Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PWM Accelerating Status AS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS Jbi Oor1 status read only The PWM AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the acceleration phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PWM Profile Parameter Select PP Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access PP Profile Param
210. E o cc a ba F ae 3 so z oO o ijn l gt 19 o __ l S lb l ln W JE e ls lo le le a lo e lz lu b u S le EZ IE IG ie IE IS FS is fe 6 S 8 e FIFO e e gt Po ele Destination elele e e e ele Control 2 Length e e Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 260 File Instructions IMPORTANT Mee A indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load LFL _ LIFO Load L C EN gt gt Source N7 0 LIFO N7 1 CDN gt Control R6 0 Length 1 lt lt EM gt Position 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the LFL Instruction File Instructions 261 Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 25 5 us 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 22 2 US 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a LIFO stack This instruction s counterpart LIFO unload LFU is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below
211. ED SEE S 3 watchdog timeout value S 3H loop and correct the problem e Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file 0023 STI ERROR An error occurred in the STI Recoverable See the Error Code in the STI Function File for configuration the specific error 0028 INVALID OR e A fault routine number was Non User e Either clear the fault routine file number NONEXISTENT USER entered in the status file S 29 in the status file or FAULT ROUTINE number 8 29 but either the e create a fault routine for the file number VALUE fault routine was not physically reference in the status file S 29 The file created or number must be greater than 2 and less e the fault routine number was than 256 less than 3 or greater than 255 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the Recoverable Correct the program to ensure that there are INDIRECTION ladder program is outside of the no indirect references outside data file space OUTSIDE OF DATA entire data file space SPACE Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 002E Ell ERROR An error occurred in the Ell Recoverable See the Error Code in the Ell Function File for configuration the specific error 0030 SUBROUTINE The JSR instruction nesting level Non User Correct the user program to reduce the NESTING EXCEEDS exceeded the controller memory nesting levels used and to meet the LIMIT space restrictions for the JSR instruction Then reload the program and Run 0031 UNSUPPORTED The pr
212. End 1 0 1 0 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 1 7 1 7 1 8 2 9 3 5 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 2 3 2 5 0 0 6 8 2 0 Message Steady State MSG 6 0 17 0 2 9 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 198 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 226 1 4 Transition for Writes word Multiply MUL 0 0 5 8 2 0 0 1 27 6 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 72 2 0 0 0 10 0 3 0 Negate NEG 0 0 1 9 3 0 0 0 10 4 3 0 Not Equal NEQ 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 3 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 2 4 2 5 0 0 8 1 2 5 One Shot ONS 1 7 2 2 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 3 4 2 7 5 4 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 2 8 3 2 5 4 Output Enable OTE 0 0 1 2 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 0 9 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 0 9 0 6 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 8 9 251 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 21 1 72 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 21 1 107 4 1 9 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not 0 0 17 8 2 0 apply Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 474 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True
213. Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors Error Description The controller supports eight Modbus commands If the target device supports any of these Modbus command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported Modbus commands include Modbus Command Types Modbus Command Used For 01 Read Coil Status reading bits 02ReadInputStatus jreadingbits i tt sti lt s 03 Read Holding Registers reading words 04 Read Input Registers freadingwords st ti tsti sSsSSS 05 Write Single Coil writing 1 bit Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 411 Modbus Command Types Modbus Command Used For 06 Write Single Register writing 1 word 15 Write Multiple Coil writing multiple bits 16 Write Multiple Registers writing multiple words 1 MicroLogix 1200 Series C FRN 8 and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRN 9 and higher Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 412 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address in the local controller Valid file types for the Data Table Address are shown below Message Read Message Write Bit B Output 0 Timer T Input 1 Counter C Bit B Control R Timer T Integer N Counter C Floating Point F Control R Long Word L Integer N Floating P
214. F EN P October 2009 422 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Example 3 Local Read from a PLC 5 Message Instruction Setup 24 MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 General This Controller Communi unication Command Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements r Target Device Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N7 50 Local Node Addr dec Channet 0 Local Remote octal Control Bis Awaiting Execution EW 0 Enor ER 0 Message done ON o Message Transmitting ST l Message Enabled EN o Eror Enor Code Hex 0 In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target device s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types of B N L lt gt read write 0 1l S B N L T lt gt read write T C lt gt read write G R lt gt read write R 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages Communications Instructions 423 Example 4 Configuring a Local DeviceNet
215. F EN P October 2009 46 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Addressing Addressing Details The I O addressing scheme and examples are shown below Slot Number Data File Number ae feo XOss w b Input I or Output 0 gt nput I or Output 0 S w Slot Delimiter Bit Delimiter Word Delimiter 1 1 0 located on the controller embedded 1 0 is slot 0 1 0 added to the controller expansion 1 0 begins with slot 1 Format Explanation Od s w b X File Type Input I or Output 0 Data File Number optional 0 output 1 input Id s w b Slot delimiter optional not required for Data Files 2 to 255 s Slot number decimal Embedded 1 0 slot 0 Expansion I 0 e slots 1 to 6 for MicroLogix 1200 See page 19 for an illustration e slots 1 to 16 for MicroLogix 1500 See page 28 for an illustration Word delimiter Required only if a word number is necessary as noted below w Word number Required to read write words or if the discrete bit number is above 15 Range 0 to 255 Bit delimiter b Bit number Oto 15 1 Slots 1 to 8 for Series A Base Units Addressing Examples Addressing Level Example Address Slot Word Bit Bit Addressing 0 0 4 2 Output Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 output bit 4 0 2772 Output Slot 2 Expansion 1 0 word 0 output bit 7 1 1742 Input Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 input bit 4 1 0 15 2 Input Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 input b
216. F EN P October 2009 There is a Data Log Status DLS file element for each Data Log Queue The DLS file does not exist until a data log queue has been configured The Data Log Status file has 3 word elements Word 0 is addressable by bit only through ladder logic Words 1 and 2 are addressable by word and or bit through ladder logic The number of DLS file elements depends upon the number of queues specified in the application The status bits and words are described below Data Log Status DLS File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 los 07 loe 05 04 03 J02 01 J00 0 EN 0 alova jo fo lo o To lo jo lo jo jo jo fo 1 FSZ File Size number of records allocated 2 RST Records Stored number of records recorded 1 EN Enable Bit 2 DN Done Bit 3 OV Overflow Bit Data Logging Enable EN When the DLG instruction rung is true the Data Logging Enable N is set 1 and the DLG instruction records the defined data set To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q EN where Q is the queue number Data Logging Done DN The Data Logging Done DN bit is used to indicate when the associated queue is full This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when the queue becomes full This bit is cleared when a record is retrieved from the queue To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLS0 Q DN were Q is t
217. FO Unload FFU 9 7 27 7 0 65 13 4 9 7 29 4 1 25 long 3 4 word word Fill File FLL 0 0 12 1 0 43 12 0 0 0 12 3 0 8 long 2 5 word word Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 12 3 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Gray Code GCD 0 0 9 5 Greater Than or Equal To GEQ 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 2 9 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 473 Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Greater Than GRT 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 24 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 39 7 73 0 0 40 3 78 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 22 5 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask 10M 0 0 19 4 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 1 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 0 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or Equal To LEQ 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 2 9 Less Than LES 1 1 1 2 1 3 25 2 6 29 LIFO Load LFL 9 7 22 2 34 9 7 27 4 3 9 LIFO Unload LFU 9 7 25 6 34 9 7 27 4 34 Limit LIM 5 3 5 5 2 3 11 7 12 2 40 Master Control Reset MCR Start 0 8 0 8 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR
218. Function Files TIP Target Bit File TBF e Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses N50 51 and above in this example e The DAT always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file The value stored in the TBF location identifies the bit file with which the DAT will interface The DAT can read or write to any valid bit file within the controller Valid bit files are B3 through B255 When the DAT reads a valid bit file number it can access the first 48 bits 0 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits 48 to 95 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the first 48 bits The only bit file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TBF location The TBF location can only be changed by a program download IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TBF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program The example table below shows how the DAT uses the configuration information with bit file number 51 DAT 0 TBF 51 Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit 0 B51 0 B51 48 16 B51 16 B51 64 32 B51 32 B51 80 1 B51 1 B51 49 17 B51 65 33 B51 33 B51 81 2 B51 2 B51 50 18 B51 66 34 B51 34 B51 82 3 B51 3 B51 51 1 19 B51 67
219. G based Polling Mode Operation With MSG based Polling Mode the master device only initiates communication with a slave when a MSG instruction to that slave is triggered in ladder logic Once the read or write command has been transmitted the master waits the Reply MSG Timeout period and then polls that slave for a reply to its command The master can be configured either to ignore MSG based Polling don t allow slaves to initiate or to accept MSG based Polling allow slaves to initiate MSGs that may have been triggered and queued up in the slave Message Based Polling Mode Channel Configuration Channel Configuration E General Channel 0 Protocol Configuration 529 x Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master gt Node Aiken Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Node aikan fi decimal fi decimal Baud 1200 Baud 1200 hd Paity NONE gt Party NONE Protocol Control Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Camer gt ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Error Detection CRC v PTS Off Delay x20ms 0 Eror Detection CRC RTS Off Delay x20ms 0 Polling Mode Msg Don t allow Slaves to Initia RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 Polling Mode Msg Allow Slaves to Initiate RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries Bo IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries Bo Reply
220. GRT Greater Than A gt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LES Less Than A lt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type input Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 2 8 us 2 7 US MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 2 5 US The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value The LES instruction is used to test whether one value is less than a second value GRT and LES Instruction Operation Instruction _ Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GRT A gt B true A lt B false LES A B false A lt B true IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEO and LEQ instructions GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To GEO Grtr Than or Eq A gt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LEQ Less Than or Eql A lt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type input Compare Instructions 199 Execution Time for the GEQ and LEQ Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 2 8 US 2 7 US MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6
221. I MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output BSL Bit Shift Left CEN gt File B3 1 Control R6 0 CDN gt Execution Time for the BSL Instruction Bit Address B32 0 0 Length 1 lt Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 32 us 1 3 ws word 1 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 06 us word 1 4 us The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted left through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSL instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 251 Source Bit 22 12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 31 130 129 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 120119 18 117 16 47 46 45 144 43 42 141 40 39 138 37 136 135 34 133 132 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 481 M 98 Bit Array B3 1 RESERVED 173172 71 70 69 68 167 66 165 64 Unload Bit 4 R6 0 10 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions This instruction uses the following operands e File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated e Control The control operand is the
222. LE Offset in elements into CIF Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device 500CPU or PLC 5 Sub Address Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 Target File Type Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Target File Element Number for B Y Word read write S N F T C R L ST and RTC files or Target File Slot Number for O and files 15 Target File Element Number for O Y Word read only and files Set to zero for any file other than Oorl 1 The file number for RTC function files is set to 0 by the programming software 2 The F file is only permitted in the MSG instruction for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers 3 RTC and ST are only permitted in the MSG instruction for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B and higher controllers Message File Target Location Information Target Device CIP Generic MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 6 and higher Processor only Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 flargetClass Y Wod readonly 13 MG11 0 TFN Target Instance Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE CIP Send Data Count Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device Modbus Device Commun
223. LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 2to7 status read write 120 HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit Oto7 status read write 122 UFI Underflow Interrupt HSC 0 UFI bit 2to7 status read write 124 OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 OFI bit Oto7 status read write 126 LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR bit 2to7 status read only 121 HPR High Preset Reached HSC 0 HPR bit 2to7 status read only 123 DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit Oto7 status read only 127 UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit Oto7 status read write 123 OF Overflow HSC 0 0F bit Oto7 status read write 124 MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bit Oor1 status read write 127 CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2to7 status read only 127 CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bit Oto7 status read only 128 MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT Oto7 control fread only 128 ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT Oto7 control read write 134 HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT Oto 7 control read write 134 LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 134 OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT Oto7 control read write 135 UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 135 OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary Oto 7 control fread only 136 HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary Oto7 control read write 138 LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary 2to7 control read write 138 Publication 1762 RMO001F
224. Level ES Detector gt lt Control Valve The PID equation controls the process by sending an output signal to the control valve The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input the greater the output signal Alternately the smaller the Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 316 Process Control Instruction The PID Equation Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 error the smaller the output signal An additional value feed forward or bias can be added to the control output as an offset The PID result control variable drives the process variable toward the set point The PID instruction uses the following algorithm Standard equation with dependent gains 1 d PV Output Ko E gt E dt Tp bias e ral Oe l Standard Gains constants are Term Range Low to High Reference Controller Gain Ke 0 01 to 327 67 dimensionless Proportional Reset Term 1 1 327 67 to 0 01 minutes per repeat Integral Rate Term Tp 0 01 to 327 67 minutes Derivative 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 PID range when Reset and Gain Range RG bit is set to 1 For more information on reset and gain see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 332 The derivative term rate provides smoothing by means of a low pass filter The cut off frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term PD Data Fi ins
225. M001F EN P October 2009 340 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero crossing deadband values in engineering units and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units Remember the process variable PV must still be within the range 0 to 16383 The PV is displayed in engineering units however Select scaling as follows 1 Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and Mins in the PID control block The MinS value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable MaxS corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading These values reflect the process limits Setpoint scaling is selected by entering a non zero value for one or both parameters If you enter the same value for both parameters setpoint scaling is disabled For example if measuring a full scale temperature range of 73 C PV 0 to 1156 C PV 16383 enter a value of 73 for MinS and 1156 for MaxS Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16383 Signal conversions could be as follows Example Values Process limits 73 to 1156 C Transmitter output if used 4 to 20 mA Output of analog input module 0 to 16383 PID instruction MinS to MaxS 73 to 1156 C 2 Enter the setpoint word 2 and deadband word 9 in the same scaled engineering uni
226. Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the scanner and a MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor An example network is shown below PC with RSNetWorx MicroLogix 1500 Controller 1 0 for DeviceNet software Bank with 1769 SDN Module 1770 KFD PC Communication ____ m Module tae DeviceNet Network BP E F ae ma a 8 P w Tr NE E Series 9000 MicroLogix 1000 Controller MicroLogix 1200 Controller Photoeye pediSTATION Connected via 1761 NET DNI Connected via 1761 NET DNI ogggg fo oo 600 1305 Drive Connected via 1203 GU6 Enhanced DeviceNet Communications Module Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 424 Communications Instructions Message Setup Screen e B30 UUW Read Wnnte Message CEN e 1u MSG File MGI HONY e CERY uuU CEND Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections f
227. Msg Timeout 20m Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Reply Msg Timeout x20 ms 1 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel Apply Help When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Master the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 1 only 1 LRP Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 530 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only
228. N P October 2009 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher 547 Parameter Options Programming Software Default Parity none even odd none Control Line No Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking No Handshaking Inter character Timeout x1 ms 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet 0 RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem or Full Dup
229. Normal Poll List Scan 20 Max Normal Poll List Scan 21 Last Priority Poll List Scan 22 Max Priority Poll List Scan DF1 Half Duplex Master Messages Sent Messages Retried E E Messages Received Loo Undelivered Messages Ea fd fd Polls Sent Duplicate Messages Received Lack of memory 0 Bad Packets Received 0 ___ Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms Max Normal Poll List Scan 100ms oid Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms 0 Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms oid Modem Lines RATS CTS DCD Clear Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 92 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 DF1 Radio Modem Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 1 g 0 CIS PORS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 to 15 J Reserved 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 to 22 l Reserved 01x Channel 0 f DF1 Radio Modem Messages Sent Bo Undelivered Messages E Messages Rec
230. O001F EN P October 2009 440 Communications Instructions Channel Configur Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 441 MSG Instruction Error When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data Codes the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software Error Code Description of Error Condition 02H Target node is busy NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified 05H Local processor is off line possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset one possible source is from the DF1 master OFH DCOMM button was activated while an ASCII instruction was waiting to execute 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 12H Local channel configuration protocol error exists 13H Local MSG configuratio
231. Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 ToThisCtr Range12T015 3 ToThisCounter_1 Range12To15 3 Type Range12To15 3 LoadDirectWrite Range12To15 3 Invert Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 42 1 0 Configuration 1769 HSC High Speed Counter Module Input Array The information in the following table is a quick reference of the array Refer to the Compact I O High Speed Counter User Manual publication 1769 UM006 for detailed information The default value for the Input Array is all zeros 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description 0 zi B1 A1 z0 B0 AO inputStateA0 InputStateZ1 1 Outi5 Outl4 Outi3 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 OutO7 OutOG Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 Readback 0 Readback 15 2 InvalidRangeLimit12 15 InvalidCtrAssignToRange12 15 GenErr InvOut MCfg OutOOvercurrent Out3 Status Flags InvalidRangeLimit12 15 RangeActive 0 3 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R09 R08 R07 R06 R05 R04 R03 R02 R01 R00 RangeActive 15 InvalidCtrAssignToRange12 15 4 Ctr 0 CurrentCount Ctr 0 CurrentCount GenError 5 6 InvalidOutput Ctr 0 StoredCount Ctr 0 StoredCount 7 ModConfig 8 Ctr 0 CurrentRate Ctr 0 CurrentRate Out0Overcurrent0 3 9 10 Ctr 0 Pulselnterval Ctr 0 Pulselnterval 11 12 CoPW RV CUdf COvf Ctr 0 StatusFlags
232. Overview Programmable Limit Switch Overview Chapter 5 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The MicroLogix 1200 has one 20 kHz high speed counter the MicroLogix 1500 has two Functionally the counters are identical Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the controller HSCO0 utilizes inputs 0 through 3 and HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only utilizes inputs 4 through 7 Each counter operates independently from the other TIP HSCO is used in this document to define how any HSC works The MicroLogix 1500 s HSC1 is identical in functionality meta The HSC function can only be used with the controller s embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the HSL and RAC instructions as follows e High Speed Counter CHSC Function File on page 110 e HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 139 e RAC Reset Accumulated Value on page 140 The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch See page 141 for more information Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 110 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a HSC Function File This file provides access to HSC configuration data a
233. Program from the Memory Module to the controller If the passwords do not match the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set S 5 9 If you are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a System or Master Password to go on line with the controller To do SO 1 Enter 65257636 the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM MicroLogix Clear Memory 2 When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller 3 If you reply yes to this prompt the programming software instructs the controller to clear Program memory Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 68 Controller Memory and File Types Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has been transferred to the controller This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM original equipment manufacturer who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a controller The Allow Future Access setting is found in the Controller Properties window as shown below Controller Propert
234. Q instructions You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e For EQU GEQ GRT LEQ and LES If either Source is not a number NAN then rung state changes to false e For NEQ If either Source is not a number NAN then rung state remains true Compare Instructions 197 EQU Equal NEQ Not Equal Instruction Type input EQU Equal Source A N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the EQU and NEQ Instructions Source B N7 1 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False NEO MicroLogix 1200 EQU word 1 3 us 1 1 us Not Equal 1 ae T long word 2 8 us 9 us 0 lt NEQ word 1 3 us 1 1 us Source B N7 1 lona word 75 77 0c g US 7 us MicroLogix 1500 EQU word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 1 9 us NEQ word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 3 US 2 5 us The EQU instruction is used to test whether one value is equal to a second value The NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value EQU and NEQ Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State EQU A B true A B false NEO A B false A B true Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 198 Compare Instructions GRT Greater Than LES Less Than
235. R Clear Set all bits of a word to zero 212 ABS Absolute Value Find the absolute value of the source value 213 SOR Square Root Find the square root of a value 218 SCL Scale Scale a value 215 SCP Scale with Parameters Scale a value to a range determined by creating 216 a linear relationship Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 204 Math Instructions Using the Math Most math instructions use three parameters Source A Source B and Instructions Destination additional parameters are described where applicable later in this chapter The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values The result is stored in the Destination When using math instructions observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes Sources are evaluated at the highest precision word or long word of the operands Then the result is converted to the size of the destination If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 647 Cong word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Sources can be con
236. RTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Instructions 205 After a math instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry sets if carry is generated otherwise resets 0 1 Overflow sets when the result of a math instruction does not fit into the destination otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 2 14 Math Overflow examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the Selected result when an overflow occurs 5 0 Overflow Trap sets if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise resets 1 Control bits Overflow Trap Bit 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement The following
237. RTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Scaled Output parameter in the SCP instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Math Instructions 217 Special Considerations when Using Floating Point Parameters If any of the parameters except Output are NAN not a number Infinity or De normalized then the result is NAN If y4 Yo OF Xj X result in an overflow then the result is NAN Other Considerations If y4 Yo 0 the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x X 0 and x xp the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x4 X 0 and x does not equal xp The Result becomes a negative overflow for integer values or a negative NAN for floating point values Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 218 Math Instructions SOR Square Root SOR Square Root Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SOR Instruction Controller Data Size WhenRunglss True False MicroLogix 1200 word 26 0 us 0 0 us long word 30 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 22 3 us 0 0 us long word 26 0 us 0 0 us The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination The data ranges for the source is 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to
238. RTU Master MSG Instruction MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 81 Illegal Function The function code sent by the Master is not supported by the slave 1 or has an incorrect parameter 82 Illegal Data Address The data address referenced in the Master command does not exist 2 in the slave or access to that address is not allowed 83 Illegal Data Value The data value being written is not allowed either because it is out 3 of range or it is being written to a read only address 84 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred while the slave was attempting to 4 perform the requested action 85 Acknowledge The slave has accepted the request but a long duration of time will 5 be required to process the request 86 Slave Device Busy The slave is currently processing a long duration command 6 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 556 Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 87 Negative Acknowledge The slave cannot perform the program function received in the 7 command 88 Memory Parity Error The slave attempted to read extended memory but detected a 8 parity error in the memory 89 Non standard Error Code An error code greater than 8 was returned by the s
239. Remote Bridge Address This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device In this example the remote bridge address is set to zero because the target device SLC 5 04 at node 63 octal is a remote capable device If the target device is remote capable the remote bridge address is not required If the target device is not remote capable SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and MicroLogix 1000 Series A B and C the remote bridge address is required Remote Station Address This variable is the final destination address of the message instruction In this example integer file 50 elements 0 to 4 of the SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 at node 63 octal receives data from the MicroLogix 1500 controller at node 12 on Link ID 1 Remote Bridge Link ID This variable is a user assigned value that defines the remote network as a number This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging to that network In the example any controller on Link ID 1 sending data to a device on Link ID 100 must use the remote bridge link ID of the passthru device In this example the SLC 5 04 on Link ID1 node 17 is the passthru device Passthru Link ID Set the Passthru Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen The Link ID value is a user defined number between 1 and 65 535 All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local network must have the same number for this variable Publication 1762 RM
240. Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion DF1 Radio Modem Channel 1 Configuration MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP x General Channel O Channel 1 Driver DF1 Radio Modem v Node Address Bes isco 1 decimal Parit NONE x id Store and Forward File 0 Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex Modem with DCD handshakir x Eror Detection CRC v RTS Off Delay x20 ms f0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 DCD Wait Delay x1 Sec 1 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem the following parameters can be changed for Channel 1 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 538 Protocol Configuration DF1 Radio Modem Channel 1 Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 1 only Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast Store and Forward Store and Forward allows messages between two out of radio range nodes to be routed through 0 File Number one or mo
241. S Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash e Replace the Controller MicroLogix 1200 only e Replace the Base Unit MicroLogix 1500 only e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 0011 EXECUTABLE FILE 2 IS MISSING Ladder File 2 is missing from the program Non User e Re compile and reload the program Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 510 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0012 LADDER PROGRAM The ladder program has a memory _ Non User e Reload the program or re compile and ERROR integrity problem reload the program If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual 0015 1 0 CONFIGURATION The user program 1 0 configuration Non User Re compile and reload the program and enter FILE ERROR is invalid the Run mode If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program 0016 STARTUP The user fault routine was executed Recoverable e Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is consistent PROTECTION FAULT at power up prior to the main ladder with the application requirements and program Bit 1 13 Major Error c
242. SC 0 OF Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 125 This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 126 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Overflow Mask OFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OFM Overflow HSC 0 0FM lbi Mask t Oto7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The OFM Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Overflow Interrupt OFI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OFI Overflow HSC 0 0FI J bi Interrupt t Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The OFI Overflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the over
243. SCII string compare instruction 20 379 ASCII string concatenate 20 369 ASCII string extract 20 370 ascii string manipulation error C 494 ASCII string search instruction 20 378 ASCII string to integer instruction 20 367 ASCII test buffer for line instruction 20 365 ASCII timing diagram 20 387 ASCII write instruction 20 367 ASCII write with append instruction 20 358 ASR instruction 20 379 AWA and AWT timing diagram 20 381 AWA instruction 20 358 AWT instruction 20 367 base hardware information file 3 83 battery life expectancy 3 73 operation 3 72 battery low status bit C 494 baud rate 1 597 baud rate status C 498 BHI Function File 3 83 bit 1 597 bit instructions 7 177 bit shift left instruction 74 250 bit shift right instruction 14 252 bit wise AND instruction 12 233 block diagrams 1 597 Boolean operators 1 597 branch 1 598 BSL instruction 74 250 BSR instruction 14 252 C carry flag C 487 catalog number status C 504 channel 0 communications status C 499 CSO communications status file 3 84 channel configuration Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 608 Index DF1 full duplex parameters E 522 DF1 half duplex parameters F 529 F 533 DF1 radio modem parameters F 536 E 538 DH485 parameters 579 Modbus RTU Master parameters F 546 Modbus RTU Slave parameters F 548 E 550 clear instruction 10 212 clearing controller faults D 507 controller memory 2 67 clock free running C 497 CLR instruction 10 212 common technique
244. Swap Swap low byte with high byte ina 266 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B and higher controllers only specified number of words Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 246 File Instructions CPW Copy Word Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CPW Instruction Copy vie l Controller When Rung Is Source HSC 0 2 True False ee i MicroLogix 1200 Series C and higher only 18 3 us 0 8 us word 0 0 us Png MicroLogix 1500 Series C and higher only 15 8 us 0 7 us word 10 0 us The CPW instruction copies words of data in ascending order from one location Source to another Destination Although similar to the File Copy COP instruction the CPW instruction allows different source and destination parameters Examples include e integer to long word e long word to floating point e long word to integer e integer to PTO function file Observe the following restrictions when using the CPW instruction e The length of the data transferred cannot exceed 128 words e Function files can be used for Source or Destination but not both e When referencing either a PLS file or a function file addressing must be specified to the sub element level e You can reference a sub element of bits in a function file containing a combination of read only and read write bits e You cannot directly reference the high word of a long word as an operand in the CPW instruction e A Major fault 0
245. Sx 0 5 15 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Maximum Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 22 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program scans The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in S 22 If a scan value is larger than the previous the larger value is stored in S 22 This value indicates in 100 us increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Resolution is 100 ps to 0 ps For example the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle User Fault Routine File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 29 word 0 to 255 status read only This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated System Status File 499 STI Set Point Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 30 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 SPM SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 301 for more information STI File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program A
246. T Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 18 1 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1500 1764 24BWA 11 24V de 12 relay Base Units 1764 24AWA 1 120V ac 12 relay 1764 28BXB 1 24V dc 12 6 relay 6 FET AC embedded inputs have fixed input filters DC embedded inputs have configurable input filters for a number of special functions that can be used in your application These are high speed counting event interrupts and latching inputs The 1764 28BXB has two high speed outputs for use as pulse train output PTO and or pulse width modulation PWM outputs The 1762 L24BXB and L40BXB each have one high speed output Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 19 MicroLogix 1200 If the application requires more I O than the controller provides you can Expansion l 0 attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion I 0 Modules MicroLogix 1200 expansion I O Bulletin 1762 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1200 you can attach up to six additional I O modules The number of 1762 I O modules that can be attached to the MicroLogix 1200 is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See the MicroLogix 1200 User Manual publication 1762 UM001 for more information on valid configurations TIP Visit the MicroLogix web site http www ab com micrologix for the M
247. The RAC instruction uses the following parameters e Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used Counter Number 0 HSCO MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Counter Number 1 HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only e Source Specifies the location of the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator The data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode Parameter E s g z a 8 Q g E a be i gt e B la le z5 gt gt o O O L Sf PBIEFEIJ EERE amp Sg 4 E g 5 e o v wu o E le la o a ca E l a 6 fa S Ss a Counter Number Source e o o Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Programmable Limit Switch PLS File Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 141 The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch When PLS operation is enabled the HSC High Speed Counter uses a PLS data file for limit cam positions Each limit cam positio
248. The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Suspend File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 8 word 0 to 255 status read write When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS file is written to this location S 8 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 9 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 27 SeeActive Node Table Block on page 98 for more information System Status File 497 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 10 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 28 SeeActive Node T
249. The data range for the output high source is from 0 to 05 535 Output Low Source Specifies the value in the LPO low preset output register The data range for the output low source is from 0 to 05 535 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 x 7 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode E e Parameter j E lo Y ae jn z SF ell 2 le E g je g l lz _ E B l laga e 12 E e 5 2 5 o l lo la elz iu b h E la EIS IE lE la Els e 18 le a E la B is 8 fa Counter Number High Preset ele e o o e o o ele Low Preset ele e o o e o o e Output High Source ele elele elele ele Output Low Source ele elele elele ele Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 140 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch RAC Reset Accumulated Value RAC Reset Accumulated Value Counter HSCO Source 0 Instruction Type output Controller Execution Time When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 21 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 17 8 us 0 0 us The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator
250. The label is local to a program file Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 278 Program Control Instructions LBL Label Instruction Type input 02 0 tT LBL Execution Time for the LBL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump JMP instruction to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file JSR Jump to Subroutine Instruction Type output JSR _ Jump To Subroutine SBR File Number U 255 Execution Time for the JSR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 18 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 18 0 us 0 0 us The JSR instruction causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine SBR file number After executing the SBR control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 SBR Subroutine Label SBR Subroutine RET Return from Subroutine Return RET Instruction Type input Program Control Instructions 279
251. The number of poll packets sent by the processor Lack of Memory CSx 17 The number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have available memory Last Normal Poll List Scan CSx 19 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Normal Poll List Last Priority Poll List Scan CSx 21 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Priority Poll List Message Retry CSx 13 The number of message retries sent by the processor Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that were sent by the processor but not acknowledged by the destination device Duplicate Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packets Received CSx 16 The number of incorrect data packets received by the processor for which no ACK was returned Max Normal Poll List Scan CSx 20 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Normal Poll List Max Priority Poll List Scan CSx 22 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Priority Poll List Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 532 Protocol Configuration Communication Status Function DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Status Field RTS Request to Send Status File Location Definition CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking line asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Dete
252. The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data PLC5 command set PLC5 Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data PLC5 command set CIP Generic 2 The target device is compatible with and supports the CIP Sending and command set on DeviceNet 1769 SDN or DPI SCANport receiving data 1769 SM1 1 See Important note below 2 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 6 and higher for DeviceNet messaging and DPI SCANport messaging Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 410 Communications Instructions The Common Interface File CIF in the MicroLogix 1200 1500 and SLC 500 IMPORTANT processors is File 9 The CIF in the MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7 Modbus Command MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 1 General This Controller m Control Bits Channel Ignore if timed out T0 0 Modbus Command 0 Read Coil Status Oxxxx Data Table Address 01 Read Coil Status ers Gees ee o Size in Elements 02 Read Input Status 1xxx 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxxx Error ER fo ET t Devi 04 Read Input Registers 3xxxx i D er 05 Write Single Coil Oxxx Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 06 write Single Register 4xxxx Message Transmitting ST 0 MB Data Address 1 65536 15 Write Multiple Coils Oxxxx Message Enabled EN o Slave Node Address dec 16 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx
253. User Program Descriptions Format Access Tl Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word 0 to 32 767 control read write INT Reset T word 4 is the Integral gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 327 67 when RG 1 minutes per repeat Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration A value of 1 adds the maximum integral term into the PID equation TIP Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 332 Rate Term Ty Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 1D word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Rate Ty word 5 is the Derivative term The adjustment range is 0 to 327 67 minutes Set this value to 1 8 of the integral gain Tj Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 328 Process Control Instruction TIP This word is not effected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 332 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Process Control Instruction 329 Time Mode TM Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Oor1 control read write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode 1 or STI mode 0 This bit can be set or clear
254. WM Error Code ER Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2 to 5 status read only PWM ER Error Codes detected by the PWM sub system are displayed in this register The table identifies known errors Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PWM0 and PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This error does not Error fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed 2 No No Yes Output The configured PWM output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PWM to operate This error does not fault the Error controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 Yes Yes No Frequency The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error faults Error the con
255. a E Is E ls S a El Z l s la Low Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Test e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e High Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 10 Math Instructions General Information Before using math instructions become familiar with the following topics at the beginning of this chapter e Using the Math Instructions e Updates to Math Status Bits e Using the Floating Point F Data File Instructions Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression or a specific arithmetic instruction Instruction Used To Page ADD Add Add two values 210 SUB Subtract Subtract two values 210 MUL Multiply Multiply two values 211 DIV Divide Divide one value by another 211 NEG Negate Change the sign of the source value and place it 212 in the destination CL
256. a may become invalid At this time the RTC module will need to be replaced Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 580 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17657 Quick Start Trim General Pots On the ML1200 the trim pots are located next to the communication port On the ML1500 the trim pots are located below the mode switch under the left access door of the processor Each of the trim pots can be used to manipulate data within the controller The data value of the trim pots can be used throughout the control program as timer counter analog presets etc Trim Pot 0 Trim Pot 1 ML1200 ML1500 Adjust the trim pots using a small flathead screwdriver By turning the trim pot the data will change within a range of 0 to 250 fully clockwise The maximum rotation of each pot is three quarters of a turn kad fully counterclockwise fully clockwise Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the TPI tab See Below Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 581 Function Files POTO Trim Pot 0 Data 0 250 0 POT1 Trim Pot 1 Data 0 250 0 ER Error Code 0 There is no configuration needed for the trim pots The values are read only While online turn the trim pots and watch the values change Trim Pot Example Ladder Logic The following example will MOVe the value from trim pot 0 POTO into the pr
257. a ole 4 oF RO hg or Mel 14 250 BSR BiG SHO RIGI sie 5 51 ts susie dod bien Hae i Seats aud 14 252 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load ww ces aa ew dee 14 255 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 14 258 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 4 0866 4d Rae 14 261 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 14 264 SWP SWAP tea eer a a r pa a ha aceite deg 14 266 Chapter 15 SQC Sequencer Compare cist ben dat nae el eo 15 268 SQO Sequencer Output owt 64535 ESS lh PO dB 15 271 SQL Sequencer Load wscf cose awe sag bed tw aS 15 274 Chapter 16 JMP timp to Labels oes nec te wee ci elated oe se es 16 277 I ele label nyi beh ts eae AGE SG Bl Ohne ae tana eel 16 278 JSR Jump to Subroutine o eacig es eesti ee eee x 16 278 SBR Subroutine Label o oo Bae he aaa 16 279 RET Return from Subroutine 0 0 00050 16 279 S S Suspend ere reuters ca eis Ute a 16 280 TND Temporary End oaan uaaa 16 280 END Program End oauan auaa aa 16 281 MCR Master Control Reset no n Gas a cee os Pk es 16 281 Chapter 17 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 17 283 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 17 285 REF T O Refresh eirese Dieu eh a et Rae tee ey ROE E SA 17 286 Chapter 18 Information About Using Interrupts 18 290 User Interrupt Instructions ee 00 Goce hse Say ge aah 18 295 INT Interrupt Subroutine yaa te de ee See OT 18 295 STS
258. a write message are placed in a communication buffer The controller continues to scan the remaining user program The Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 386 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions message is processed and sent out of the controller via the communications port after the ladder logic completes during the Service Communications part of the operating cycle unless an SVC is executed If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed until all four buffers are in use When a buffer is available the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately If all four buffers for the channel are full when the next fifth message is processed the message request not the data is placed in the channel s communications queue The queue is a message storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer The queue operates as a first in first out FIFO storage area The first message request stored in the queue is the message that is allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program When a message request in a buffer is completed the buffer is released back to the system If
259. able Block on page 98 for more information Math Register Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 13 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 low byte S 14 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 high byte These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the user program Node Address Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 15 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 0 through CSx 0 5 7 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 498 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File Baud Rate Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 15 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 8 through C
260. above e4and5 e Gand 7 e 8 and above The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in your controller s User Manual The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers provide the ability to individually configure inputs to be latching inputs sometimes referred to as pulse catching inputs A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input The following inputs can be configured as latching inputs Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 DC Inputs 0 through 3 0 through 7 You enable this feature with RSLogix 500 programming software With an open project 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 50 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 5 Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs 6 Select the state for the latching inputs The controller can detect both on rising edge and off falling edge pulses depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software The following information is provided for a controller looking for an on pulse When an external sign
261. age Bit false to true one scan iti iue to te i true to false and false to false bit is reset bit is reset OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit true to false one scan bit is reset bit is set false to false bit is reset bit is reset false to true and true to true bit is set bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 184 _ Relay Type Bit Instructions OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 p Address Data Files Function Files Address Level Mode o J E 2 E Parameter S E lo oe 5S e cc cH eo 9 Bis l2 a S S g a le lg le le l lz E lz kl g ia Ee fs le S P IE o _ a lm e le kh 5 h E a E 2 Elb Ela lE lS FS e ia l l lls a Storage Bit Output Bit e e e e e e e e Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To
262. al Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File 503 RTC Minutes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 41 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MIN SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Seconds Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 42 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 SEC SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Week Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 53 word 0 to 6 status read only
263. al is detected on the controller latches this event In general at the next input scan following this event the input image point is turned on and remains on for the next controller scan It is then set to off at the next input scan The following figures help demonstrate this Rising Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value Rising Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value 1 0 Configuration 51 TIP The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is IME ORTAN configured for latching behavior When configured for rising edge behavior the input file value is normally off on for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected The previous examples demonstrate rising edge behavior Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions e The detection is on the falling
264. alse to true rung transition after the rung goes false Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the FD Found bit is set when the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true e Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 e Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current comparison data Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words The position is incremented on each false to true transition Sequencer Instructions 271 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SQC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 7 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode n l Parameter
265. am Files and Data Files are the others Function Files provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources Controller resources are resident permanent features such as the Real Time Clock and High Speed Counter The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specific function file or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD The Function File types are File Name File File Description Identifier High Speed Counter HSC This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter function See Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 109 for more information Pulse Train Output PTO This file type is associated with the Pulse Train Output Instruction See Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File on page 153 for more information MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units only Pulse Width Modulation PWM This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modulation instruction See Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File on page 169 for more information MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units only Selectable Timed Interrupt STI This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 301 for more information Event Input Interrupt Ell This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction See Using the
266. amp e z a SFe Bis isle k o are g lel Lele El la je 14 E IE ls le Is le o l v la e z ka 5l E a ERE ala lE S e Biel Es Ela l s Filel2 e e e e e e e e e ask e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e Control 3 e Length Position 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also app 3 Control file only SQL Sequencer Load SQL Sequencer Load File N7 0 Source 1 0 0 Control R6 0 Length 1 lt Position 0 lt CEN gt IN gt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 See Important note about indirect addressing ies IMPORTANT Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 21 7 us 7 0 us long word 24 3 us 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 19 1 us 6 3 us long word 21 1 us 6 3 us You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Sequencer Instructions 275 On a false to true rung transition the SQL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequencer operation This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents are received on an element by element basis from the source
267. arameter E g g E o amp Be z o e S je ral F E 3 E 2 z g S lE In fis le S ls o v m e Z lah 5 Zal 2 E i it a a 6 Q a jo ja S ja Source e e e e e e e e e e e LIFO e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 263 You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMEORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 264 File Instructions LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload Instruction Type output LFU LIFO Unload CEU gt LIFO N7 0 S f est N7 1 lt DN gt Execution Time for the LFU Instruction ontrol R6 0 Length 1 lt CEM gt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Position 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 29 1 us 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 25 6 us 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a LIFO stack The data is unloaded using last in first out order Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below LFL
268. ary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts SPM Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access SPM Set Point STLO SPM word INT 0 to control read write Msec 65 535 When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SPM set point in milliseconds value is loaded into the STI If the STI is configured correctly and enabled the program file identified in the STI variable PFN is scanned at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction TIP The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file STI 0 PFN plus the Interrupt Latency Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 308 Using Interrupts Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File The EII event input interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific program file subroutine when an input condition is detected from a field device Within the function file section of RSLogix 500 the user sees an EII folder W
269. ary to be crossed These are only some of the examples that can be used others include e File and Element Indirection N N10 0 N25 0 e Input Slot Indirection 11 N7 0 0 Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection IMPORTANT You must exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Programming Instructions Overview 107 Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing In this section an indexed addressing example is shown first Then an equivalent indirect addressing example is shown Indexed addressing is supported by SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing This example is shown for comparison purposes Indexed Addressing Example The following ADD instruction uses an indexed address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indexed offset value is 20 stored in S 24 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indexed offset to perform the operation Indexed Working ADD ADD Add Add Source A N7 0 Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Source B 25 Dest N15 0 Dest N15 20
270. asts the message so that it can be received by the intended slave This slave to slave transfer is a built in function of the master device and can also be used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 Half Duplex link Standard Mode Channel Configuration xl x General Channel 0 General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master x Node Address Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master x Node Address 1 decimal 1 decimal Baud 1200 x Baud 1200 bd Parity NONE z Parity NONE z r Polling Ranges r Polling Ranges Priority High fo Normal High 0 Normal Poll 0 Priority High fo Normal High 0 Normal Poll 0 Priority Low 255 Normal Low 255 Be Priority Low 255 Normal Low 255 arta r Protocol Control r Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex wiltrwut Curilinuvus Canier 7 ACK Timeout x20 ms so Control Line Har Duplex wilhuut Curilinuvus Canit z ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Error Detection CRC RS RTS Off Delay x20 ms fo Eror Detection CRC RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 Polling Mode Std single msa per scan RTS Send Delay x20 ms fo Pollina Mode Std multiple msas per scan RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 W Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries g V Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 3 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 ox cme Ary He Cancel Ay Hee Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 DF1 Half Duplex Master MS
271. ata files store numeric information including I O status and other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines The data file types are File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Number Element Output File 0 0 1 The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output Scan Input File l 1 1 The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs during the Input Scan Status File S 2 1 The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions which utilize the Status File See System Status File on page 479 for a detailed description Bit File B 3 9 to 255 1 The Bit File is a general purpose file typically used for bit logic Timer File T 4 9to255 3 The Timer File is used for maintaining timing information for ladder logic timing instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 185 for instruction information Counter File C 5 9to25d 3 The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information for ladder logic counting instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 185 for instruction information Control File R 6 9to255 3 The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and position information for various ladder logic instructions See Control Data File on page 354 for more information Integer File N 7 9 to 255 1 The Integer File is a general pur
272. ation on the PTO Once running the PTO will continue to generate pulses until all pulses have been generated or the PTO 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated Once the EH bit is set the instruction will generate a PTO error of 1 Chard stop detected In order to clear this error the PTO instruction must be scanned on a false rung of logic and the EH bit must be off To change the Total Output Pulses Generated in a working program a new value can be moved into PTO 0 TOP by using the MOV command Important Note Once the PTO has been initiated and is generating pulses a new TOP value will not take effect until the PTO has either completed generating pulses and has been restarted or has been Hard Stopped using PTO 0 EH bit and been restarted 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM PWM 0 0UT PWM 0 OFS PWM 0 DC NOTE The Knowledgebase Quick Starts 563 PWM function is only available when using the BXB models of the MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 50 00 or later and select the PWM tab then select the next to PWM 0 See Below 2 Function Files OF x Hsc PTO PWM sti jen ATC oaT TP MMi 1al E PwM 0 H OUT Output L RS Run Status L IS Idle Status LED Error Detected Status L NS Normal Operation Status EH Enable Hard Stop b ES Enable Status follows rung state LER Error Code OF Output Frequency
273. attached zeros are written to the MMI file The memory module function file programming screen is shown below 74 Function Files HSC PTO PwM sTI Ell RTC TRI LE CN 4 Catalog H SAS Series REY Revision WP Write Protect FO Fault Override LE Load On Error LA Load Always Number FT Functionality Type MP Module Present Indicator LPC Load Program Compare MB Mode Behavior il 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nteger The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below MMI Function File Parameters 77 Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access FT Functionality Type MMI 0 FT word INT status read only WP Write Protect MMI 0 WP binary bit control read only FO Fault Override MMI 0 FO binary bit control read only LPC Program Compare MMI 0 LPC binary bit control read only LE Load On Error MMIO LE binary bit contro read only LA Load Always MMI 0 LA binary bit control read only FT Functionality Type The LSB of this word identifies the type of module installed Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 78 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 e 1 Memory Module MM1 e 2 Real Time Clock Module RTC e 3 Memory and Real Time Clock Module MM1RTC e 4 Memory Module MM2 e 5 Memory and Real Time Clock Module MM2RTC MP Modul
274. ay Type Bit Instructions The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time After the false to true rung transition the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false this re activates the ONS instruction The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan This bit is used to remember the false to true rung transition ONS Instruction Operation Rung Transition Storage Bit Rung State after Execution false to true one scan storage bit is set true true to true storage bit remains set false true to false false to false storage bit is cleared false Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files Adress Address Level gt Mode _ Parameter f E 2 a a ja 5 S 9 P 5 E a 3a Storage Bit OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling OSR _ One Shot Rising Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 OSF One Shot Falling Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions
275. ayer Error Code 56 Presentation Layer Error Count 57 Execution Function Error Code 58 Last Transmitted Exception Code 59 Data File Number of Error Request 60 Element Number of Error Request 61 Function Code 1 Message Counter 62 Function Code 2 Message Counter 63 Function Code 3 Message Counter 64 Function Code 4 Message Counter Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 94 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 65 Function Code 5 Message Counter 66 Function Code 6 Message Counter 67 Function Code 8 Message Counter 68 Function Code 15 Message Counter 69 Function Code 16 Message Counter 2101 Channel 0 Channel 1 Modbus ATU Slave Messages Sent 0 Messages Received This Slave oid Messages Received 0 Link Layer EnorCount 9 Link LayerEnorCode 9 Modem Lines RTS CTS Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 9 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 9 and higher Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 9 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channe
276. ble Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 298 Using Interrupts EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 299 UIE User Interrupt Enable Instruction Type output UIE User Interrupt Enable interrupt Typ s 4 Execution Time for the UIE Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding _ Value Bit EIl Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interru
277. ble machine operation may occur ATTENTION A Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RTO Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 18 0 us 2 4 us MicroLogix 1500 15 8 us 2 2 US Use the RTO instruction to delay turning on an output The RTO begins to count time base intervals when the rung conditions become true As long as the rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur e rung conditions become false e you change the controller mode from run or test to program e the processor loses power e a fault occurs Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 190 Timer and Counter Instructions When you return the controller to the RUN or TEST mode and or the rung conditions go true timing continues from the retained accumulated value RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Counter Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done accumulated value gt preset value the appropriate RES instruction is enabled bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated e rung state goes false or
278. c the application that defines the controller s operation controller A device such as a programmable controller used to control output devices controller overhead A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes memory checks tests communications etc control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter A device that counts the occurrence of some event CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O status and files where user data such as bit integer timers and counters is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices Glossary 599 download The transfer of program or data files to a device DTE Data Terminal Equipment EMI Electromagnetic interference embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 0 expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O MicroLogix 1500 controllers use Bulletin 1769 expansion I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I
279. c Flags 481 S 1 Controller Mode 482 S 2 STI Mode 488 2 9 Memory Module Program Compare 489 2 15 Math Overflow Selection 489 S 3H Watchdog Scan Time 490 S 4 Free Running Clock 491 S 5 Minor Error Bits 492 S 6 Major Error Code 495 S7 Suspend Code 496 8 8 Suspend File 496 8 9 Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 496 S 10 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 497 S 13 S 14 Math Register 497 S 15L Node Address 497 S 15H Baud Rate 498 S 22 Maximum Scan Time 498 S 29 User Fault Routine File Number 498 30 STI Set Point 499 8 31 STI File Number 499 33 Channel 0 Communications 499 35 Last 100 Sec Scan Time 501 36 10 Data File Overwrite Protection Lost 501 8 37 RTC Year 501 38 RTC Month 502 39 RTC Day of Month 502 S 40 RTC Hours 502 S 41 RTC Minutes 503 S 42 RTC Seconds 503 53 RTC Day of Week 503 8 57 OS Catalog Number 504 58 OS Series 504 59 OS FRN 504 60 Processor Catalog Number 504 S 61 Processor Series 504 8 62 Processor Revision 505 63 User Program Functionality Type 505 S 64L Compiler Revision Build Number 505 S 64H Compiler Revision Release 505 Status File Details System Status File 481 Arithmetic Flags The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math logical or move instruction The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math logical or move instruction in the program is executed Carry Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access
280. cation 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 3 Enter a file number 9 to 255 and select Programmable Limit Switch as the type A Name and or Description may be entered as well but is not required reatenatarie x File fio Type fm EE einen Y Name Desc Elements Attributes x pes Programmable Limit Switch J Skip When Deleting Unused M Scope Global C Local To File 2 z Protection Constant C Static None T Memory Module Download OK Cancel Help 4 Elements refers to the number of PLS steps For this example enter a value of 4 If more steps are required at a later time simply go to the properties for the PLS data file and increase the number of elements 5 Under Data Files PLS10 should appear as shown to the left 6 Double click on PLS10 under Data Files For this example enter the values as illustrated below Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 145 Data File PLS10 E Offset HIP LOP La 518 OLD 0 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Symbol 250 CE PLS10 0 HIP Radel zj Columns l ay Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 146 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch PLS Data File Definitions Data Description Data Format HIP High Preset 32 bit si
281. cation 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instruction Error Codes control data file ASCII Instructions 383 The following error codes indicate why the Error bit ER is set in the Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 0 0x00 No error The instruction completed successfully None Required 3 0x03 The transmission cannot be completed because the Check the modem and modem connections CTS signal was lost 5 0x05 While attempting to perform an ASCII transmission a Reconfigure the channel and retry operation conflict with the configured communications protocol was detected 7 0x07 The instruction cannot be executed because the Reconfigure the channel and retry operation communications channel has been shut down via the channel configuration menu 8 0x08 The instruction cannot be executed because another Resend the transmission ASCII transmission is already in progress 9 0x09 Type of ASCII communications operation requested is Reconfigure the channel and retry operation not supported by the current channel configuration 10 0x0A The unload bit UL is set stopping instruction None required execution 11 0x0B The requested number of characters for the ASCII Enter a valid string length and retry operation read was too large or negative 12 0x0C The length of the Source string is invalid either a Enter a valid string length and retry operation negative number
282. ccess 8 31 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 PFN SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information Channel 0 Communications Incoming Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 0 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 0 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Message Reply Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 1 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CSO 0 4 1 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 85 for more information Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 500 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File Outgoing Message Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 2 binary
283. ccurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is greater than 254 Math Instructions 207 Underflow occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is less than one Floating Point Exception Values Zero represented by an exponent and a mantissa of zero Both positive and negative zero are valid Denormalized represented by an exponent of zero and a non zero mantissa part Since denormalized numbers have very small insignificant values they are treated as zero when used as source operand for most instructions This reduces execution time Denormalized numbers are not generated by the instructions but are propagated by some instructions Zero is generated on an underflow Infinity represented by an exponent of 255 and a mantissa part of zero Both positive and negative infinity are generated when operations overflow Infinity is propagated through calculations NAN not a number is represented by an exponent of 255 and a non zero mantissa part NANs are used to indicate results that are mathematically undefined such as 0 0 and adding plus infinity to minus infinity All operations given a NAN as input must generate a NAN as output LSB Round to Even Rule Floating point operations are rounded using the round to even rule If the bits of the result to the right of the least significant bit LSB represent a value less than one half of the LSB then the result remains as is If the bits to
284. channel configuration must be set to ASCII Make sure the automatic modem control used by the port does not conflict with this instruction Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction ASCII Instructions 373 e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 AND Mask is the mask used to reset the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the AND mask resets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged OR Mask is the mask used to set the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the OR mask sets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged Control is the control data file See page 354 Channel Status displays the current status 0000 to 001F of the handshake lines for the specified channel This status is read only and resides in the POS field in the control data file The following shows how to determine the channel status value In this example the value is 001F Channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 14 B3 2 mM o Status Bit Handshake reseved n E beo RTS CTS cain Ppppppepper iii Channel 0 0 1 F Status Word 2 of the Control Element 001F 1 The DCD handshake line is only supported on Channel 1 e Error displays the hexadecima
285. consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of instructions available within a controller Glossary 601 I O Input and Output jump Changes the normal sequence of program execution In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a specific rung in the user program ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder like diagram The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language least significant bit LSB The element or bit in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO last In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 602 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October
286. controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the pending bit Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 312 Using Interrupts Ell Event Interrupt Enable EIE User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EIl 0 EIE binary bit control read write EIE Event Interrupt Enabled allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program When set 1 the function is enabled when cleared 0 default the function is disabled This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Ell Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the EII Event Interrupt Enable EIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode EII Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to
287. cord The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 0 the formatted string length is 59 characters as shown below Data Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 11 2 1 Characters 10 1 18 1 6 1 111 1 J6 1 J6 1 6 10 1 8 1 6 1 11 1 6 1 6 1 6 59 characters Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 453 Number of Records Using Queue 0 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Date 2 bytes Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes L14 0 4 bytes T4 5 ACC 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes B3 2 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 18 bytes In this example each record consumes 18 bytes So if one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 2730 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size 48K bytes 18 bytes 48 1024 18 2730 records Example Queue 5 Queue 5 Time v Delimiter TAB
288. croLogix 1200 word 31 5 us 0 0 us Scaled Max ae long word 52 2 us 0 0 us Output 75 MicroLogix 1500 word 27 0 us 0 0 us is long word 44 7 us 0 0 us The SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values This instruction solves the following equation listed below to determine scaled output y 1 Yo Gy XPI Xo Yo Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level gt Mode N l Parameter 5 E E In Sl ia SSe l RE o voa bezhe L SEERE EEE EEEg EBEE lE Input x e o o o o oj o ele e o o o jo jo o o o o o ele ele Input Min xo ele e o o o e E ele Input Max x ele ele ele e e o o e Scaled Min Yo ele e o o o e elele ele Scaled Max V1 ele e o o o e o o ele Output y e o o o o joj o ele e e o o e e o e o 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPO
289. ct CSx 9 3 Channel 1 of 1764 LRP only The status of the DCD handshaking line received by the processor 1 x equals the Channel number Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Monitor Active Stations To see which slave stations are active when the channel is configured for Standard Polling Mode either single or multiple message per scan view the DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node Table The table is stored in the Communications Status Function File words CSx 27 to CSx 42 where x is the channel number x 0 for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP x 1 for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Each bit in the table represents a station on the link from 0 to 254 starting with CSx 27 0 for address 0 and CSx 42 14 for address 254 The bit for address 255 CSx 42 15 is never set since it is the broadcast address which never gets polled When valid Normal and or Priority Poll Ranges are defined e if a slave responded the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is set 1 active e if a slave didn t respond the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is cleared O inactive TIP The bit corresponding to the address configured for the DF1 Master is always cleared because the master address never gets polled If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on Processor Status
290. ction Source Destination Data Type Range of Length Operand 1 word elements ie word 1 to 128 2 word elements ie long word 1 to 64 3 word elements ie counter 1 to 42 42 word elements ie string 1to3 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 FLL Fill File FLL Fill File Source N7 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1 File Instructions 249 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FLL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Jword M4 06ps word 0 0us long word 15 1 2 us long word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 12 1 0 43 us word 0 0 us long word 12 3 0 8 us long word 0 0 us The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word or any IEEE 754 32 bit value TIP A constant cannot be used as the source in a timer T
291. ction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets The bit pattern stored in the OMB variable defines which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the controller Bits that are set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system Bits that are clear 0 cannot be turned on or off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup The table below illustrates this relationship Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address HSC 0 HPO high preset output 16 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 f1 JO 1 JO JO 1 1 JO JO 1 HSC 0 0MB output mask 00 0 0 al po Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 137 The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HPO or LPO define if each output is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The bits in the gray boxes are
292. ction bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target bit file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP e Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses B51 96 and above in this example e The DAT always starts at bit 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file The base hardware information BHD file is a read only file that contains a description of the MicroLogix 1200 Controller or the MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit Base Hardware Information Function File BHI Address Description BHI 0 CN CN Catalog Number BHI 0 SRS SRS Series BHI 0 REV REV Revision BHI 0 FT FT Functionality Type Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 84 Function Files Communications Status File Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The Communications Status CS File is a read only file that contains information on how the controller communication parameters are configured and status information on communications activity The communications status file uses Communications Status File Size Controller Number of Word Elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A Processor 44 1 word elements MicroLogix 1200 71 1 word elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors There is one Communications Status File for each communications port Communica
293. ction is allow slaves to initiate messages a slave station can initiate a message to the master station polled report by exception messaging or to another slave station slave to slave messaging The MSG command packet will remain in that slave station s transmit queue until the master station triggers its own MSG command packet to it which could be seconds minutes or hours later depending on the master s ladder logic Protocol Configuration 525 If the Message based selection is don t allow slaves to initiate messages then even if a slave station triggers and queues up a MSG instruction in its ladder logic the master station will not process it Standard Polling Mode Standard polling mode is strongly recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for any system where slave station initiated messages are going to be used this includes slave programming over the network since this uses the same mechanism that slave to slave messaging uses The Active Node Table automatically keeps track of which slaves are and are not communicating Standard polling mode should not be used in cases where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station Standard polling mode causes the master station to continuously send one or more 4 byte poll packets to each slave station address config
294. d e High Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes e Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 121 Low Preset Reached LPR Description Address Data Format yS Modes Type User Program Access LPR Low HSC 0 LPR bit 2to 7 status read only Preset Reached 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The LPR Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value CHSC 0 ACC is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSC 0 LOP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 122 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Preset Mask HPM Description Address Data Format ySs Modes Type User Program Access HPM High HSC 0 HPM bit Oto7 control read write Preset Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The HPM High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user pr
295. d bit pattern that determines which channel is serviced Each bit corresponds to a specific channel For example bit 0 equals channel 0 When any bit is set 1 the corresponding channel is serviced Communications Instructions 389 Controller Channel Select Setting Channel s Serviced Micrologix120000 0C0 C i lt i lt lt lt i lt i lt i lt C COS W t si lt i lt WW MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LSP Processor 1 0 MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LRP Processor 1 0 2 1 3 both 0 and 1 Communication Status Bits The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing See General Channel Status Block on page 85 for additional status information Communication Status Bits Address Description Channel 0 Channel 1 CS0 4 0 CS1 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending CS0 4 1 CS1 4 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending CS0 4 2 CS1 4 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending CS0 4 4 CS1 4 4 CAB Communications Active Bit 1 Channel 1 is valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only Application Example The SVC instruction is used when you want to execute a communication function such as transmitting a message prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan CS0 4 SVC 0000 aya Service Communications MCP Channel Select 0001h You can place this rung after a message write instruction
296. d in the data file these were added for readability Date Time N10 0 N10 1 N10 2 N10 3 N10 4 6 1 2000 8 00 00 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 02 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 05 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 07 5 10 15 20 25 Each time the DLG instruction receives a false to true transition another entry is saved in the Data Logging queue The above data reflects that the DLG instruction was executed 5 times The above data also reflects that no data points had changed during each DLG execution Frequently Asked Questions Q1 Can I write my own software application to retrieve the data stored in the Data Logging queue Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 594 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 A1 Yes In the MicroLogix 1200 1500 Instruction Set Reference manual under the Data Logging chapter all the information necessary to create your own software application for retrieving the data stored in the processors Data Logging queue is shown Q2 Can the MicroLogix 1500 LRP processor automatically send the information stored in the Data Logging queue directly to a printer A2 No To retrieve the data either the free Data Logging Utility software must be used or a custom application must be created by the user If the data does not need to be stored in the processor but sent directly to a printer then use the ASCII instructions of the MicroLogix processor to send out the data Using th
297. d later only Communications Instructions 421 Example 2 Local Read from a 485CIF Message Instruction Setup 24 MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 General r This Controller Control B s Conmureston Command grret ined out T03 E Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channet Error ER o r Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Offset Message Enabled EN o Local Node Addr dec paa Local Remote Error Enor CodelHex 0 r Eror Description No errors In this example the controller reads five elements words from the target device s Local Node 2 CIF file starting at word 20 or byte 20 for non SLC 500 devices The five elements are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Tocal Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types _ T lt gt read write 485CIF C lt gt read write 485CIF R lt gt read write 485CIF sT gt write 485CIF 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Publication 1762 RMO001
298. ddress Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 0 3 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes Controller Mode User Application Mode Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 0 to 1 4 binary O0to11110 status read only Bits 0 through 4 function as follows 1 0 to S 1 4 Mode Controller Mode Use by MicroLogix Controller 1 4 S 1 3 S 1 2 S 1 1 S 1 0 m 1200 1500 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote download in progress e 0 0 0 0 1 1 remote program mode 0 0 0 1 1 3 remote suspend mode e e operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 0 0 1 1 0 6 remote run mode 0 0 1 1 1 7 remote test continuous mode 0 1 0 0 0 8 remote test single scan mode e 1 0 0 0 0 16 download in progress N A e 0 0 0 1 17 program mode N A e 1 0 1 1 27 suspend mode N A e operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 1 1 1 0 30 run mode N A e Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 Valid modes are indicated by the symbol N A indicates an invalid mode for that controller System Status File 483 Forces Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Acce
299. de on the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 28 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 16 to 31 CS0 28 1 is node 16 CS0 28 2 is node 17 etc 29 Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 32 to 47 CS0 29 1 is node 32 CS0 29 2 is node 33 etc 42 Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 240 to 255 CS0 42 1 is node 240 CS0 42 2 is node 241 etc If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the configured channel Function Files 99 Input Output Status File 1 0 Status File 4Data File 52 STATUS Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan Node DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node Table 0 0 9000 0000 90000 900 32 64 36 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Properties 16 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Usage Debug Errors Protection Mer gt Radix Structured h Help The input output status IOS file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on the s
300. dentifying D 507 manually clearing using the fault routine D 508 recoverable and non recoverable 78 294 FET 7 599 FFL instruction 14 255 FFU instruction 14 258 FIFO First In First Out 7 599 FIFO load instruction 14 255 FIFO unload instruction 14 258 file 1 599 file instructions 14 245 fill file instruction 14 249 filtering inputs 1 48 first scan status bit C 487 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 610 Index FLL instruction 14 249 forces enabled status bit C 483 forces installed status bit C 483 forcing inputs and outputs 1 48 FRD example 11 224 instruction 11 222 free running clock C 497 free running clock status C 497 full duplex 1 600 function files 3 69 3 70 base hardware information BHI 3 83 communications status CS file 3 84 DAT function file 3 80 event input interrupt Ell 78 308 high speed counter HSC 5 770 input output status file IOS 3 99 memory module information MMI 3 77 pulse train output PTO 6 753 pulse width modulation PWM 6 769 real time clock RTC 3 77 selectable timed interrupt STI 18 301 trim pot information TPI 3 76 future access status bit C 487 G GCD instruction 11 229 GEQ instruction 9 199 Gray code instruction 11 229 greater than instruction 9 198 greater than or equal to instruction 9 199 GRT instruction 9 198 H half duplex F 527 1 600 hard disk 7 600 high byte 1 600 high speed counter Quick Start example F 565 high speed counter function
301. der program has no effect in the MANUAL mode PID Rung State If the PID rung is false the integral sum IS is cleared and CV remains in its last state Application Examples Process Control Instruction 343 Feed Forward or Bias Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element word FF See page 330 The value you write is added to the output allowing a feed forward action to take place You may add a bias by writing a value between 16383 and 16383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program PID Tuning PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control If you are inexperienced it will be helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop The following PID tuning method is general and limited in terms of handling load disturbances When tuning we recommend that changes be made in the MANUAL mode followed by a return to AUTO Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode TIP e This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage e The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases It is strongly recommended to use a PID Loop tuner package f
302. der revision you must upgrade the operating system to FRN 3 or higher to use an expansion cable and power supply On the Internet go to http www ab com micrologix to download the operating system upgrade Select MicroLogix 1500 System go to downloads LIMIT OF ONE EXPANSION POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE The expansion power supply cannot be connected directly to the controller It must be connected using one of the expansion cables Only one expansion power supply may be used in a MicroLogix 1500 system Exceeding these limitations may damage the power supply and result in unexpected operation ATTENTION a MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion 1 0 Memory Mapping 1 0 Configuration 31 Discrete 1 0 Configuration 1769 IA8 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 14 13 12 111 10 x x Ix x x x Ix Ix r r r r r r r r gt Word o oo ao ol A ow N r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IM12 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 11 correspond to input terminals 0 through 11 bits 12 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
303. destination is a long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACI Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 i x Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode PA a Parameter E 3 sle alte z e s S F 5 2 5 g g la je 9 et litle ik l a a 3 E e Is l Is E S o l v a Elza 5h Ela EE lE BE e Sle la Eal la s la Source SSTT E BBE Desinaion a a oe e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation The controller searches the source file type ST for the first character between 0 and 9 All numeric characters are extracted until a non numeric character or the end of the string is reached Action is taken only if numeric characters are found The string length is limited to 82 characters Commas and signs 4 are allowed in the string However only the minus sign is displayed in the data table This instruction sets the following math flags in the controller status file Math Flag Description S 0 1 Overflow V Flag is set if the result is outside of the valid range S 0 2 Zero Z Flag is set if the result is zero S 0 3 Sign S Flag is set if the result is negative S 5 0 Overflow Trap Flag is set when the Overflow flag S 0 1 is set 5 15 ASCII String Flag is set if
304. ditions will cause previously logged data to be lost e Program download from RSLogix 500 to controller e Memory Module transfer to controller except for Memory Module autoload of the same program e Full Queue when a queue is full new records are recorded over the existing records starting at the beginning of the file You can put the following rung in your ladder program to prevent this from happening B3 1 LEQ DLG Less Than or Eq A lt B Data Log 1 Source A DLS0 5 RST queue number 5 SourceB DLS0 5 FSZ Appendix A Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1200 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or long word as the data format MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 12 5 115
305. dressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 1 Se ciate 9 ve Address Data Files Function Files as 4 Address Level gt Mode a 3 Parameter E E e 2 Sf ifs ise RER E 5 g a le lg le le z Elz le lt a l2 Ele l lell o l lv a kele i l a E EB lla E ES iS a l la 2s gla Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e 6 6 6 6 e e e e 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units ee Important note about indirect addressing Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 T D 3 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor S T he F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only 6 Some elements can be written to Consult the function file for details You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MOV instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are
306. ds If bit 4 7 is monitored in a MicroLogix 1500 then that bit will be on for 0 0128 seconds and off for 0 0128 seconds for a total cycle time of 0 0256 seconds Minor Error Bits Overflow Trap Bit Address___ Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 0 binary Oor1 status read write If this bit is ever set 1 upon execution of the END or TND instruction a major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG SCL TOD or FRD take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 Control Register Error Address__ Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 2 binary Oor1 status read write The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit S 5 2 is set 1 it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 2 using an OTU instruction with S 5 2 Mayor Error Detected in User Fault Routine Address 5 3 Data Format binary Range Oor1 Type statu
307. e memory cannot be saved to a memory module Data Log Queue memory is battery backed but cannot be saved to a memory module 3 Enter the ROP file parameters as shown below When finished click on OK Create RCP File File 0 Number of Recipes B Cancel Name Paint Colors Help Description RCP Quick Start example for mixing paint colors Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files User Program C Data Log Queue 4 A new window will appear In this window enter the values as shown below TE RCPFleO RCPExample a Initial Data N7 0 1 500 Red Pigment Green Pigment Blue Pigment 500 Mixing Time Current Recipe bp 5 Change the Current Recipe from 0 to 1 Notice the addresses were duplicated but the data was not 6 Enter the data for Recipe 1 as shown below 7 Change from Recipe 1 to Recipe 2 and enter the following data Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 449 Tei RCP eo RCPEKample o Address Length Initial Data Description Red Pigment N71 Green Pigment N7 2 Blue Pigment T4 0 PRE Mixing Time CurentRecipe i JY Red Pigment Green Pigment Blue Pigment Mixing Time aD Ca Current Recep Jl The Recipes are now configured 8 Create the following ladder logic Yellow Paint Recipe RCP B3 0 B3 0 B3 0 il i Le Recipe
308. e MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only OK Cancel Help m Configuration Number of Records i Separator Character l Date Stamp I Time Stamp Address to Log Delete Current Address List e Enter the following information Data Log Queue Configuration Parameter Number of Records Description Defines the number of records data sets in the queue Separator Character Choose the character to act as the separator for the data in this queue tab comma or space The separator character may be the same or different for each queue configured Date Stamp optional if selected the date is recorded in mm dd yyyy format Time Stamp optional if selected the time is recorded in hh mm ss format Address to Log Enter the address of an item to be recorded and click on Accept to add the address to the Current Address List The address can be any 16 or 32 bit piece of data Current Address List This is the list of items to be recorded Record size can be up to 80 bytes You can use the Delete button to remove items from this list See page 452 for information on record size A record consists of Characters configured Date Stamp Time Stamp Current Address List and Separator 1 If the real time clock i s not present on the controller and Date Stamp and Time Stamp are selected enabled the date is reco
309. e destination must be a long word size file e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words aaa a not used 15 Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 Cong word e Position Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload Data is unloaded at position zero Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 fe 3 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode n Sa Parameter g 2
310. e DATALOG Utility to retrieve data remotely via a Remote Access Modem Kit RAD For more information on Remote Access Modem Kits visit http support rockwellautomation com modem modem_ Main as The following outlines the configuration and steps that can be used to read data log records from an MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP controller remotely via a 1747CHORAD Remote Access Modem Kit This example assumes that the programmer has configured the DLG instruction in the ML1500 to log data and that HyperTerminal is installed configured and the user is familiar with its use ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS 1 Connect the modem to Channel 1 of the 1764 LRP 2 Configure Channel 1 9 Pin for DF1 Full Duplex 9600 baud no parity and full duplex modem handshaking This setting is critical as the system will not communicate if full duplex modem handshaking isn t applied to the comms channel connected to the modem Knowledgebase Quick Starts 595 3 Configure HyperTerminal for direct connection to the PC COMM port the modem is connected to Make sure the HyperTerminal connection is configured for 9600 baud 4 Save configuration as DataLog 5 Send the following dial out string using HyperTerminal to dial the modem and establish the connection AT amp C1DT Phone number of destination Modem then press enter your modem will respond CONNECT 9600 Once the connection is established exit HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit from
311. e Last nv 5 Attributes D I Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope G Global io f LAD 2 Protection C Constant C Statid I Memory Module Download Co core sory Ho C None MicroLogix controllers have a built in security system based on numeric passwords Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits 0 9 Each controller program may contain two passwords the Password and the Master Password Passwords restrict access to the controller The Master Password takes precedence over the Password The idea is that all controllers in a project would have different Passwords but the same Master Password allowing access to all controllers for supervisory or maintenance purposes You can establish change or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box It is not necessary to use passwords but if used a master password is ignored unless a password is also used Clearing the Controller Memory Controller Memory and File Types 67 Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications coe TIP If a password is lost or forgotten there is no way to bypass the password to recover the program The only option is to clear the controller s memory If the Memory Module User Program has the Load Always functionality enabled and the controller User Program has a password specified the controller compares the passwords before transferring the User
312. e Present The MP Module Present bit can be used in the user program to determine when a memory module is present on the controller This bit is updated once per scan provided the memory module is first recognized by the controller To be recognized by the controller the memory module must be installed prior to power up or when the controller is in a non executing mode If a memory module is installed when the controller is in an executing mode it is not recognized If a recognized memory module is removed during an executing mode this bit is cleared 0 at the end of the next ladder scan WP Write Protect When the WP Write Protect bit is set 1 the module is write protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten IMPORTANT Once the WP bit is set 1 it cannot be cleared Only set this bit if you want the contents of the memory module to become permanent FO Fault Override The FO Fault Override bit represents the status of the fault override setting of the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the FO bit without actually loading the program from the memory module IMPORTANT The memory module fault override selection in the Memory Module Information MMI file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the user program s Fault Override bit S 1 8 in the memory module See Fault Override At Power Up on
313. e Selectable Timed Interrupt STD provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are e PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval e A motion application where the motion instruction PTO needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration deceleration profile e A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the following sequence 1 The user selects a time interval 2 When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller monitors the STI value 3 When the time period has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted 4 The controller then scans the logic in the STI program file Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 302 Using Interrupts 5 When the STI file scan is completed the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt and continues normal operation Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 303 Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function File Sub Elements Summary Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File STI 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Fo
314. e for each Recipe number Data Logging Queues and Records Program Files 3 4 5 6 to 255 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 451 Data Logging allows you to capture store application data as a record for retrieval at a later time Each record is stored in a user configured queue in battery backed memory B Ram Records are retrieved from the 1764 LRP processor via communications This chapter explains how Data Logging is configured and used This section contains the following topics e Queues and Records on page 451 e Configuring Data Log Queues on page 455 e DLG Data Log Instruction on page 457 e Data Log Status File on page 458 e Retrieving Reading Records on page 460 The 1764 LRP processor has 48K bytes 48 x 1024 of additional memory for data logging purposes Within this memory you can define up to 256 0 to 255 data logging queues Each queue is configurable by size maximum number of records stored and by length each record is 1 to 80 characters The length and the maximum number of records determine how much memory is used by the queue You can choose to have one large queue or multiple small queues The memory used for data logging is independent of the rest of the processor memory and cannot be accessed by the User Program Each record is stored as the instruction is executed and is non volatile battery backed to prevent loss dur
315. e instruction continues to completion If you want to repeat this instruction the rung must transition from false to true When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 382 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 354 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 82 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length LEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 363 Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if inserted values f
316. e output pulses generated by the PTO sub system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the PTO function file PTO 0 OF It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program The RP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S Curve profile e Cleared 0 Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile PTO Idle Status IS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS_ bit Oor 1 status read only The PTO IS dle Status is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used in the control program by an input instruction The PTO sub system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start The IS bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO sub system is in an idle state The idle state is defined as the PTO is not running and no errors are present e Cleared 0 PTO sub system is not in an idle state Gt is running Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 158 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Error Detected ED Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit Oor 1 status read only The PTO ED Error Detected Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung
317. e that may be entered without causing a fault The run portion will equal 0 Accel Run Decel lt lt _ _ 12 000 Accel Run Decel 6 000 0 6 000 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 163 In this example the maximum value that could be used for accelerate decelerate is 6000 because if both accelerate and decelerate are 6000 the total number of pulses 12 000 The run component would be zero This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000 At 6000 the output frequency OF variable is generated and immediately enters the deceleration phase 6000 to 12 000 At 12 000 the PTO operation would stop output frequency 0 If you need to determine the ramp period accelerate decelerate ramp duration e 2 x ADP OF duration in seconds OF output frequency The following formulas can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles The maximum frequency the integer which is less than or equal to the result found below OF output frequency e For Trapezoid Profiles OF x OF 4 0 5 e For S Curve Profiles 0 999 x OF x SQRT OF 6 PTO Controlled Stop CS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access Oor1 CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit control read write The PTO CS Controlled Stop bit is used to stop an executing PTO instruction in the run portion of the profile by immediately starting t
318. eBridgeAddi dect 0 sd Remote Station Address dec Remote Bridge Link ID ce i Eror r Error Description No errors DH 485 and DH Example Network Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 438 Communications Instructions e e 4 a AICH 550 U0 SLC 5 03 PanelVie DH 485 Network Node 5 Node 22 Link ID 1 AIC AIC Node 12 AIC Node 17 Node 10 AIC Node 11 a pa 9 MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 23 octal 19 decimal Link ID 100 Node 63 octal 51 decimal Node 40 octal 32 decimal SLC 5 04 PLC 5 This Controller Parameters See Target Device Parameters on page 415 Control Bits Parameters See Control Bits Parameters on page 397 Target Device Parameters Message Timeout See Message Timeout on page 415 Data Table Address See Data Table Address Offset on page 415 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 439 Local Bridge Address This variable defines the bridge address on the local network In the example DH 485 node 12 MicroLogix 1500 on Link ID 1 is writing data to node 51 SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 The SLC 5 04 at node 17 is the bridge device This variable sends the message to local node 17
319. ecord the PV 9 Type 80 in CO 10 Record the PV 11 The values you recorded should be offset from CO by the same amount This proves the linearity of your process The following example shows an offset progression of fifteen CO 20 PV 35 CO 40 PV 55 CO 60 PV 75 CO 80 PV 95 If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount e Either your scaling is incorrect or e the process is not linear or e your equipment is not properly connected and or configured Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2 10 Determining the Initial Loop Update Time To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process perform the following 1 Place the normal application values in MinS and Maxs 2 Type 50 in CO 3 Type 60 in CO and immediately start your stopwatch Process Control Instruction 347 Watch the PV When the PV starts to change stop your stopwatch Record this value It is the deadtime Multiply the deadtime by 4 This value approximates the natural period For example if deadtime 3 seconds then 4 x 3 12 seconds natural period Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10 Use this value as the loop updated time For example if natural period 12 seconds then 12 10 1 2 seconds Therefore the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time 120 x 10 ms 1 2 seconds Enter the following values the initial se
320. ed as Oxxxx e contacts 1xxxx e input registers 3xxxx e holding registers 4xxxx Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are outputs and can be read and written Contacts are inputs and are read only Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing input values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the MB Data Address field when configuring the message instruction When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFFh the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based on the Modbus function Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Local Messaging Examples Communications Instructions 417 TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in all devices The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Local Slave Node Address This is the destination device s node n
321. ed by instructions in your ladder program When set for timed mode the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program When you select STI program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT Set the STI period in word STI 0 SPM For example if the loop update time contains the value 10 for 100 ms then the STI time interval must also equal 100 for 100 ms TIP When using timed mode your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances Loop Update Time LUT Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write The loop update time word 13 is the time interval between PID calculations The entry is in 0 01 second intervals Enter a loop update time five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load The natural period of the load is determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate When in STI mode this value must equal the STI time interval value loaded in STI 0
322. edgebase Quick Starts 571 This example uses MG11 0 for the MSG file and will require two MicroLogix controllers one a ML1500 and the other either a ML1000 or ML1500 The ML1500 will need to be configured as Node 1 and the other processor as node 4 The processor at node 1 will contain the ladder logic below and transfer data from it s N7 0 Integer file to the processor at node 4 s N7 0 Integer file Since N7 0 is the source file for this example data must be entered into this register for node 1 For this example Locate N7 0 in the ML1500 Node 1 and enter the value 63 MicroLogix 1000 Node 1 Node 4 Micrologix 1500 Node 1 Ladder Logic SG 0000 ReadiVyrite Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen MG11 0 DN MG11 0 EN v 0001 MG11 0 ER MSG Setup Screen Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 572 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 MSG MG11 0 1 Elements 500CPU Write Micrologix 1000 Node 4 Ladder Logic No ladder logic is required in the destination processor however the communications channel must be configured to match the source processor Since the default settings for the ML1500 communications channel is DF1 protocol 19 200 Kbaud the ML1000 must be configured to match See Below Micrologix 1000 Channel Configuration DI17405 Configuration Important Note After the ladder logic has been entered into the ML1500 and the ML1000 chann
323. eived p Duplicate Messages Received 0 Lack of Mem Pkt Dropped pi BadPacketsReceived 9 Modem Lines RTS ETS DCD Clear Function Files 93 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 4 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received for This Slave 12 Total Message Packets Received 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 Link Layer Error Code 15 to 22 Reserved Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 43 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 10 44 Length always 14 45 Format Code always 0 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 Oto7 Node Address 8to15 Reserved 48 Inter Character Timeout 49 RTS Send Delay 50 RTS Off Delay 51 Oto7 Baud Rate 8and9 Parity 10 to 15 Reserved 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 Presentation L
324. el Pulses How many of the total pulses will be used for the Accel Decel component Example The following example will generate 10 000 pulses on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 500Hz and 100 pulses will be used for Accelerating and 100 pulses will be used for Decelerating t Function Files OF x Hsc PTO pwM sti jen ATC oat Tr MMi alel E PTO 0 H QUT Output H DN Done DS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status HAS Accelerating Status L AP Ramp Profile HIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status LJPS Jog Pulse Status LJCS Jog Continuous Status HJF Jog Pulse HJE Jog Continuous H EH Enable Hard Stop LEN Enable Status follows rung state LER Error Code OF Output Frequency Hz H OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz HJF Jog Frequency Hz H TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated H OPP Output Pulses Produced ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO i m fha ie A AE E 1 BE a AE a AE a AE ma E ma AE n AE a E n AE on DA oasa AE on AE oas AE os AE a AE ON Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 562 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File 2 FS LAD 2 olx By toggling Bit B3 0 the PTO can be activated Once running the PTO will generate the number of pulses entered into the PTO 0 TOP word and then stop To restart toggle B3 0 General Inform
325. el configuration has been changed in order for this example to function connect the controllers using a 1761 CBL HM02 cable leave connected until the COMM 0 LED on the ML1500 starts to blink Verifying data has been sent Knowledgebase Quick Starts 573 To verify the data has been sent to node 4 disconnect the HM02 cable and connect the PC running RSLogix 500 to the ML1000 Node 4 Go to N7 0 and view the data this should match the data in N7 0 of node 1 Another way to verify the data is being sent to node 4 is to replace the Target Device Data Table Address with an output modules address In this example the output module is a ML1000 the address would be O 0 0 This will display in binary on the output LEDS what ever number that was entered into N7 0 of the ML1500 IMPORTANT NOTE By addressing O 0 0 the outputs of the destination processor will be energized upon successful transmission of data Verify that nothing is connected to the outputs to ensure safe operation of the controller If a 16 Point MicroLogix 1000 is being used as the destination processor Node 1 and the number 63 is entered into the above example all the outputs will be energized or turn If the number entered is greater then 63 then a fault may occur with an error stating that the extended I O bit S 0 8 was not set In this case clear the fault go offline set bit S 0 8 and re download the ladder program The above example uses the DF1 Full Duple
326. ember Message Timeout Communications Instructions 429 Message timeout is specified in seconds If the target does not respond within this time period the message instruction will generate a specific error see MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 441 The amount of time that is acceptable should be based on application requirements and network capacity loading Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 430 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Target Type You can select either Module or Network Device If you need to message to a device on DeviceNet select Network Device If you need to message to a DeviceNet parameter on the scanner select Module This allows the control program access to module parameters TIP Note many module parameters are not editable and some can only be edited when the module is in Idle Mode Local Node address This is the target device s DeviceNet node number Service DeviceNet uses services to provide specific messaging functions A number of standard services with their corresponding parameters have been preconfigured for ease of use Expansion Comms Port 1 CIP Generic N70 7 5 Network Device 6 6 Read Assembl 70 112 Communications Instructions 431 If you need to use a service that is not available select one of the Generic services The Generic service allows you to enter specific service code parame
327. en characters that indicates the end of a message packet Modbus Data Table Coils Discrete outputs Modbus addresses 0001 to 4096 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 es Contacts Discrete inputs Modbus addresses 10001 to 14096 range 3 to 255 0 nofile 0 ssignment Input Registers Read Only Modbus addresses 30001 to 30256 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 Must be Binary or Holding Registers Read Write Modbus addresses 40001 to 40256 range 3 to 255 0 no 0 Integer file type file RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publ
328. ending messages For example you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timer file The only exceptions to this rule are that e long integer data can be read from or written to bit or integer files and e RTC files can be written to integer files MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only TIP The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message A85CIF 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 TG R 3 word 34 ST 42 word 2 write only 500CPU 0 1 B N 1 word 103 FU L 2 word 51 T C R 3 word 34 RTC 8 word 1 write only PLC5 0 1 B N 1 word 103 RO L 2 word 51 T 5 word 20 o BN word FL 2 words 63 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 414 Communications Instructions Message Type Modbus Commands File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message B N command 5 1 bit 1 B N command 6 1 word 1 B N 1 bit 1920 Modbus bit elements 120 commands 1 2 and 15 words Commands 1 and 2 are read only 15 is write only B N commands 3 4 and 16 multi register 120 Modbus register elements 120 words Commands 3 and 4 are read only 16 is write only 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 S
329. ent The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Sere ENE IE See not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates that LIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 Cong word The position is incremented after each load e Position This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 dong word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 A 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level a gt Mode Ps S P
330. er b ER Error Code H UIX User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected CF Ceunmting Fnahled Enter the following parameters for the Minimum Configuration required for the HSC to count pulses Note There is no additional ladder logic required to enable the High Speed Counter In other words there is no HSC instruction needed for the ladder logic program Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 566 Knowledgebase Quick Starts HSC 0 PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the HSC 0 accumulated count equals the High or Low preset or passes through Overflow or Underflow The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file 3 to 255 HSC 0 AS Auto Start defines if the HSC function will automatically start when the MicroLogix enters run or test HSC 0 CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the HSC HSC 0 HIP High Preset is the upper set point in counts that defines when the HSC will generate an interrupt and execute the PFN sub routine Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Example The following example uses the HSC in Mode 0 Up Counter The Up Counter clears the accumulated value 0 when it reaches the High Preset HIP This mode configures 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 as the HSC 0 input
331. er Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix devices on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Configure the baud rate via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel O tab Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Remote Packet Support These controllers can respond and initiate with device s communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 522 Protocol Configuration DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix controlle
332. er limit CVH and lower limit CVL Limit values are a percentage 0 to 100 of the control variable The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words Entering these values enables the alarms but not limiting Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms Anti reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range The integral sum is contained in element IS The Manual Mode In the MANUAL mode the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the control variable Rather it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum CS so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re entering the AUTO mode In the MANUAL mode the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to 100 This value is converted into a number from 0 to 16383 and written to the Control Variable address If your ladder program sets the manual output level design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the MANUAL mode Remember that the new CV value is in the range of 0 to 16383 not 0 to 100 Writing to the CV percent CVP with your lad
333. er power without risk of damage to the RTC or the processor module If the module is installed while the ML1200 1500 is executing the module will not be recognized until a power cycle occurs or the controller is placed into program mode or faults ML1200 ML1500 Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the RTC tab See Below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 578 Knowledgebase Quick Starts F Function Files DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled BL ATC Battery is Low ooocococcc c Cm Values can be entered for the Year Month Day Hour Minute and Seconds offline once downloaded the values will take effect immediately Note The Day of the week is calculated by the RTC Online Pressing _sabaet Tine this will set the ML1200 1500 clock to the same Date amp Time as the PC connected online Function Files HR Hour MIN Minute SEC Second DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled BL ATC Battery is Low Pressing ___ Disable Cok will disable the RTC from functioning and decrease the drain on the battery during storage Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 579 RTC 0 BL The Battery Low bit will be set 1 when the battery is low This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 Days after which the RTC dat
334. eries C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must bot h be Floating Point 2 MicroLogix 1200 Series C FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRN 9 and higher Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 415 Target Device Parameters i MSG Rung 2 0 MG1 1 0 i lolx General r This Controller Control Rits Communication Command lyrore if timed vut TO 0 Data Table Address N7 0 J Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW U Channet b Eno ERE 0 Target Device Message done ON 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address 20 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Nada Addr dec octal Local Remote Eror Enor CodefHext 0 r Error Description No errors Message Timeout This value defines how long in seconds the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs enabling the message If the timeout period expires the message errors out The default value is 5 seconds 2 seconds for Modbus commands The maximum timeout value is 255 seconds If the message timeout is set to zero the message instruction will never timeout Set the Time Out bit TO 1 to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respond to the communications reques
335. error occurs Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSB of the second word of the control block The error code is also displayed on the PID Setup Screen in RSLogix 500 Error Code Description of Error Condition or Conditions Corrective Action 11H 1 Loop update time Change loop update time 0 lt D lt 1024 D gt 1024 2 Loop update time D 0 12H Proportional gain Change proportional gain K to 0 lt Ke K lt 0 13H Integral gain reset Change integral gain reset T to 0 lt T Ti lt 0 14H Derivative gain rate Change derivative gain rate Tyto 0 lt Ty Ty lt 0 15H Feed Forward Bias FF is out of range Change FF so it is within the range 16383 to 16383 23H Scaled setpoint min Change scaled setpoint min MinS to MinS gt Scaled setpoint max Maxs 32768 lt MinS lt MaxS lt 32767 31H If you are using setpoint scaling and If you are using setpoint scaling then change MinS gt setpoint SP gt MaxS or the setpoint SP to MinS lt SP lt Maxs or If you are not using setpoint scaling and If you are not using setpoint scaling then change 0 gt setpoint SP gt 16383 the setpoint SP to 0 lt SP lt 16383 then during the initial execution of the PID loop this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set However during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop
336. es all instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue including stopping execution of the ASCII instruction currently executing The ER error bit is set for each instruction that is removed from the ASCII queue When any of the other port control instructions are encountered in a ladder logic program it may or may not execute immediately depending on the contents of the ASCII queue The ASCII queue is a FIFO first in first out queue which can contain up to 16 instructions The ASCII queue operates as follows e When the instruction is encountered on a rung and the ASCII queue is empty the instruction executes immediately It may take several program scans for the instruction to complete e When the instruction is encountered on a rung and there are from 1 to 15 instructions in the ASCII queue the instruction is put into the ASCII queue and is executed when the preceding instructions are completed If the ASCII queue is full the instruction waits until the next program scan to determine if it can enter the ASCII queue The controller continues executing other instructions while the ASCII port control instruction is waiting to enter the queue Programming ASCII Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not contin
337. es and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below 4 0K Data Words gt o A A A Program Words 3 65K 4 35K Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 60 Controller Memory and File Types MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor The 1764 LRP processor supports 14K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below Data Words pm A a o uw A A 10K 10 7K So A Program Words IMPORTANT For the MicroLogix 1500 the maximum file size of any single ladder file is 6 4K words You can utilize the entire programming space by using multiple ladder files through the use of subroutines The 1764 LRP processor also supports 48K bytes of battery backed memory for Data Logging or Recipe operations See Chapter 22 for Data Logging and Recipe information See MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 471 to find the memory usage for specific instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Controller Memory and File Types 61 Viewing Controller Memory Usage 1 Highlight and open Controller Properties 2 The amount of Memory Used and Memory Left will appear in the Controller Properties window once the program has been verified Controller Properties Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 62 Controller Memory and File Types Data Files D
338. es can be used as shown below IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode n bai Parameter s e z E E cc S j 3 lg g 5 r 1 jo g Bisle oO on e 2 z S lg l la lm a E e ls le o m j a Je E l q a a ce Fe ES 2 o v a le lz fu lo Jo B a fe a o IG la S a E 6 Ja ja la S S la Slot Mask e e e e e e e e e Length Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 10M Slot Mask Length _ Immediate Output w Mask 0 0 0 N7 0 1 Input and Output Instructions 285 Instruction Type output TIP This instruction is used for embedded I O only It is not designed to be used with expansion I O Execution Time for the IOM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 22 3 US 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP 18 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP 19 4 us 0 0 us The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan This instruction uses the following operands Bit Output Data Output Word e Slot The slot is the physical location that is updated
339. escriptions Access DN Done PD10 0 DN _ binary bit Oor1 status _ read only The PID done bit is set 1 for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed It resets 0 whenever the instruction is scanned and the PID algorithm was not computed applies to timed mode only Process Control Instruction 335 Enable EN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit Oor1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set 1 whenever the PID instruction is enabled It follows the rung state Integral Sum IS Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access IS Integral Sum PD10 0 IS__ long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This is the result of the integration e E dt I Altered Derivative Term AD Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AD Altered PD10 0 AD_ long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only Derivative Term 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 336 Process Control Instruction Runtime Errors Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime
340. ese bits can be used in the control program for error detection Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 28 1 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion 1 0 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 If the application requires more I O than the embedded I O that the controller provides you can attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion 1 0 Modules Compact I O Bulletin 1769 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and in the future specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1500 you can attach up to 16 additional I O modules The number of modules that can be attached is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See the MicroLogix 1500 User Manual publication 1764 UM001 for more information on valid configurations TIP Visit the MicroLogix web site http www ab com micrologix for the MicroLogix 1500 Expansion I O System Qualifier Addressing Expansion 1 0 The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1500 and its T O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 16 the controller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Power supplies and cables are not counted as slots but must be added to the RSLogix 500 project in the I O configuration Modules are counted from left to right on each bank as shown in the illustrations below 1 Limit of 8 modules for Series A Base Unit 1 0 Configuration 29 Ve
341. eset word of the free running timer at T4 0 Note Since the trim pots only adjust from 0 to 250 the timer preset is only adjustable from 0 to 250 seconds RIF LAD 2 TRIMPOT MOV Source TPI 0 POTO 0 lt Dest T4 0 PRE 0 lt 14 0 DN TON Timer On Delay Timer 14 0 Time Base 1 0 Preset 0 lt Accum Using a trim pot to adjust a value larger then 250 By using the SCP instruction a ladder program can be written which will allow the trim pot to adjust between 32768 to 32767 using standard word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 using long words Important Remember that the trim pots only have 3 4 of a turn resolution Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 582 Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following example takes the input value of trim pot 0 0 250 and scales it from 0 to 600 using the Scale with Parameters instruction SCP The scaled value is placed in the preset of the free running timer at T4 0 This allows for POT 0 to adjust from 0 to 10 minutes 600 Sec HLAD 2 IRIMPUISUP Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 17712 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID Interrupt EIl Event Input Interrupts Ell Event Input Interrupts HSC High Speed Counter Ell Event Input interrupts Ell Event Input Interrupts HSC High Speed Counter Knowledgebase Quick Starts 583 The UID instruction can be used as an output instruction to disable
342. essors Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 5 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 0 Software Handshaking Status 1to15 Reserved 11 Echo Character Count 12 Received Character Count 13 to 18 Reserved 19 Bad Character Count 20 to 22 Reserved ioli Channel 0 Channel 1 Generic ASCII Echo Character Count D Transmitter ENABLED Character Count Received 9 Bad Character Count oid Modem Lines Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 98 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Active Node Table Block of Communications Status File Active Node Table Block Word 23 24 Description Active Node Table Category Identifier Code always 3 Length e always 4 for DH 485 e always 18 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 25 Format Code always 0 26 Number of Nodes e always 32 for DH 485 e always 255 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 27 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 0 to 15 CS0 27 1 is node 1 CS0 27 2 is node 2 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each no
343. et 1 in the controller its user program and the memory module user program must match for the controller to enter an executing mode If the user program does not match the memory module program or if the memory module is not present the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode An RTC module does not support program compare If program compare is enabled and an RTC only module is installed the controller does not enter an executing mode See also LPC Load Program Compare on page 79 Math Overflow Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 2 14 binary Oor1 control read write Set 1 this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 or 32 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is cleared 0 When S 2 14 is cleared 0 and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e the destination address contains 32 767 word or 2 147 483 647 ong word if the result is po
344. eter Select PWM 0 PP Ibit Oor1 control read write The PWM PP Profile Parameter Select selects which component of the waveform is modified during a ramp phase e Set 1 selects Frequency e Cleared 0 selects Duty Cycle The PWM PP bit cannot be modified while the PWM output is running enabled See PWM ADD on page 176 for more information Using High Speed Outputs 173 PWM Idle Status IS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS_ bit Oor 1 status read only The PWM IS dle Status is controlled by the PWM sub system and represents no PWM activity It can be used in the control program by an input instruction e Set 1 PWM sub system is in an idle state e Cleared 0 PWM sub system is not in an idle state it is running PWM Error Detected ED Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit Oor1 status read only The PWM ED Error Detected bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PWM 0 ED e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in an error state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instructio
345. ets Logical Instructions 233 AND Bit Wise AND Instruction Type output AND Bitwise AND Source A N7 0 0000h lt Execution Time for the AND Instruction Source B N7 1 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 0000h lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 2 US 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 79 us 0 0 us The AND instruction performs a bit wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the AND Instruction Destination A AND B Source A 1 1 1 1 11 JO 11 10 JO 10 JO JO 71 11 JO JO Source B 1 1 10 JO 1111 111111 11 JO JO JO JO n n Destination 1 1 10 JO 1 10 11 10 JO J0 J0 JO JO 10 10 10 Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the PORT EN Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 231 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 232 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 234 Logical Instructions OR Logical OR Instruction Type output OR Bitwise Inclusive OR Source A N7 0 0000h lt Execution Time for the OR Instruction Source B N7 1 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 0000h lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 2 US 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 150
346. evice components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 160 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 PTO Operating Frequency Status OFS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OFS Operating PTO 0 0FS word INT 0to 20 000 status read only Frequency Status Hz The PTO OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub system TIP The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the PTO 0 OF This is because the PTO sub system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies For PTO applications this is typically not an issue because in all cases an exact number of pulses are produced PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated TOP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Description Format Program Access TOP Total Output PTO 0 TOP llong word 0 to 2 147 483 647 control read write Pulses To Be Generated 32 bit INT The PTO TOP Total Output Pulses defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile accel run decel inclusive PTO Output Pulses Produced OPP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access
347. executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Underflow Interrupt UFI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFI Underflow HSC 0 UFI fbi Interrupt t 2to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UFI Underflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt executes e High Preset Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes e Controller enters an executing mode Overflow OF Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bi t Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The OF Overflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the overflow variable H
348. f the elements follow e S UUW Read Wnite Message CEN e lu MSG Fle MGLI 1 CLIN CER WUUL Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 408 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 This Controller Parameters Channel The MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP support Channel 0 messaging only The MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP supports three different pathways for messaging Channels 0 and 1 are RS 232 ports and are functionally identical to Channel 0 on the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP controllers The 1764 LRP also supports backplane communications through the Expansion Communication Port ECP as illustrated below ECP messaging is supported through the 1769 SDN DeviceNet scanner and 1769 SM1 DPI SCANport communications modules MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 O Integral 0 Integral Read 1 Integral _ Expansion Comms Port L When ECP is chosen you are able to select which slot position 1 to 16 the communications module resides in The 1764 LRP processor can support up to two communications modules with full messaging functionality MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 Expansion Comms Port You can use multiple communications modules in a 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 system but you can only message through the first two A communications module physically positioned after the first two can only be used for I O scanning Communications Ins
349. f the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Example Table Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level al S Parameter gje E o r a Pipe SJE Ee SAE E gla jejo l _ p a L s els ela e foo f fue Se SIE I S SE IS Sa e lalelaslsia Source A ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Source B ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Destination e e lel el el el el el elelelel ejele e e ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files The terms used within the table are defined as follows e Parameter The parameter is the information you supply to the instruction It can be an address a value or an instruction specific parameter such as a timebase e Data Files See Data Files on page 62 e Function Files See Function Files on page 69 e CS See Communications Status File on page 84 e IOS See Input Output Status File on page 99 e DLS See Data Log Status File on page 458 e Address Mode See Addressing Modes on page 103 e Addressing Level Address levels describe the granularity at which an instruction allows an ope
350. faults and does not enter an executing mode Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly TIP When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 10 binary Oor1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller TIP If you clear the controller memory the controller loads the default program System Status File 485 The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LE Load on Error on page 79 Load Memory Module Always Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 11 binary Oor1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit is set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program The mode of the controller after the transfer take
351. fect immediately In RSLogix 500 click on Set Date amp Time in the RTC Function File screen to set the RTC time to the current time on your PC Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 72 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data Use the Disable Clock button in your programming TIP l i device to disable the real time clock before storing a module This decreases the drain on the battery during storage Real Time Clock Accuracy The following table indicates the expected accuracy of the real time clock for various temperatures Real Time Clock Accuracy at Various Temperatures Ambient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 34 to 70 seconds month 25 C 77 F 36 to 68 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 to 75 seconds month 55 C 131 F 133 to 237 seconds month 1 These numbers are worst case values over a 31 day month RTC Battery Operation The real time clock has an internal battery that is not replaceable The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which represents the status of the RTC battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 days and the real time clock module needs to be replaced When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable or a real time clock
352. files is permitted Note that the maximum number of registers in a command does not allow for more than two files to be accessed during a single Modbus command Modbus RTU Master Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 546 Protocol Configuration Select the Modbus RTU Master from the Channel Configuration menu as shown below Channel Configuration z xi General Channel 0 Driver Modbus ATU Master Baud 19200 Ra Parity NONE Pratneol Cantal ContralLine DEAM e ei InterChar Timeout xt ms RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms f0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 woes am e The Baud defaults to 19200 The Control Line can be configured as e No Handshaking e Full Duplex Modem RTS on e Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking The Protocol Control defaults are e No Handshaking e InterChar Timeout 0 e Pre Transmit Delay 0 When the system driver is Modbus RTU Master the following communication port parameters can be changed Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver Modbus RTU Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Publication 1762 RMO001F E
353. first six words 0 to 5 of the input data file contain the analog RTD or resistance values of the inputs Words 6 and 7 provide sensor channel status feedback for use in your control program as shown below Bit Position b WBZ wp Pree eE pS ep RTD resistance Input Data Channel 0 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 1 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 2 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 3 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 4 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 5 Not Used 0C5 0C4 0C3 OC2 OC1 OCO Not Used S5 S4 S3 2 1 SO UO 00 jU1 01 U2 02 U3 03 U4 04 U5 05 Not Used Word ojl l e ol NI gt o N Word 6 and 7 status bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bit for channels 0 through 5 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program This condition occurs when the first analog to digital conversion is still in progress at power up or after a new configuration has been sent to the module Refer to the RTD resistance Input Module User Manual publication number 1769 UM005 for details e OCx Open circuit detection bit for channels 0 through 5 These bits are set 1 when either an open or shorted input for RTD inputs or an open input for resistance inputs is detected TIP Short circuit detection for resistance
354. flow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt executes e High Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes e Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 127 Count Direction DIR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access DIR Count HSC 0 DIR bi Direction t Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The DIR Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC accumulator counts up the direction flag is set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag is cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit retains its value The only time the direction flag changes is when the accumulated count reverses This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a run mode Mode Done MD Description Address Data Format ySC Modes Ty
355. for non user faults Using Interrupts 295 User Interrupt Instructions Instruction Used To Page INT Interrupt Subroutine Use this instruction to identify a program file as an 295 interrupt subroutine INT label versus a regular subroutine SBR label This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine STS Selectable Timed Use the STS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 296 Start instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 297 UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in 99S which 1 0 interrupts cannot occur UIF User Interrupt Flush Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending 300 interrupts from the system INT Interrupt Subroutine Instruction Type input INT 1 0 Interrupt Execution Time for the INT Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 11 0 us 1 0 us The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine ISR This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Use of the INT instruction is optional Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 296 Using Interrupts STS Selectable Timed Start Instruction Type output
356. for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer FRD Convert From Binary Converts the BCD source value to an integer and 222 Coded Decimal stores it in the destination TOD Convert to Binary Coded Converts the integer source value to BCD format 226 Decimal and stores it in the destination Using Decode and Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Encode Instructions Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 x l 7 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode PA l Parameter g 2 E a amp m a 3 is S sc z o o ijn j gt 9 jo l B le l In V E S tse le S le IS o _ lm ie le u bh 5 le amp SIE IG ES IS FS le a 2 e fF 8 a Source e e e e e e e e Destination eje e o jo e o 1 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 220 Conversion Instructions DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source N7 0 0000h lt st N7 1 00000000000
357. functionality type 3 77 load always 3 79 load on error 3 79 mode behavior 3 79 module present 3 78 program compare 3 79 write protect 3 78 memory module password mismatch status bit C 493 memory usage checking controller memory usage 2 67 MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 463 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 471 MEQ 9 200 MEQ instruction 9 200 message Quick Start example F 570 message MG file 27 392 message errors 21 441 message instruction 21 391 message reply pending status bit C 499 messages local 27 405 local messaging examples 27 417 remote 21 434 messaging local DeviceNet message 21 423 remote station to remote station E 527 messaging overview 21 385 minor error bits C 492 MMI function file 3 77 mnemonic 1 601 Modbus definition 7 602 Modbus RTU protocol F 544 Modbus to MicroLogix memory map F 551 E 552 E 553 E 555 mode behavior C 486 mode status C 482 modem 1 602 modes 1 602 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure D 508 MOV instruction 13 237 move instructions 13 237 MSG Quick Start example F 570 MSG instruction 27 391 error codes 21 441 ladder logic 21 403 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 612 Index local messaing examples 21 417 timing diagram 27 399 MUL instruction 10 211 multiply instruction 10 211 MVM instruction 13 240 NEG instruction 10 212 negate instruction 10 212 negative logic 1 602 NEQ instruction 9 197 network 1 602 node address status C 497 nominal input c
358. g string and storing it in a new string Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is the existing string The Source value is not affected by this instruction Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 of the string you want to extract An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string Number is the number of characters from 1 to 82 you want to extract starting at the indexed position If the Index plus the Number is greater than the total characters in the source string the Destination string will be the characters from the Index to the end of the Source string Destination is the string element ST where you want the extracted string stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASCII Instructions 371 AEX Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files Parameter a oc a ae a 5 E E iz be e g i E la e el ZE o v jo E Z ja v Jo B a fe a v G a ja jE Source Index ele elele Number ele elele Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Address Address Level gt Mode N l E e z o S Q fs l 15 z E eo 7 1 jo S L 5 5 le a a la JE e ls Je Js
359. g Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard for defining codes for information exchange between equipment produced by different manufacturers The basis of character sets used in most microcomputers a string of 7 binary digits represents each character baud rate The speed of communication between devices Baud rate is typically displayed in K baud For example 19 2K baud 19 200 bits per second bit The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF block diagrams A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 598 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program Its primary use is to build OR logic communication scan A part of the controllers operating cycle Communication with devices such as other controllers and operator interface devices takes place during this period control program User logi
360. gned integer LOP Low Preset OHD Output High Data 16 bit binary OLD Output Low Dat Cpu Low Tata bit 15 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt bit 0 Once the values above have been entered for HIP and OHD the PLS is configured Configuring the HSC for Use with the PLS 1 Under Controller double click on Function Files 2 For HSC 0 configure the HSC MOD to use PLS10 and for the HSC to operate in mode 00 IMPORTANT The value for MOD must be entered in Hexadecimal For example PLS10 0A and HSC Mode 00 HPR High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction UF Underflow 0 OF Overflow 0 MD Mode Done 0 H CD Count Down 0 CU Count Up MOD PLS file bits 15 8 HSC Mode bits 7 0 AQO Ay l ACC Accumulator H HIP High Preset 1000 H LOF Low Preset 0 H OVF Overflow 2147483647 PLS Operation for This Example When the ladder logic first runs HSC ACC equals 0 therefore PLS10 0 OLD s data is sent through the HSC OMB mask and sets all the outputs off When HSC ACC equals 250 the PLS10 0 OHD is sent through the HSC OMB mask and energizes the outputs This will repeat as the HSC ACC reaches 500 750 and 1000 Once completed the cycle resets and repeats Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 6 Using High Speed Outputs The high speed output instructions allow you to control and monitor the PTO and PWM functions which control the physical high speed outputs
361. gral Derivative PID 11 0 295 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 24 4 85 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 24 7 1126 6 19 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not 0 0 21 2 2 0 apply 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p 469 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 5 9 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Real Time Clock Adjust RTA 3 7 4 7 556 2 false to true transition Retentive Timer On RTO 2 4 18 0 3 4 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 10 5 2 5 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 31 5 3 8 0 0 52 2 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 7 1 23 5 3 9 7 1 26 3 44 Sequencer Load SQL 7 0 21 7 3 4 7 1 24 3 3 9 Sequencer Output sao 7 1 23 2 3 9 7 1 26 6 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 26 0 1 5 0 0 30 9 2 5 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 57 5 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 0 3 4 3 3 0 0 12 9 3 5 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 466 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Suspend SUS n a n a 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications SVC 0 0 208 1 6 1 0 wordl Swap SWP 0 0 13 7 2 2 11 5 swapped
362. greater than 64 double word file 003F COP CPW FLL A COP CPW or FLL instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA parameter references outside of the length and parameter do not point outside FILE SPACE entire data space of the data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0042 INVALID RECIPE Number of Recipes specified is Recoverable e Correct the value for Number of Recipes NUMBER greater than 256 e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Fault Messages and Error Codes 513 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0044 INVALID WRITE TO Write attempt to RTC function file Recoverable e Correct the invalid data RTC FUNCTION FILE failed This only occurs when e Re compile reload the program and enter attempting to write invalid data to the Bun mode the RTC function file Examples of i invalid data are setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th 0050 CONTROLLER TYPE A particular controller type was Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH selected in the user program in the user program or configuration but did not match the e Reconfigure the program to match the actual controller type attached hardware 0051 BASE TYPE A particular hardware type AWA Non User e Con
363. guration 527 About Slave to Slave Messaging If one slave station has a message to send to another it simply includes the destination slave station s address in the message instruction s destination field in place of the master station s address when responding to a poll The master station checks the destination station address in every packet header it receives from any slave station If the address does not match the slave s own station address the entire message is forwarded back onto the telemetry network to the appropriate slave station without any further processing Addressing Tips Each station on the network including the master station must have a unique address The address range is 0 to 254 so you can have a maximum of 255 stations on a single telemetry network Station address 255 is the broadcast address which you cannot select as a station s individual address DF1 Half Duplex Master Standard Polling Mode With standard polling mode the master device initiates all communication by polling each slave address configured in the priority and normal polling ranges The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master Based on a slave s inclusion in the priority and or normal poll ranges the master polls each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the s
364. hange the mode back to RUN or Halted was not cleared at the end of e clear S 1 13 the Major Error Halted bit the User Fault Routine The User before the end of the User Fault Routine Fault Routine ran because bit 1 9 was set at power up 0017 NVRAM MEMORY Bit S 2 9 is set in the controller and Non Recoverable Transfer the memory module program to the MODULE USER the memory module user program controller and then change to Run mode PROGRAM does not match the controller user MISMATCH program 0018 MEMORY MODULE The user program in the memory Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash to be USER PROGRAM module is incompatible with the OS compatible with the memory module A i WITH e Obtain a new memory module e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 001A USER PROGRAM The user program is incompatible Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash INCOMPATIBLE WITH with the OS e Contact your local Rockwell Automation OS AT POWER UP representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 0020 MINOR ERROR AT A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S 5 was Recoverable e Correct the instruction logic causing the END OF SCAN DETECTED set at the end of scan error e Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault e Enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P
365. he Done bit DN is set and a value of 27 is present in POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit CER is set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 383 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 381 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AWT Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12 us character 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 237 us 10 6 us character 12 8 us Use the AWT instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 362 ASCII Instructions Programming AWT Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that either detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater IMPORTANT Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a l communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction executes on a true rung Once started if the rung goes false th
366. he decel phase Once set the decel phase completes without an error or fault condition Normal Ramp Function without CS Accel Run Decel Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 164 Using High Speed Outputs Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function N Normal Ramp Decel AfterCS Function is Set Accel Run Decel If the CS bit is set during the accel phase the accel phase completes and the PTO immediately enters the decel phase Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Decel Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 165 PTO Jog Frequency JF Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 0 to20 000 control read write The PTO JF Jog Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO Jog Pulse JP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access t Oor1 control read write JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP b The PTO JP Jog Pulse bit is used to instruct the PTO sub system to gene
367. he HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is greater than or equal to the high preset variable HSC 0 HIP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Underflow UF Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UF Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the underflow variable HSC 0 UNF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Underflow Mask UFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFM HSC 0 UFM lbi Underflow Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 t 2to7 control read write Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 124 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The UFM Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not
368. he driver can be configured as Modbus RTU Master or Modbus RTU Slave The Modbus RTU Slave driver maps the four Modbus data types coils contacts input registers and holding registers into four binary and or integer data table files created by the user Modbus RTU Master TIP Modbus RTU Master driver can be used with the following controllers e MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher e MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Message instructions are used to transfer information between the data files in the Modbus RTU Master and the Modbus RTU Slaves Refer to Chapter 21 for detailed information about configuring a MSG instruction for Modbus Communications Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function e coils generally addressed as Oxxxx e contacts 1xxxx e input registers 3xxxx e holding registers 4xxxx Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are like outputs and can be read and written to Contacts are like inputs and are read only Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing input values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written to The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the Modbus Data Address field when configuring the mes
369. he queue number Data Logging Overflow OV The Data Logging Overflow OV bit is used to indicate when a record gets overwritten in the associated queue This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when a record is overwritten Once set the OV bit remains set until you clear 0 it To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q OV where Q is the queue number Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 459 File Size FSZ File Size FSZ shows the number of records that are allocated for this queue The number of records is set when the data log queue is configured FSZ can be used with RST to determine how full the queue is To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q FSZ where Q is the queue number Records Stored RST Records Stored RST specifies how many data sets are in the queue RST is decremented when a record is read from a communications device To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q RST where Q is the queue number TIP If a queue is full and another record is saved the oldest record is over written Queue behavior is the same as a FIFO stack first in first out If a queue is full and an additional record is saved the first record is deleted DLS information can be used in the following types of instructions Instruction Type Operand Relay Bit Destination OutputBit Compare Source A Source B Low
370. he user program and retains its value through a power cycle This bit must be set for the high speed counter to operate Set Parameters SP Description Address Data Format yS Modes Type User Program Access SP Set HSC 0 SP_ bi Parameters t Oto7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The SP Set Parameters control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC sub system When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC 0 SP is solved true off to on rung transition all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function are checked and loaded into the HSC sub system The HSC sub system then operates based on those newly loaded settings This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit SP can be toggled while the HSC is running and no counts are lost Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 118 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 User Interrupt Enable UIE Description Address Data HSC Type User Program Format Modes Access t Oto7 control read write UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine
371. heck connections HARDWARE ERROR _ with an expansion I O module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power 0083 MAX 1 0 CABLES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so EXCEEDED 1 0 cables allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of cables e Cycle power Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 514 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0084 MAX 1 0 POWER The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion 1 0 system so SUPPLIES EXCEEDED 1 0 power supplies allowed was that it has the correct number of power exceeded supplies 0085 MAX I O MODULES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion 1 0 system so EXCEEDED 1 0 modules allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of modules e Cycle power yxggl EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module could not Non User e Change the baud rate in the user program MODULE BAUD RATE communicate at the baud rate 1 0 configuration and ERROR specified in the user program 1 0 e Re compile reload the program and enter configuration the Run mode or e Replace the module e Cycle power xx87 I O CONFIGURATION e The expansion 0 configuration Non User e Either correct the user program 0 MISMATCH in the
372. hen the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion With RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and higher the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP offers a Half Duplex Modem with DCD Handshaking Control Line selection This allows messaging to occur in a Report by Exception mode with radio modems using hardware handshaking based on the status of the DCD Transmission can only occur when DCD is low indicating that no other nodes are currently transmitting Received characters are considered valid while DCD is high Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration 539 A DCD Wait Timeout parameter configures the length of time after triggering a MSG that the DCD must go low in order for a message to be transmitted Otherwise the MSG will error out with a 09 error code The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used in a pseudo Master Slave mode with any radio modems as long as the designated Master node is the only node initiating MSG instructions and as long as only one MSG instruction is triggered at a time For modern serial radio modems that support full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used to set up a Masterless peer to peer radio network where any node can initiate communications to any other node at any ti
373. ic requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance e number of nodes on the network e addresses of those nodes e baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed Refer to your programming software s documentation for more information Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 520 Protocol Configuration Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration 521 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 to 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Configure the node address via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel O tab The node address is listed as Source ID Setting Controll
374. ication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration 551 Modbus Slave Memory Map The modbus Memory map is summarized in and detailed in Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map Summary MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Modbus Description Valid MicroLogix Addressing Addressing File Type Data File Number Address 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 30001 to 30256 Read Only Modbus Input Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 30501 to 30532 Modbus Communication Parameters Communication Status File 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 40257 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 of four Holding Register files 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 41793 to 4204g Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 of the last Holding Register file 1 These addresses only become active when specially configured for expanded holding registers Publication 1762 RM0
375. ications Instructions MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 9 and higher Processor only 395 Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 starting bit address for coils Y Word read only and inputs 13 MG11 0 TFN Modbus Target Data Y Word read write Address 1 14 Reserved Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only The Control Bits Sub Element 16 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message File Sub Element 16 Control Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 MG11 0 0 EN Enable N bit read write 1 MSG enabled O MSG not enabled 9 to Reserved N bit read write 14 8 MG11 0 0 TO Time Out N bit read write 1 MSG time out by user O no user MSG time out 0 to Reserved N bit read write 7 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 396 Communications Instructions The Status Bits Sub Element 17 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message File Sub Element 17 Status Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 Reserved N bit read only 14 MG11 0 0 ST Start N bit read only 1 MSG transmitted and acknowledged by target device 0 MSG has not been received by target 13 MG11 0 0 DN Done N bit read only 1 MSG completed successfully 0 MSG not complete 12 MG11 0 0 ER Error N bit read only 1 error detected 0 no error detected
376. icroLogix 1200 Expansion I O System Qualifier Addressing Expansion 1 0 Slots The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1200 and its lo The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 6 the controller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Modules are counted from left to right as shown below Expansion I 0 TIP In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 46 for complete information on address formats Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 20 1 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1200 Expansion 1 0 Memory Mapping Discrete 1 0 Configuration 1762 IA8 and 1762 108 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 Bit Position wo co ez ol _ w N 15 14 13 12 11 110 X X X IX JX FX IX YX fr rrr wewewe Word r read only x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 1016 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 g Bit Position h15 j4 j3 12 J1 10 J9 8 7 e 5 4 B 2 M Jo 0 r r r r r r r
377. id Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files gt Mode PA a E o z Parameter zie lg ls K 5l a iS e S z S i t a oF E 3 le zilole o g jo o _ l a 2 is le 5 E e lo lo elza lb h S le E EIB OG Oe Es e 8 e a JE l le z 8 a Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element ARL ASCII Read Line ARL ASCII Read Line CEN gt Channel 0 Dest ST10 5 lt DN gt Control R6 4 String Length 15 lt lt ER gt Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit N is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer the characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is put in the POS field of the control data file The number in the POS field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters are read TIP Fo
378. ied for the MicroLogix 1200 The minimum configuration required for Mode 6 operation is to enter a file number for the PFN parameter set the AS and CE bits to a 1 and enter a 6 for the MOD parameter Note If the encoder is a High Voltage Differential Line Driver do not terminate A B or Z amp Indicates a wire makes a connection 1764 248 WA iE ad fF sit ia Era Erz De EPER EEE HBW J iF Este Of8 Or Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 568 Knowledgebase Quick Starts TROUBLESHOOTING Problem 1 The input LEDS on the Micrologix Base unit turn on and off but no counts are seen in the HSC accumulator Solution The input filter frequency may need to be adjusted in order to capture the input pulses Follow the steps below Select I O Configuration Highlight the 1764 Micrologix 1500 Select Adv Config Select the Embedded I O Configuration Tab Adjust Input filters as needed Module t0 Bul 1764 MicroLogix 500 x Embedded General Configuration Embedded 10 Configuration Input Fier Input Latch Inputs 0 E Inputs 243 detan gt legst da5 eitn gt Inputs 6 7 actaut Inputs Sto 11 draut Z o g S Bit 0 Nit 1 Bil 2 Bit 3 Dit 4 Bil 5 Bit 6 ENS m lin in in fn fin in E i GEEEEERE
379. ies xi General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications F Allow Future Access E Alow ticeang Aco fa Enab e I Er Loox J c cc When Allow Future Access is deselected the controller requires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in the programming device If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program access to the User Program in the controller is denied To access the User Program clear controller memory and reload the program TIP Functions such as change mode clear memory restore program and transfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection Controller passwords are not associated with the Allow Future Access setting Chapter 3 Function Files This chapter describes controller function files The chapter is organized as follows Overview on page 70 Real Time Clock Function File on page 71 Trim Pot Information Function File on page 76 Memory Module Information Function File on page 77 DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only on page 80 Base Hardware Information Function File on page 83 Communications Status File on page 84 Input Output Status File on page 99 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 70 Function Files Overview Function Files Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Progr
380. igh byte contains the actual error code returned by the comms module when ERR is OxE0 For Modbus Master the high byte contains the non standard Modbus exception reply returned by the slave when ERR is 0x89 Codes returned with other errors are for internal use only 23 Only used for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher Extended Status Error Code from expansion I O communications module 24 Only used for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher Supplemental Routing Path Data Address bits 7 to 0 Starting Element bits 15 to 8 File Number 1 User access refers to user pi ogram access MSG File word or bit used as an operand for an instruction in a ladder program or access via Comms while in any mode other than download via Programming Software or Memory Module The Target file information contained in Sub Elements 12 through 15 of the MSG File Element depend upon the message type as shown in the tables below Message File Target Location Information Target Device 485 CIF Sub 12 Reserved Description Element aa Word User Program Access read only Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 394 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Message File Target Location Information Target Device 485 CIF Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 E
381. igit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in 14 Conversion Instructions 227 If the destination is the math register it must be directly addressed as 8 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 228 Conversion Instructions TOD To BCD E l Source N7 3 The destination value is 9760 lt displayed in BCD format Dest N10 0 9760 lt lt a MSB LSB N7 3 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 O lt o N a N7 0 4 digitBCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 GCD Gray Code GCD Gray Code Source 11 2 0
382. in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address iles ion Fi Address Level Data Files Function Files gt Mode N E g Parameter a E lo lt ie 5 cc A a 8 Q als 3 2 5 g la jo lS jo l _ I E lig l la a JE e 5 le Js 2 5 o l v la elz khk bh Ea e 2 IE ie 5 S e 8 je a E 6 2 la F 8 a Channel Receive Buffer Transmit Buffer 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When Clear Receive Buffer and Clear Transmit Buffer are both set to Yes all Receive and Transmit instructions ARL ARD AWA and AWT are removed from the ASCII queue When instructions are removed from the ASCII queue the following bits are set ER 1 RN 0 EU 0 and ERR OxOE AIC ASCII Integer to String Instruction Type output AIC Integer to String Source N7 0 Execution Time for the AIC Instruction Dest ST14 1 Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 29 3 us 5 2 us character 0 0 us long word 82 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later word 25 us 4 3 us character 0 0 us long word 68 7 us 0 0 us The AIC instruction converts an integer or long word value source to an ASCII string destination The source can be a c
383. in word 0 bits 0 to 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets when an overflow infinity or NAN not a number condition is detected otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets Move Instructions 239 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller Math Overflow Trap sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set Bit otherwise it remains in last state 1 Control bit TIP If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 240 Move Instructions MVM Masked Move Instruction Type output MVM Masked Move Source N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the MVM Instruction Mask N7 1 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 2 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 7 8 us 0 0 us long word 11 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 7 2 us 0 0 us long word 10 0 us 0 0 us The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination allowing portions of the destination to be masked The mask bit functions as follows Mask Function for MVM Instruction Source Bit Mask Bit Destination
384. in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 242 Move Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow always resets S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if destination is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set otherwise resets Move Instructions 243 Notes Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 244 Move Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions Chapter 14 The file instructions perform operations on file data Instruction Used To Page CPW Copy Word Copy words of data from one location to 246 another COP Copy File Copy a range of data from one file 248 location to another FLL Fill File Load a file with a program constant ora 249 value from an element address BSL Bit Shift Left Load and unload data into a bit array one 250 bit at a ti BSR Bit Shift Right Ege 252 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 255 th der first in first out FFU First In First Out FIFO Some Orde Met insist oul 258 Unload LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 261 der last in first out LFU Last In First Out LIFO Haves RISE EST IT ASE OUD 264 Unload SWP
385. ine asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Detect CSx 9 3 1764 LRP only The status of the DCD handshaking line received by the 1 x equals Channel number Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 processor DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations The following questions need to be answered in order to determine if you can implement the new DF1 Radio Modem driver in your radio modem network 1 Are all of the devices MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 controllers or SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors In order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 6 0 or higher MicroLogix 1200 controllers must be at FRN 7 or higher and MicroLogix 1500 controllers must be at FRN 8 or higher SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors must all be at FRN C 6 or higher in order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher 2 Does each node receive the radio transmissions of every other node being both within radio transmission reception range and on a common receiving frequency either via a Simplex radio mode or via a single common full duplex repeater If so then go to question 3 to see if you can use the DF1 Radio Modem driver to set up a peer to peer radio network If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver by configuring intermediary nodes as Sto
386. ing Half Duplex Modem and Full Duplex Modem The Delete Mode allows you to select the mode of the delete character Toggles between Ignore CRT and Printer Delete Mode affects the characters echoed back to the remote device When Delete Mode is enabled the previous character is removed from the receive buffer e In CRT mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos three characters to the device backspace space and backspace This erases the previous character on the terminal e In Printer Mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos the slash character then the deleted character Enable the Echo parameter to use Delete Mode No Handshaking Ignore Echo When Echo Mode is enabled all of the characters received are echoed back to the remote device This allows you to view characters on a terminal connected to the controller Toggles between Enabled and Disabled Disabled XON XOFF Allows you to Enable or Disable XON XOFF software handshaking XON XOFF software handshaking involves the XON and XOFF control characters in the ASCII character set When the receiver receives the XOFF character the transmitter stops transmitting until the receiver receives the XON character If the receiver does not receive an XON character after 60 seconds the transmitter automatically resumes sending characters Also when the receive buffer is more than 80 full an XOFF character is se
387. ing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Address a z 1 a Data Files Function Files o Mode Level a 4 Parameter se E Pn haa z a S 7 HE 2 5 z oO gla le gloj S Sle l ln AE Lisle isle o les lala le lun 5l Sle SEB Ble SIGE 1S le alslalzlalelsia Operand Bit e e e e e e ele elelelele e e elele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use Indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMEORTANI PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type input Execution Time for the ONS Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 2 6 us 1 9 us MicroLogix 1500 2 2 us 1 7 us TIP The ONS instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provides the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 182 Rel
388. ing power down Data Files Function Files Specialty Files HSC 1 PWM a1 2 po 3 f El 03 a to 255 04 to 255 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 452 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Example Queue 0 This queue is used to show how to calculate the string length of each record and maximum number of records Queue 0 Date v Time v Delimiter Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 B3 2 Record 01 10 2000 20 00 00 2315 03457 200 18190 4465 Record 01 10 2000 20 30 00 2400 03456 250 8210 4375 Record2 01 10 2000 21 00 00 2275 0455 225 350 4335 Record3 01 10 2000 21 30 00 2380 0455 223 8195 14380 Record4 01 10 2000 2200 00 2293 03456 218 8390 4375 Record5 01 10 2000 2230 00 12301 03455 231 3400 4405 Recorde 01 10 2000 23 00 00 2308 03456 215 8100 B95 Record 01 10 2000 23 30 00 2350 03457 208 8120 m5 Record8 01 11 2000 00 00 00 2295 03457 209 8145 4505 Record9 01 11 2000 00 30 00 2395 03456 2m 8190 BO Record 10 01 11 2000 01 00 00 2310 03455 224 8195 455 Record 11 01 11 2000 01 30 00 2295 03456 233 3190 4495 String Length of Re
389. instruction The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time They simply illustrate a sequence of events In actuality the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples Conditions Required to Start the PTO The following conditions must exist to start the PTO e The PTO instruction must be in an idle state e For idle state behavior all of the following conditions must be met Jog Pulse GP bit must be off Jog Continuous JC bit must be off Enable Hard Stop EH bit must be off Normal Operation NS bit must be off Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 150 Using High Speed Outputs The output cannot be forced e The rung it is on must transition from a False state 0 to a True state 1 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation NO Momentary Logic Enable Example Using High Speed Outputs 151 In this example the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input This means that the false to true rung transition enables the PTO instruction and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used the Done DN bit turns on when the instruction completes but only remains on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program The structure
390. instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Forty characters from string ST37 40 are sent through channel 0 The Done bit DN is set and a value of 40 is present in the POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER is set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 383 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 381 ASCII Instructions 365 ABL Test Buffer for Line Instruction Type output ABL Ascii Test For Line t c EN gt Channel 0 2 Control R6 0 lt DN gt Execution Time for the ABL Instruction Characters 1 lt Co Error 0 lt CER gt Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 115 us 8 6 ws character 12 5 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 194 us 7 6 us character 11 4 us The ABL instruction is used to determine the number of characters in the receive buffer of the specified communication channel up to and including the end of line characters termination This instruction looks for the two termination characters that you configure via the channel configuration screen On a false to true
391. ion Controller Memory and File Types 65 TIP The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator It is up to the user to clear this bit When a data file is Static File Protected the values contained in it cannot be changed via communications except during a program download to the controller Using Static File Protection with Data File Download Protection Static File Protection and Data File Download Protection can be used in combination with any MicroLogix 1200 Controller Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Processor Series B and higher Setting Static File Protection Static File Protection can be applied to the following data file types e Output O e Input D e Status S e Binary B e Timer T e Counter C e Control R e Integer N e Floating Point F e String ST e Long Word L e Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG e Programmable Limit Switch PLS Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 66 Controller Memory and File Types Password Protection Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Access the Static File Protect feature using RSLogix 500 programming software For each data file you want protected select the Static protection in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse click on the desired data file Data File Properties General Fie 7 Type N Name INTEGER Desc Elements f
392. ion 9 797 error codes D 507 D 508 ASCII instruction error codes 20 383 Ell error codes 18 309 fault messages and error codes D 507 HSC error codes 5 113 major error code status C 495 math overflow trap bit 10 205 math status bits 70 205 MSG instruction error codes 27 447 PID runtime errors 19 336 PTO error codes 6 167 PWM error codes 6 176 STI error code 18 304 troubleshooting guide D 508 errors identifying D 507 event input interrupt Ell function file 78 308 examine if closed instruction 7 177 Index 609 examine if open instruction 7 177 example active station file 3 99 F 533 DLG Quick Start F 588 HSC Quick Start F 565 MSG Quick Start F 570 PTO Quick Start F 559 PWM Quick Start F 563 RTC Quick Start F 577 RTC Synchronization Quick Start F 585 STI Quick Start F 574 trim pots Quick Start F 580 user interrupt disable UID Quick Start F 583 exclusive OR instruction 12 235 executing mode 1 599 execution time MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 463 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 471 expansion 0 1 19 1 28 analog 1 0 configuration 1 22 1 34 discrete 1 0 configuration 1 20 1 31 F false 1 599 fault messages D 507 D 508 fault override at power up bit C 484 fault recovery procedure D 508 fault routine description of operation 18 294 file number status C 498 manually clearing faults D 508 operation in relation to main control program 18 290 priority of interrupts 78 292 faults automatically clearing D 507 i
393. ion Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 132 3 us 49 7 us character 11 8 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 108 us 44 us character 10 7 us Use the ARD instruction to read characters from the buffer and store them in a string To repeat the operation the rung must go from false to true Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 e Destination is the string element where you want the characters stored Control is the control data file See page 354 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters will be read If you specify 0 characters LEN defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is updated during the execution of the instruction and is read only This is word 2 in the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions ASCII Instructions 375 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARD Instruction Val
394. ions 20 387 latching inputs 7 49 MSG instruction 27 399 PTO relative timing 6 157 quadrature encoder 5 732 TND instruction 76 280 TOD instruction 11 226 changes to the math register 11 227 example 17 227 TOF instruction 8 188 TON instruction 8 788 TPI Quick Start example F 580 TPI function file 3 76 trim pots 3 76 error conditions 3 76 function file 3 76 Quick Start example F 580 troubleshooting D 508 D 516 automatically clearing faults D 507 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance D 576 identifying controller faults D 507 manually clearing faults D 508 using the fault routine D 508 true 1 606 U UID Quick Start example F 583 UID instruction 18 297 UIE instruction 18 299 UIF instruction 78 300 upload 7 606 user application mode status C 482 user fault routine creating a user fault routine 18 294 file number status C 498 major error detected status bit C 492 recoverable and non recoverable faults 18 294 user interrupt disable instruction 18 297 user interrupt enable instruction 18 299 user interrupt flush instruction 78 300 user memory 2 58 user program functionality type status C 505 Index 615 Ww watchdog scan time C 490 write 1 606 X XIC instruction 7 177 XIO instruction 7 177 XOR instruction 12 235 Z zero flag C 487 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 616 Index Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 List of Instructions and Function Files
395. is is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Cas ee OS ea Word 0 pN Jen s not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty e Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load e Position This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 dong word Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 257 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102
396. is read in engineering units then the MINS Setpoint Minimum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value Mins MaxS scaling allows you to work in engineering TIP units The deadband error and SPV are also displayed in engineering units The process variable PV must be within the range of 0 to 16383 Use of MinS MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution Scaled errors greater than 32767 or less than 32768 cannot be represented If the scaled error is greater than 32767 it is represented as 32767 If the scaled error is less than 32768 it is represented as 32768 Old Setpoint Value OSP Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access OSP Old PD10 0 0SP word 32 768 to 32 767 status read only Setpoint Value INT The OSP Old Setpoint Value is substituted for the current setpoint if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling limiting parameters Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 322 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Output Limit OL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access OL Output Limit PD10 0 OL binary 1 enabled control read write 0 disabled An enabled 1 value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD
397. it 15 Word Addressing 0 1 0 Output Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 1 7 3 Input Slot 7 Expansion 1 0 word 3 1 3 1 Input Slot 3 Expansion 1 0 word 1 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 47 1 The optional Data File Number is not shown in these examples 2 A word delimiter and number are not shown Therefore the address refers to word 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 48 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Forcing Input Filtering Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 I O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I O at the user s discretion Input Forcing When an input is forced the value in the input data file is set to a user defined state For discrete inputs you can force an input on or off When an input is forced it no longer reflects the state of the physical input or the input LED For embedded inputs the controller reacts as if the force is applied to the physical input terminal TIP When an input is forced it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller Output Forcing When an output is forced the controller overrides the status of the control program and sets the output to the user defined state Discrete outputs can be forced on or off The value in the output file is unaffected by the force It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program However the state of the phy
398. ithin the folder are four EII elements Each of these elements EII 0 EII 1 EII 2 and EII 3 are identical this explanation uses EII 0 as shown below 7 4 Function Files Ell Jatc eH wm oat TA Lalo HSC PTO STI PFN Program File Number ER Error Code UIX User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending EIE Event Interrupt Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected ES Edge Select S Input Select Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 Each EII can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Sub Elements Summary Event Input Interrupt Function File EII 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT control read only 309 ER Error Code EIl 0 ER word INT status read only 309 UIX User Interrupt Executing EII 0 UIX binary bit status read only 310 UIE User Interrupt Enable EII 0 UIE binary bit control read write 310 UIL User Interrupt Lost EIl 0 UIL binary bit status read write 310 UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only 31
399. ive for States return procedure Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation PLC 5 MicroLogix SLC 500 RSLogix RSLinx and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 62 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1762 RMO01F EN P October 2009 Supersedes Publications 1762 RMO001E EN P October 2003 and 1762 DU002A EN P April 2003 Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
400. je ele eje ojojojojojojojojojo ele ele Mask elelelelele ele eje ojojojojojojojojojojo ojo ele Compare elel elelelje ele eje ojojojojojojojojojojo jo o ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type input Execution Time for the LIM Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 6 4 us 6 1 us long word 14 4 us 13 6 us MicroLogix 1500 word 5 5 us 5 3 us Jlongword 122us ti i d CT st S The LIM instruction is used to test for values within or outside of a specified range The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit Test and High Limit values as shown in the following table LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values Wher in E Low Limit lt High Limit Low Limits Test lt High Limit true Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 202 Compare Instructions LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values When And Rung State Low Limits High Limit Test lt Low Limit or Test gt High Limit false
401. k on the desired data file User Program Transfer Requirements Data File Download Protection only operates when the following conditions are met during a User Program or Memory Module download to the controller e The controller contains protected data files e The program being downloaded has the same number of protected data files as the program currently in the controller e All protected data file numbers types and sizes number of elements currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being downloaded to the controller If all of these conditions are met the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected when a program is downloaded from a memory module or programming software If any of these conditions are not met the entire User Program is transferred to the controller Additionally if the program in the controller contains protected files the Data Protection Lost indicator S 36 10 is set to indicate that protected data has been lost For example a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller The original program did not have protected files or the files did not match The data protection lost indicator S 36 10 is then set The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have had values downloaded and the user application may need to be re configured Static File Protect
402. king Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 DF1 Radio Modem Protocol Protocol Configuration 535 TIP DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used with the following controllers e MicroL
403. l 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Reserved Total Message Packets Received Link Layer Error Code 0 1 2 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 5 15 to 22 l Reserved Function Files 95 Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 9 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 9 and higher Word Bit Description 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 ERR 1 Illegal Function 56 Last Device Reporting ERR 1 57 ERR 2 Illegal Data Address 58 Last Device Reporting ERR 2 59 ERR 3 Illegal Data Value 60 Last Device Reporting ERR 3 61 ERR 4 Slave Device Failure 62 ERR 5 Acknowledge 63 ERR 6 Slave Device Busy 64 ERR 7 Negative Acknowledgement 65 ERR 8 Memory Parity Error 66 Non Standard Response 67 Last Device Reporting ERR 4 to ERR 8 or Non Standard Response 68 and 69 Reserved always 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 96 Function Files Channel Status Channel Status E o x Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Function Files 97 ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Proc
404. l ASCII instruction set use ASCII protocol as described below See on page 558 for the ASCII parameters that you set via the Channel O and Channel 1 for the 1764 LRP configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 String ST Data File ASCII Instructions 353 File Description The string data file is used by the ASCII instructions to store ASCII character data The ASCII data can be accessed by the source and destination operands in the ASCH instructions The string data file can also be used by the copy COP and move MOV MVM instructions String files consist of 42 word elements One string file element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in the string file String Data File Structure String Element Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word upper byte lower byte 0 String Length number of characters range is from 0 to 82 1 character 0 character 1 2 character 2 character 3 40 character 78 character 79 41 character 80 character 81 Addressing String Files The addressing scheme for the string data file is shown below Format Explanation ST String file STf e s f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid elemen
405. l Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC EOT Suppression enabled disabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 534 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Message Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 Poll Timeout 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 3000 x20 ms Poll timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to re queue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero is not used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handsha
406. l error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AHL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 z Address ilesl1 Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level g le Parameter E El l Eri a S S ja j3 S Q a is o F 13 Is le z b lE S o lv jo l jo _ I E i ls i In a JE V Is e l Je o l l la e jz h b h EE EE Eaj FS e is E l l ls Channel AND Mask e e e e e e e e OR Mask e e e e e e e e Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 374 ASCII Instructions ARD ASCII Read Characters ARD ASCII Read L CEN gt Channel 0 Dest ST10 4 cDN gt Control R6 3 String Length 10 lt lt ER gt Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Operation This instruction executes on either a false or true rung However a false to true rung transition is required to set the EN bit to repeat the instruction Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARD Instruction Controller When Instruct
407. l in progress after a new configuration has been sent to the module OCx Open circuit detection bits indicate an open input circuit on channels 0 through 5 OCO through OC5 and on CJC sensors CJCO OC6 and CJC1 OC7 The bit is set 1 when an open circuit condition exists e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CJC sensors U6 and U7 For thermocouple inputs the under range bit is set when a temperature measurement is below the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the under range bit indicates a voltage that is below the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CRC sensors O6 and O7 For thermocouple inputs the over range bit is set when a temperature measurement is above the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the over range bit indicates a voltage that is above the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 40 1 0 Configuration 1769 HSC High Speed Counter Module Output Array The information in the following table is a quick
408. l interface The DAT can read or write to any valid integer file within the controller Valid integer files are N3 through N255 When the DAT reads a valid integer file number it can access the first 48 elements 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Function Files 81 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits words 48 to 50 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the 48 elements The only integer file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TIF location The TIF location can only be changed by a program download Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify IMPORTANT ais in the TIF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the controller s user program The example table below shows a DAT configured to use integer file number 50 DAT 0 TIF 50 Element Data Address Protection Bit Element Data Address Protection Bit Number Number 0 N50 0 N50 48 0 16 N50 16 N50 49 0 32 N50 32 50 50 0 1 N50 1 N50 48 1 17 N50 17 N50 49 1 33 N50 33 50 50 1 2 N50 2 N50 48 2 18 N50 18 N50 49 2 34 N50 34 50 50 2 3 N50 3 N50 48 3 19 N50 19 N50 49 3 35 N50 35 50 50 3 4 N50 4 N50 48 4 20 N50 20 N50 49 4 36 N50 36 50 50 4 5 N50 5 N50 48 5 21 N50 21 N50 49 5 37 N50 37 50 50 5 6 N50 6 N50 48 6 22 N50 22 N50 49 6 38 N50 38 50 50 6 7 N50 7 N50 48 7 23 N5
409. la JE e fe B IE o _ lv lm e lz fu ln S JA EE IG le ES FS e a Elaz fe fe 8 e File e e e e e ele e e Control 2 Length e e Source e e ele e e e o o 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMEOBTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files BSR Bit Shift Right Instruction Type output BSR Bit Shift Right I CEN gt File B3 3 Control R6 0 lt DN gt Execution Time for the BSR Instruction Bit Address 1 0 15 Length 1 lt Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 132 us 1 3 ws word 1 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 07 us word 1 4 us If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted right through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 File Instructions 253 Unload Bit R6 0 10 l 45 44 J43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 38 Bit Array 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 148 B3 2 47 46
410. lave gt 8 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Driver Protocol Configuration 557 The ASCII driver provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 port channel 0 for ASCII driver For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 When configured for ASCII all received data is placed in a buffer To access the data use the ASCII instructions in your ladder program See ASCII Instructions on page 349 for information on using the ASCII instructions You can also send ASCII string data to most attached devices that accept ASCII data characters TIP Only ASCII instructions can be used when a channel is configured for ASCII If you use a Message MSG instruction that references the channel an error occurs The channel configuration screen is shown below Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Channel Driver fasci x Baud 1200 x Parity NONE gt Termination Characters Termination 1 d Termination 2 tf Protocol Control ControlLine NoHandshaking Delete Mode CRI RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 RTS Send Delay x20ms 0 IV Echo M SON XOFR epee cee joa The controller updates changes to the channel configuration at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or
411. lave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit standard polling mode multiple messages per scan or just one time per polling sequence standard polling mode single message per scan depending on how the master is configured The polling algorithm polls all of the priority slave addresses each poll scan priority low to priority high and a subset of the normal slave address range The number of normal slave addresses to poll each poll scan is determined by the Normal Poll Group Size configuration parameter In order to poll all of the slave addresses each poll scan with equal priority you may define the entire slave address range in either the Priority Poll Range or the Normal Poll Range and leave the other range disabled The Polling Range is disabled by defining the low address as 255 An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol in Standard Polling Mode operation is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from the Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 528 Protocol Configuration Channel Configuration E Z master or another slave When the initiating slave is polled the message command is sent to the master If the message is addressed to the master then the master replies to the message If the master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave the master immediately re broadc
412. le If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics Sequencer Instructions 269 The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works Word B10 11 B10 12 B10 13 B10 14 B10 15 sac Mask Source Length Position Sequencer Compare File B10 11 Control R6 21 cen gt DN gt lt m gt Input Word 1 3 0 0010 0100 1001 v Mask Value FFFO 1111 11111 11111 v 0000 Sequencer Ref File B10 11 Step 0 0010 0100 1001 0000 Aa UNa SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 270 Sequencer Instructions This instruction uses the following operands P
413. le Structure MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 user memory is comprised of Data Files Function Files and Program Files and B Ram files for the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Function Files are exclusive to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers they are not available in the MicroLogix 1000 or SLC controllers TIP The file types shown below for data files 3 through 7 are the default filetypes for those file numbers and cannot be changed Data files 9 through 255 can be added to your program to operate as bit timer counter control integer string long word message or PID files Output File High Speed Counter System File 0 Data Log Queue 0 1 Input File Pulse Train Output 1 System File 1 1 Data Log Queue 1 2 Status File Pulse Width 2 Program File 2 2 to 255 Data Log Queues 2 to Modulation 255 3 Bit File Selectable Timed 3 to 255 Program Files 3 to 255 0 Recipe File 0 Interrupt 4 Timer File Event Input Interrupt 1 Recipe File 1 5 Counter File Real Time Clock 2 to 255 Recipe Files 2 to 255 6 Control File Trim Pot Information 7 Integer File Memory Module Information 8 Floating Point File Data Access Tool 9 to 255 B Bit Base Hardware Information T Timer Communications Status C Counter IOS 1 0 Status pis Data Log Status R Control N Integer F Floating Point ST String L Long Word MG Message PD PID PLS Programmable Limit Switch
414. le power Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Fault Messages and Error Codes 515 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex xx8Bl12 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O power Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a POWER SUPPLY supply is configured in the user power supply that is not present CONFIGURATION program but no power supply is Re ile reload th dent MISMATCH ERROR present or a RTE T ean expansion 1 0 power supply e With power removed add the missing is configured in the user program power supply and a power supply is physically present but the types do not match xxgclt2 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O object i e cable Non User e Correct the user program 1 0 OBJECT TYPE power supply or module in the user configuration so that the object types MISMATCH program I O configuration is not the match the actual configuration and same object type as is physically e Re compile reload the program and enter present the Run mode Or e Correct the actual configuration to match the user program O configuration e Cycle power 0x1F39 INVALID STRING The first word of string data contains Recoverable Check the first word of the string data LENGTH a negative zero or value greater element for invalid values and correct the 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module than 82 data
415. length of source if it is a file data type The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 e Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as source if it is a file data type It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 276 Sequencer Instructions SQL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 7 7 3 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode on Parameter E E amp z a os 8 F 3 is E 5 z E o lva j gt 9 jo j a l 3 IE l la lm 9 IE Je Is Je o IE lo Oo v ia E Z jua D a S la amp 2 i E FA a 6 2 a Ela ja 2 S la File e e e e e e e e e Source j o e ele ele Control 3 e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File 3 Control file only ndirect addressing also applies IMPORTANT Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST
416. lex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 548 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Slave Configuration The Modbus configuration screen and configuration procedure are shown below Channel Configuration xj General Channel O Channel 1 Driver Modbus RTU Slave 7 roe Address Baud 19200 7 Parity NONE Modbus Data Table File Numbers Coils 00 10 Input Registers 99 fi 2 Contacts 14 11 Holding Registers 4992 fi 3 JV Expanded Protocol Control Control Line Hal Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshak x InterChar Timeout x1 ms ATS Off Delay x20 ms 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms fo Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo 1 To set up Channel 0 and data files for Modbus communication select the Channel 0 Configuration tab For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 2 Choose Modbus RTU Slave driver and assign driver characteristics 3 Enter Modbus Data Table File Numbers Select the Expansion check box to utilize multiple holding register data files WicroLogix 1200 Series C FRNO and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRN7 and higher only Requires RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher to program TIP The controller default is one data file of 256 registers The Expansion check box enables an additional five files and 1280 holding registers The five additi
417. lololo ololo olololo o olo lolololo olo o lolololololo o Clear Function Files 89 DF1 Full Duplex Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 7 8 Format Code always 1 9 CTS 0 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 4 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD to 15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received 0 1 2 Undelivered Message Packets 3 ENQuiry Packets Sent 4 NAK Packets Received 15 ENQuiryPacketsReceived 6 7 8 9 1 Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed 47 F NoBufferSpaceand NA Ked a i ss lt sCSCis 1 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19t022 Reeva 0 x Channel 0 Channel 1 DF1 Full Duplex Messages Sent Messages Received Undelivered Messages fos Duplicate Messages Received Lack of Memory Sent NAK Received NAK Bad Packet Sent NAK o bD od ENQsReceived 0 ENQsSent 0 b bo D Modem Lines RTS CTS Clear Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 90 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 6 7 8 Format Code always 2 9 CTS RTS Channel 0 Rese
418. low interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan They are e At the start of a ladder rung e Anytime during End of Scan e Between data words in an expansion I O scan The interrupt is only serviced by the controller at these opportunities If the interrupt is disabled the pending bit is set at the next occurrence of one of the three occasions listed above If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction OTL OTE or UIE must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 292 Using Interrupts Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt is scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts are executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine is suspended and the higher priority interrupt is serviced Then the lower priority interrupt is allowed to complete before retu
419. low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 139 HSL High Speed Counter Load Instruction Type output HSL High Speed Counter Load HSC Number HSCO tee pices Na Controller Data Size Execution Time When Rung Is Output High Source N7 2 Output Low Source N7 3 True False MicroLogix 1200 word 46 7 us 0 0 us long word 47 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 39 7 us 0 0 us long word 40 3 us 0 0 us The HSL High Speed Load instruction allows the high and low presets and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter These parameters are described below e Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only High Preset Specifies the value in the high preset register The data ranges for the high preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Low Preset Specifies the value in the low preset register The data ranges for the low preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Cong word Output High Source Specifies the value in the HPO high preset output register
420. lways true or false RTA is set e If RTC Seconds are less than 30 then RTC Seconds is reset to 0 e If RTC Seconds are greater than or equal to 30 then the RTC Minutes are incremented by 1 and RTC Seconds are reset to 0 The following conditions cause the RTA instruction to have no effect on the RTC data e No RTC attached to the controller e RTC is present but disabled e An external via communications message to the RTC is in progress when the RTA instruction is executed External communications to the RTC takes precedence over the RTA instruction To re activate the RTA instruction the RTA rung must become false and then true TIP There is only one internal storage bit allocated in the system for this instruction Do not use more than one RTA instruction in your program Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 TIP Function Files 75 You can also use a MSG instruction to write RTC data from one controller to another to synchronize time To send write RTC data use RTC 0 as the source and the destination This feature not available with the Series A controllers Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 76 Function Files Trim Pot Information Function File Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The composition of the Trim Pot Information TPD Function File is described below Trim Pot Function File Data Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access TPD Data O TPI
421. m 3 Under Support Centers click on Contact Information 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com Chapter 1 Embedded 1 0 1 0 Configuration This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Each controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I O which is physically located on the controller The controller also allows for adding expansion I O This section discusses the following I O functions Embedded I O on page 17 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O on page 19 e MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 20 e MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O on page 28 e MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 31 I O Addressing on page 46 I O Forcing on page 48 Input Filtering on page 48 Latching Inputs on page 49 The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provide discrete I O that is built into the controller as listed in the following table These I O points are referred to as Embedded I O Controller Family Inputs Outputs Quantity Type Quantity Type MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BWA 14 24V de 10 relay Controllers 1762 L24AWA 14 120V ac 10 relay 1762 L24BXB_ 14 24V de 10 5 relay 5 FET 1762 L40BWA 24 24V de 16 relay 1762 L40AWA 24 120V ac 16 relay 1762 L40BXB 24 24V de 16 8 relay 8 FE
422. mable Limit Switch Low Preset Mask LPM Description Address Data Format WSC Modes Type User Program Access LPM Low HSC 0 LPM_ bit 2to 7 control read write Preset Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The LPM Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Low Preset Interrupt LPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access t 2to7 status read write LPI Low HSC 0 LPI b Preset Interrupt 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The LPI Low Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detecte
423. me as long as all of the nodes are within radio range so that they receive each other s transmissions Using Store amp Forward Capability DF1 Radio Modem also supports Store amp Forward capability in order to forward packets between nodes that are outside of radio range of each other Each node that is enabled for Store amp Forward has a user configured Store amp Forward Table to indicate which received packets it should re broadcast based on the packet s source and destination addresses RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 allows you to configure the MicroLogix DF1 IMPORTANT Radio Modem driver but does not allow you to configure the Store amp Forward Table file In order to use the Store amp Forward capability with RSLogix version 6 10 10 you must download a pre configured default ladder file for your particular processor from the MicroLogix web site www ab com micrologix which has a binary file B3 0 15 pre configured for the DF1 Radio Modem Store amp Forward Table file Configuring the Store amp Forward Table The Store amp Forward Table can be configured to use any valid binary data table file B3 B9 through B255 of length 16 words Each bit in the file corresponds to a DF1 Radio Modem node address In order to configure a MicroLogix to Store amp Forward message packets between two other nodes the bits corresponding to the addresses of those two other nodes must be set For instance if node 2 is used to Store a
424. meter E 2 E a o jo S je a p z 3 3 gt z g s3 E a z p 2 is e o e o l la a e lz l b a E a lE 2 E RB Gi E 8 e la le l 2 fd 8 i Operand Bit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO ie PVV STI Ell BHI MIMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 OTE Output Energize B3 lt 1 0 pa Relay Type Bit Instructions 179 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OTE Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 4 us 1 1 us MicroLogix 1500 1 2 us 0 0 us Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 4 OTE instructions are reset turned OFF when e You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored e The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone A bit that is set within a subroutine
425. mote station cannot buffer command Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 442 Communications Instructions Error Code Description of Error Condition BOH PCCC Description Remote station problem due to download COH PCCC Description Cannot execute command due to active IPBs DOH One of the following e No IP address configured for the network e Bad command unsolicited message error e Bad address unsolicited message error e No privilege unsolicited message error D1H Maximum connections used no connections available D2H Invalid internet address or host name D3H No such host Cannot communicate with the name server D4H Connection not completed before user specified timeout D5H Connection timed out by the network D7H Connection refused by destination host D8H Connection was broken DOH Reply not received before user specified timeout DAH No network buffer space available EOH Expansion I O Communication Module Error The error code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 E1H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format a field has an illegal value E2H PCCC Description Illegal Address format not enough fields specified E3H PCCC Description Illegal Address format too many fields specified E4H PCCC Description Illegal Address symbol not found E5H PCCC Description Illegal Addre
426. mp Forward message packets between nodes 1 and 3 then both bits Bx 1 and Bx 3 where x is Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 540 Protocol Configuration the configured data table file number would have to be set in the Store amp Forward Table file see Figure You can set bit 255 to enable Store amp Forward of broadcast packets as well Once Store amp Forward is enabled duplicate packet detection is also IMPORTANT automatically enabled Whenever Store amp Forward is used within a radio modem network every node should have a Store amp Forward Table file configured even if all of the bits in the file are cleared so that duplicate packets will be ignored Applying DF1 Radio Modem Protocol 2nd Rebroadcast Note 4 REPLY 1 Node 4 Node 1 REPLY 1 DST 1 SRC 4 CMD 1 No Bits DST 4 SRC 1 1 3 4 1st Rebroadcast No Bits 2nd Rebroadcast Note 2 Note 1 The link layer of Node 1 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 2 To prevent Node 2 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 2 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received Note 3 The link layer of Node 4 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte e
427. n 20 000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 168 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Error Codes Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 4 No Yes No Accel The accelerate decelerate parameters ADP are Decel Error e less than zero e greater than half the total output pulses to be generated TOP e Accel Decel exceeds limit See page 162 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 5 No No Yes Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set e Enable EN bit set e Jog Pulse JP bit set e Jog Continuous JC bit set This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed 6 No Yes No Jog The jog frequency JF value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error Frequency faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Error 7 No Yes No Length The total output pulses to be generated TOP is less than zero This error Error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Number Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Tein The PWM function can onl
428. n begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become false As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached Timer and Counter Instructions 189 The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer is timed out TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value Is Set When rung conditions are true bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung conditions go true or when the done bit is reset rung conditions are false and accumulated value is less than the preset value bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung conditions are true rung conditions go false RTO Retentive Timer On Delay RTO Retentive Timer On L CEN gt Timer 74 0 Time Base 1 0 lt DN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredicta
429. n channel Always Channel 0 or Channel 1 or Expansion Communications Port for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Communication Command 500CPU 485CIF PLC5 and ECP message types Specifies the type of message Valid types are e 500CPU Read e 500CPU Write e 485CIF Read e 485CIF Write e PLC5 Read e PLC5 Write e CIP Generic Modbus Command Data Table Address Specifies the type of message Valid types are e 01 Read Coil Status e 02 Read Input Status e 03 Read Holding Registers e 04 Read Input Registers e 05 Write Single Coil e 06 Write Single Register e 15 Write Multiple Coils e 16 Write Multiple Registers For a Read this is the starting address which receives data Valid file types are B T C R N and L for Modbus commands B and N only For a Write this is the starting address which is sent to the target device Valid file types are 0 1 B T C R N L STZ and RTCI28 for Modbus commands B and N only Size in elements Defines the length of the message in elements e 1 word elements valid size 1 to 103 e 2 word elements valid size 1 to 51 e 8 word RTC elements valid size 1 e 42 word String elements valid size 1 to 2 e Timer 500CPU and 485CIF Counter and Control elements valid size 1 to 34 e PLC 5 Timer elements valid size 1 to 20 e Modbus bit elements 1 to 1920 e Modbus register elements 1 to 120 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October
430. n error in the Remote MSG parameters 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 16H Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address 17H Local service is not supported 18H Broadcast is not supported 20H PCCC Description Host has a problem and will not communicate 21H Bad MSG file parameter for building message 30H PCCC Description Remote station host is not there disconnected or shutdown 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active 3AH STS in the reply from target is invalid 40H PCCC Description Host could not complete function due to hardware fault 45H MSG reply cannot be processed Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter 50H Target node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected 70H PCCC Description Processor is in Program Mode 80H PCCC Description Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem 81H Modbus Error 1 Illegal Function 82H Modbus Error 2 Illegal Data Address 83H Modbus Error 3 Illegal Data Value 84H Modbus Error 4 Slave Device Failure 85H Modbus Error 5 Acknowledge 86H Modbus Error 6 Slave Device Busy 87H Modbus Error 7 Negative Acknowledge 88H Modbus Error 8 Memory Parity Error 89H Modbus Error Non standard reply Actual code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 90H PCCC Description Re
431. n has corresponding data parameters that are used to set or clear physical outputs on the controller s base unit The PLS data file is illustrated below The PLS Function only operates in tandem with the HSC of a MicroLogix IMPORTANT IMPORTANT 1200 or 1500 To use the PLS function an HSC must first be configured PLS Data File Data files 9 to 255 can be used for PLS operations Each PLS data file can be up to 256 elements long Each element within a PLS file consumes 6 user words of memory The PLS data file is shown below i Data File PLS10 lolx 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 cg PLS10 0 HIP Red z Collins 4 v PLS Operation When the PLS function is enabled and the controller is in the run mode the HSC will count incoming pulses When the count reaches the first preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file the output source data High OHD or Low OLD will be written through the HSC mask At that point the next preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file becomes active Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 142 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch When the HSC counts to that new preset the new output data is written through the HSC mask This process continues until the last element within the PLS file is loaded At that point the active element within the PLS file is reset to zero This behavior is referred to as circular operation
432. n is not in an error state PWM Normal Operation NS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS fbit Oor1 status read only The PWM NS Normal Operation bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state A normal state is defined as ACCEL RUN or DECEL with no PWM errors e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 174 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 PWM Enable Hard Stop EH Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit Oor1 control read write The PWM EH Enable Hard Stop bit stops the PWM sub system immediately A PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub system error e Set 1 Instructs the PWM sub system to stop its output modulation immediately output off 0 e Cleared 0 Normal operation PWM Enable Status ES Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit Oor1 status read only The PWM ES Enable Status is controlled by the PWM sub system
433. nary Oor1 status read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIL SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information Retentive Data Lost MicroLogix 1200 only Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 11 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever retentive data is lost This bit remains set until you clear 0 it The controller validates retentive data at power up If user data is invalid the controller sets the Retentive Data Lost indicator The Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 494 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File data in the controller are the values that were in the program when the program was last transferred to the controller If the Retentive Data Lost bit is set a fault occurs when entering an executing mode but only if the Fault Override bit S 1 8 is not set Processor Battery Low MicroLogix 1500 only Address Data Format Type User Program Access 9 11 binary Oor1 status read only This bit is set 1 when the battery is low IMPORTANT Install a replacement battery immediately See your hardware manual for more information See also RTC Battery Operation on page 7
434. nd MicroLogix Controllers The Free Running Clocks in the SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers function the same but have different resolutions The resolution of the Free Running Clock depends upon which controller you are using e SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 10 ms bit 0 010 seconds bit e MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 100 us bit 0 0001 seconds bit The following table illustrates the differences Free Running Clock Cycle Times all Times are in Seconds Bit SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 _ On Off Time Cycle Time On Off Time Cycle Time 4 0 0 010 0 020 0 0001 0 0002 S 4 1 0 020 0 040 0 0002 0 0004 S 4 2 0 040 0 080 0 0004 0 0008 S 4 3 0 080 0 160 0 0008 0 0160 S 4 4 0 160 0 320 0 0016 0 0320 S 4 5 0 320 0 640 0 0032 0 0640 S 4 6 0 640 1 280 0 0064 0 1280 S 4 7 1 280 2 560 0 0128 0 2560 S 4 8 2 560 5 120 0 0256 0 5120 S 4 9 5 120 10 240 0 0512 0 1024 S 4 10 10 240 20 480 0 1024 0 2048 S 4 11 20 480 40 960 0 2048 0 4096 S 4 12 40 960 81 92 0 4096 0 8192 4 13 81 92 163 84 0 8192 1 6384 S 4 14 163 84 327 68 1 6384 3 2768 S 4 15 327 68 655 36 3 2768 6 5536 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 492 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File For example if bit S 4 7 is monitored in an SLC 500 then that bit will be on for 1 28 seconds and off for 1 28 seconds for a total cycle time of 2 56 secon
435. nd a DH network The SLC 5 04 processor at DH 485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read or write data exchanges with devices on the other network based on each device s capabilities In this example node 12 on DH 485 is a MicroLogix 1500 The MicroLogix 1500 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH network TIP The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests but it cannot initiate them TIP The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5 04 at DH 485 node 17 with an SLC 5 05 processor DH 485 and DH Networks Communications Instructions 435 PanelView e na AGH a m a 0 0000 00000 50 SLC 5 04 PanelVie DH 485 Network AIC Node 12 AIC AlC Node 17 00000 MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 19 SLC 5 04 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 436 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 DeviceNet Network MicroLogix 1000 Ethernet Network DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks The illus
436. nd also allows the HSC Function File control program access to all information pertaining to each of the High Speed Counters TIP If the controller is in the run mode the data within sub element fields may be changing 4 Function Files OF Xx HSC pro sti Jen RTC e mmi oaT tp all LER Error Code UIX User Interrupt Executing L UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled H AS Auto Start ED Eror Detected LCE Counting Enabled LSP Set Parameters H LPM Low Preset Mask l HPM High Preset Mask H UFM Underflow Mask L OFM Overflow Mask LPI Low Preset Interrupt L HPI High Preset Interrupt H UFI Underflow Interrupt L OFI Overflow Interrupt l LPR Low Preset Reached l HPR High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction L UF Underflow l OF Overflow l MD Mode Done L CD Count Down H CU Count Up MOD HSC Mode H ACC Accumulator l HIP High Preset 2147483647 l LOP Low Preset 2147483648 L OVF Overflow 2147483647 H UNF Underflow 2147483648 l OMB Output Mask Bits L HPO High Preset Output L LPO Low Preset Output ooooocooococeoeooce cA0 00000090 O9 OC OF The HSC function along with the PTO and PWM instructions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system process
437. nect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH BWA BXB was selected in the user in the user program or program configuration but did no e Reconfigure the program to match the match the actual base attached hardware 0052 MINIMUM SERIES The hardware minimum series Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified ERROR selected in the user program in the user program or configuration was greater than the e Reconfigure the program to match the series on the actual hardware attached hardware 0070 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expansion I O Non Recoverable e Check the expansion 1 0 terminator on TERMINATOR terminator was removed the last REMOVED 1 0 module Cycl MicroLogix 1500 only i a yx71 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non Recoverable Check connections HARDWARE ERROR _ with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power xx7g EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non Recoverable e Refer to the 1 0 Module Status IOS file MODULE ERROR am Smor e Consult the documentation for your specific 1 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error 0080 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expansion 1 0 Non User e Check expansion 1 0 terminator on last TERMINATOR terminator was removed O module REMOVED e Cycle power MicroLogix 1500 only xxgi EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non User e C
438. neric on the Expansion Comms Port When any of the six standard commands are chosen you can initiate standard messages to destination devices connected to DeviceNet products that support PCCC messaging including MicroLogix and SLC controllers using 1761 NET DNI s 1203 GU6 drive interface and other MicroLogix 1500 controllers using 1769 SDN scanner modules You can initiate reads writes program upload download and online monitoring across DeviceNet This is functionally identical to DH 485 and DH networking CIP stands for Common Industrial Protocol CIP is a newer and more versatile protocol than PCCC It is an open protocol that is supported by newer Allen Bradley controllers and third party products CIP messaging is the native messaging format for DeviceNet All DeviceNet devices are compliant with CIP messaging The MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Series C has an enhanced message instruction that provides simple easy to use CIP messaging Selecting CIP Generic configures the message instruction to communicate with DeviceNet devices that do not support PCCC messaging When CIP Generic is chosen you will notice that a number of message parameters change and many new ones become available depending upon the service selected MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 Expansion Comms Port CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive and Send Communications Instructions 427 This value identifies the data file location within
439. nfigured time interval If you need to restrict when the STI subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and STI subroutine processing resumes STI User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost STI O UIL binary bit status read write The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that indicates an interrupt was lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit Using Interrupts 305 This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 306 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts STI User Interrupt Pending UIP User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine
440. ng expansion I O can be done either manually or automatically Using 1 0 Using RSLogix 500 Rstogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 For manual configuration drag the Compact I O module to the slot For automatic configuration you must have the controller connected online to the computer either directly or over a network Click the Read I O Config button on the I O configuration screen RSLogix 500 will read the existing configuration of the controller s I O Some I O modules support or require configuration To configure a specific module double click on the module an I O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 54 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller memory and the types of files used by the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers The chapter is organized as follows Controller Memory on page 56 Data Files on page 62 Protecting Data Files During Download on page 63 Static File Protection on page 65 Password Protection on page 66 Clearing the Controller Memory on page 67 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 68 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 56 Controller Memory and File Types Controller Memory Fi
441. ngineering Units 7 Scaled for PID x Word 2 ie al pWod3 mae I Enable E Hz z I Enable ore z Input Range Input Range fac to 10 VOC 7 Data Format The following paragraphs discuss e Input Output Ranges e Scaling to Engineering Units e Zero crossing Deadband e Output Alarms e Output Limiting with Anti reset Windup e The Manual Mode e Feed Forward ATTENTION injury A Input Output Ranges Do not alter the state of any PID control block value unless you fully understand its function and how it will affect your process Unexpected operation could result with possible equipment damage and or personal The input module measuring the process variable PV must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383 If this value is less than 0 bit 15 set then a value of zero is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set bit 12 of word 0 in the control block If the process variable is greater than 16383 bit 14 set then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set Process Control Instruction 339 The Control Variable calculated by the PID instruction has the same range of 0 to 16383 The Control Output word 16 of the control block has the range of 0 to 100 You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction s calculated output values where an upper limit of 100 corresponds to a Control Variable limit of 16383 Publication 1762 R
442. nitoring alarming and logging purposes and to precondition MSG instructions to each particular slave This second use is based on the supposition that if a slave station did not respond the last time it was polled it may not be able to receive and respond to a MSG instruction now and so it would most likely process the maximum number of retries and time outs before completing in error This slows down both the poll scan and any other messaging going on Using this technique the minimum time to message to every responding slave station actually decreases as the number of slave stations that can t respond increases IMPORTANT In order to remotely monitor and program the slave stations over the half duplex network while the master station is configured for Standard polling mode the programming computer DF1 slave driver typically Rockwell Software RSLinx station address must be included in the master station poll list About Polled Report by Exception Polled report by exception lets a slave station initiate data transfer to its master station freeing the master station from having to constantly read blocks of data from each slave station to determine if any slave input or data changes have occurred Instead through user programming the slave station monitors its own inputs for a change of state or data which triggers a block of data to be written to the master station when the master station polls the slave Protocol Confi
443. nt to the remote device to pause the transmission Then when the receive buffer drops to less than 80 full an XON character is sent to the remote device to resume the transmission Disabled RTS Off Delay x20 ms Allows you to select the delay between when a transmission is ended and when RTS is dropped Specify the RTS Off Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 RTS Send Delay x20 ms Allows you to select the delay between when RTS is raised and the transmission is initiated Specify the RTS Send Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO Appendix F Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following Quick Start topics are included 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO on page 559 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM on page 563 17586 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC on page 565 17605 Quick Start Message MSG on page 570 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STD on page 574 17655 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC on page 577 17657 Quick Start Trim Pots on page 580 17712 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID on page 583 18689 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers on page 585 18728 Quick Start Data Logging DLG on page 588 NOTE The PWM function is only available when using
444. ntegral Derivative PID PID PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PID Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 295 8 us 11 0 us MicroLogix 1500 251 8 us 8 9 us It is recommended that you place the PID instruction on a rung without any conditional logic If conditional logic exists the Control Variable output remains at its last value and the CVP CV term and integral term are both cleared when the rung is false TIP In order to stop and restart the PID instruction you need to create a false to true rung transition The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software 0047 B3 0 PID 4E PID 0 PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen When programming the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parameters The illustration below shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Input Parameters Tuning Parameters Controller Gain Ke oo Reset Ti Rate Td Loop Update Control Mode PID Control Time Mode stl Limit Output CY Deadband 0 Feed Forward Bias 0 Process Control Instruction 319 Inputs Scaled Set Point SPS 0__ Setpoint MAX Smax 0 Setpoint MIN Smin fo Process Variable PY fo
445. nterrupt your program based on 1289 defined events Process Control PID The process control instruction provides closed loop control 315 ASCII ABL ACB ACI ACL ACN AEX AHL AIC ARD ARL ASC ASR AWA AWT The ASCII instructions 349 convert and write ASCII strings They cannot be used with MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors Communications MSG SVC The communication instructions read or write data to another station 385 Recipe RCP The recipe instruction allows you to transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of 445 MicroLogix 1500 only user specified data table elements Data Logging DLG The data logging instruction allow you to capture time stamped and date stamped data 445 1 The RTA Real Time Cloc Adjust Instruction appears on page 74 following the Real Time Clock Function File information Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 102 Programming Instructions Overview Using the Instruction Descriptions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Throughout this manual each instruction or group of similar instructions has a table similar to the one shown below This table provides information for all sub elements or components of an instruction or group of instructions This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub element of an instruction or group of instructions in a data file or function file The definitions o
446. ntifies the recipe database e Number of Recipes This is the number of recipes contained in the RCP file This can never be more than 256 This is the Recipe Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program e Name This is a descriptive name for the RCP file Do not exceed 20 characters e Description This is the file description optional e Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files This allows you to designate a memory location for your RCP files e User Program You can allocate User Program ladder logic memory for recipe operations Once User Program memory is assigned for recipe use it cannot be used for ladder logic User Program memory can be changed back from recipe operations to TP ladder logic IMPORTANT ae Program memory is used for recipe data the usage is as 1K words of User Program memory 5K words of recipe data memory Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 448 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Like your ladder logic the recipe data stored in User Program memory can be saved to the controller s memory module 1764 MM1 MM2 MMIRTC MM2RTC e Data Log Queue For 1764 LRP processors you can store recipe data in the data log memory space 48K bytes While recipe data stored in User Program memory can be saved to the IMPORTANT i controller s memory module recipe data stored in Data Log Queu
447. ntrol status read CVP Control Variable Percent displays the control variable as a percentage The range is 0 to 100 If the PD10 0 AM bit is off automatic mode CVP tracks the control variable CV output being calculated by the PID equation If the PD10 0 AM bit is on manual mode CVP tracks the value that can be manipulated in the Control Variable CV data word Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Process Control Instruction 325 The only way for a programmer to have control of the PID CV is to place the PID instruction in manual mode and write to the CV word via the control program or programming software If no change is made to CV while in manual mode the CVP will display the last value calculated by the PID equation Scaled Process Variable SPV Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only The SPV Scaled Process Variable is the analog input variable If scaling is enabled the range is the minimum scaled value MinS to maximum scaled value MaxS If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units then this parameter corresponds to the value of the process variable in engineering units See Analog I O Scaling on page 337 for more information on scaling Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 326 Process Control In
448. ntrol program changes the output waveform Typical values and output waveform e DC 1000 100 Output ON constant no waveform e DC 750 75 Output ON 25 output OFF e DC 500 50 Output ON 50 output OFF e DC 250 25 Output ON 75 output OFF e DC 0 0 Output OFF constant no waveform PWM Duty Cycle Status DCS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status fread only The PWM DCS Duty Cycle Status provides feedback from the PWM sub system The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 176 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Accel Decel Delay ADD Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write PWM ADD Accel Decel Delay defines the amount of time in 10 millisecond intervals to ramp from zero to the specified frequency or duration Also specifies the time to ramp down to zero The PWM ADD value is loaded and activated immediately whenever the PWM instruction is scanned on a true rung of logic This allows multiple steps or stages of acceleration or deceleration to occur P
449. nue The Data Logging utility is the only supported method for retrieving data that has been stored in the processor 1 Install the DLOG utility found at http www ab com plclogic micrologix 2 Execute DLCA1764 EXE 3 Configure Port Baud Rate and DF1 Node as shown below a Data Log Monitor lol x MicroLogix Data Log Capture Application Copyright 2000 Rockwell Automation Released Version 3 0 0 1 Settings for ML1500 LRP Processor Pott Baud Rate DF1 Node comt 19200 fi Connect Quit 4 Click Connect FYI By default the MicroLogix 1500 communications are configured for 19200 baud If using defaults select 19200 above otherwise select the baud rate configured in the MicroLogix Channel Configuration Screen If a correct configuration has been selected the utility software will indicate that it has connected to the processor as shown below El Connected to DATA_LOG 5 xi Connected to DATA_LOG i Read Status Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 592 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 5 Click Read Status once a valid connection is established The DLOG utility will now retrieve the status information from the ML1500 processor Queue Allocated Recorded Disconnect Read Status Read Log In this example you can see that Que 0 has 100 records allocated and 5 recorded IMPORTANT If you do not see 5 records verify your Data Logging Enable
450. o 7 High preset is greater than overflow Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 114 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 115 Function Enabled FE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access FE Function HSC 0 FE bi Enabled 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 t Oto7 control read write The FE Function Enabled is a status control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled and that interrupts generated by the HSC are processed based on their priority This bit can be controlled by the user program or is automatically set by the HSC sub system if auto start is enabled See also Priority of User Interrupts on page 292 Auto Start AS Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS lbi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 t Oto7 control read only The AS Auto Start is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC function automatically starts whenever the controller enters any run or test mode The CE Counting Enabled bit must also be set to enable
451. o a command the ML1200 1500 initiated 4 Outgoing Any outgoing MSG s Communications and or responses to incoming request for data The Outgoing queue also supports unlimited queuing This means that even if a buffer is not available the MSG will simply wait until one of the outgoing buffers becomes available and then transmit NOTE If a message has been waiting in the queue at the moment of buffer availability the most current data will be sent not the data that was available at the time the message instruction was first scanned true How quickly a message is actually sent or received to by a destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channels communication protocol baud rate of the communications port number of retries destination devices readiness to receive ladder logic scan time etc Definition of the Message MSG instruction The message instruction MSG is an output instruction which when configured correctly allows data to be sent or received to other compatible devices The MSG instruction in the MicroLogix 1200 1500 controller uses a Data File MG to process the message instruction All message elements are accessed using the MG prefix example MSG done bit MG11 0 DN Continuous Message Example The following example illustrates how by using the MSG Done DN and Error ER bits to unlatch the Enable EN bit the MSG instruction can be configured for continuous execution Knowl
452. oLogix 1200 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time ps Address Form Operand Time ps 0 1 5 8 B3 1 6 8 0 0 15 0 B3 1 7 6 0 15 1 B 1 1 25 9 B3 5 8 BI 26 2 B 1 24 3 L8 2 6 5 B 24 5 L 1 2 24 6 L8 6 1 L 2 25 3 L 1 24 4 L8 1 6 8 LEIT 24 3 L8 7 1 TA 6 0 LE 1 26 0 TH 24 0 LALA 25 9 TELE 24 2 T4 DN 6 6 T4 ACC 6 5 T 1 DN 24 4 T 1 ACC 24 4 TI DN 24 9 T ACC 24 9 T4 ACC 2 7 4 0 1 2 6 3 T 1 ACC 2 24 4 0 0 2 15 2 T ACC 2 25 9 0 2 15 9 T4 1 6 5 0 1 0 6 8 TA 8 3 0 1 7 6 TH 26 1 0 0 1 16 6 THA 26 8 OLIV 16 9 T4 1 ACC 6 9 B3 2 6 3 T4 ACC 8 9 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 468 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1200 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time ps Address Form Operand Time ps B 1 2 24 5 T 1 ACC 26 1 B 2 25 3 TI ACC 27 3 Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using and Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressing e Source A N7 e Source B T4 ACC e Destination N ADD Instruction Times e ADD Instructi
453. oLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet et predicate Robo ack paces B 477 Appendix C Status File Overview orto seid xd ee Weta RS C 480 Status File Details o Bek REY Red Ee he OR Ree C 481 Appendix D Identifying Controller Faults t4 5 0 4 644 29 G63 Oe 8 Siegen D 507 Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance D 516 Table of Contents 13 Appendix E Protocol Configuration DH 485 Communication Protocol 000405 E 518 DF1 Full Duplex Protocol ces ayaa eee eae Ke So E 522 DE Hale Duplex Protocol 26 4 woe Ssh ss eS e es E 523 DF1 Radio Modem Protocol 0 000000000 E 535 Modbus RTU Protocol pies ance y ae RG ng eGtobae tA E 544 ASCH Driver vs ek 2 Oe RSs ES OTE Be Re eee E 557 Appendix F Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO F 559 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM F 563 17586 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC F 50605 17605 Quick Start Message MSG as Kuta eae hee F 570 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STD F 574 17655 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC F 577 17657 Quick Start Trim Pots o o ouaaa aaaea F 580 17712 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID F 583 18689 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers F 585 18728 Quick Start Data Logging DLG F 588 Glossary Index MicroLogix 1200 and 150
454. ode STI Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 0 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIP SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information STI Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 1 binary Oor1 control read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 TIE SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information STI Executing Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 2 binary Oor1 control read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIX SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 for more information Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File 489 Memory Module Program Compare Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 9 binary Oor1 control read only When this bit is s
455. odulation PWM Number By toggling Bit B3 0 the PWM can be activated Note Once activated the PWM will continue to generate a waveform until B3 0 is toggled OFF or the PWM 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 565 17586 Quick Start High General Information Speed Counter HSC The MicroLogix 1200 has one 20Khz high speed counter The counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from all other inputs on the unit The HSC can utilize inputs 0 through 3 Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected The MicroLogix 1200 uses a 32 bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of 2 147 483 647 The MicroLogix 1500 has two 20Khz high speed counters Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from all other inputs on the base unit HSC 0 can utilize inputs 0 through 3 and HSC 1 can utilize inputs 4 through 7 Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected Each counter is completely independent and isolated from the other The MicroLogix 1500 uses a 32 bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of 2 147 483 647 Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 and select the HSC tab then select the next to HSC 0 See Below HSC pto PwM stl Jen PRTC DAT TP MMI i Address E HSC 0 H PFN Program File Numb
456. of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off So to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you can monitor the Done DN Idle AD or Normal Operation NO status bits M eE I a Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC ry A Start of PTO Start of PTO Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 152 Using High Speed Outputs Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation NO Standard Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a maintained type of input This means that it enables the PTO instruction Normal Operation NO and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instruction completes its operation With this type of logic status bit behavior is as follows The Done DN bit becomes true 1 when the PTO completes and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false The false rung logic re activates the PTO instruction To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output monitor the done DN bit Stage a e a e e Loo Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS at i _ Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN
457. of the output profile PTO Run Status RS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit Oor1 status read only The PTO RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The RS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PTO Accelerating Status AS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit Oor 1 status read only The PTO AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 157 e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PTO Ramp Profile RP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit Oor1 control read write The PTO RP Ramp Profile bit controls how th
458. og continuous or jog pulse and generates a PTO sub system error The EH bit operates as follows Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 159 e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to stop generating pulses immediately output off 0 e Cleared 0 Normal operation PTO Enable Status EN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EN Enable Status PTO 0 EN bi follows rung state t Oor 1 status read only The PTO EN Enable Status is controlled by the PTO sub system When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation the enable status bit resets 0 The EN bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO is enabled e Cleared 0 PTO has completed or the rung preceding the PTO is false PTO Output Frequency OF Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 10 to 20 000 control read write The PTO OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the d
459. ogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only This driver implements a protocol optimized for use with radio modem networks that is a hybrid between DF1 Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex protocols and is not compatible with either protocol The primary advantage of using DF1 Radio Modem protocol for radio modem networks is in transmission efficiency Each read write transaction command and reply requires only one transmission by the initiator to send the command and one transmission by the responder to return the reply This minimizes the number of times the radios need to key up to transmit which maximizes radio life and minimizes radio power consumption It also maximizes communication throughput In contrast DF1 Half Duplex protocol requires five transmissions for the DF1 Master to complete a read write transaction with a DF1 Slave three by the master and two by the slave The DF1 Radio Modem driver should only be used among devices that IMPORTANT support and are configured for the DF1 Radio Modem protocol As of the release of this firmware no other devices besides the MicroLogix 1200 with FRN7 the MicroLogix 1500 with FRN8 and SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors with Series C FRN6 or higher support DF1 Radio Modem protocol Like DF1 Full Duplex protocol DF1 Radio Modem allows any node to initiate to any other node at any
460. ogram and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit High Preset Interrupt HPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access t Oto7 status read write HPI High HSC 0 HPI bi Preset Interrupt 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The HPI High Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes e Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 123 High Preset Reached HPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPR High HSC 0 HPR bi Preset Reached t 2to7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The HPR High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by t
461. ogram contains an Non User e Modify the program so that all INSTRUCTION instruction s that is not supported instructions are supported by the DETECTED by the controller controller e Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 512 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0032 Q0 SOC SOL A sequencer instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA position parameter references length and position parameters do not FILE SPACE outside of the entire data file space point outside data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL The length position parameter ofa Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the LFU CROSSED DATA _ BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU length and position parameters do not FILE SPACE instruction references outside of the point outside of the data space entire data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE VALUE IN A negative value was loaded toa Recoverable e f the program is moving values to the TIMER PRESET OR timer preset or accumulator accumulated or preset word of a timer ACCUMULATOR make certain these values are not negative e Reload the program and enter the Run mode 0035 ILLEGAL The
462. oint F Long Word L String ST 218 Real Time Clock RTC 2 4 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 Series C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 3 4 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only A85CIF write ST to 485CIF only 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Only Bit B and Integer N file types are valid for Modbus Command messages Modbus bit commands require a starting bit address for the Data Table Address TIP Size in Elements This variable defines the amount of data Gin elements to exchange with the target device The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words 120 words for Modbus commands and is determined by the destination data type The destination data type is defined by the type of message read or write Communications Instructions 413 e For Read Messages When a read message is used the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor TIP Input output string and RTC file types are not valid for read messages e For Write Messages When a write message is used the destination file is the data file in the target processor The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the following table You cannot cross file types when s
463. ollow Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 425 This Controller Parameters Channel The 1764 LRP supports three different pathways for messaging channels 0 and 1 are RS 232 ports and are functionally identical to MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP controllers The 1764 LRP also supports backplane communications through the Expansion Communication Port ECP as illustrated below 0 Integral Read 1 Integral Expansion Comms Port 5 0 0 Local When ECP is chosen you are able to select which slot position 1 to 16 the scanner resides in The 1764 LRP processor can support up to two 1769 SDN scanner modules with full messaging functionality MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 Expansion Comms Port You can use multiple 1769 SDN scanner modules in a 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 system but you can only message through the first two A scanner physically positioned after the first two can only be used for I O scanning Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 426 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 CIP Generic Communication Command MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 H 500CPU Read E 500CPU Read S00CPU Write 485CIF Read 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLCS Write CIP Generic The 1764 LRP processor supports the six standard types of communications commands same as all other MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers and CIP Ge
464. olute Value Controller Source N7 0 Us MicroLogix 1200 Dest N7 1 0 lt MicroLogix 1500 When Rung Is True False 3 8 us 0 0 us 3 1 us 0 0 us The ABS instruction takes the absolute value of the Source and places it in the Destination The data range for this instruction is 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 or IEEE 754 floating point value Source and Destination do not have to be the same data type However if the signed result does not fit in Destination the following will occur ABS Result Does Not Fit in Destination When Both Operands Are Integers e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in the Destination e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the result is stored in the Destination When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e The ABS instruction clears the sign bit No operation is performed on the remaining bits e If Destination is an integer and Source is NAN or infinity a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored The following table
465. on ACK Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments 50 x20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master will wait for an acknowledgement to a message it has transmitted before it retries the message or errors out the message instruction This timeout value is also used for the poll response timeout Reply MSG Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments only with MSG based Polling Modes 1 x 20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master will wait after receiving an ACK to a master initiated MSG before polling the slave station for its reply Priority Polling Select the last slave station address to priority poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Priority Polling Select the first slave station address to priority poll Entering 255 disables priority polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Polling Select the last slave station address to normal poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Normal Polling Select the first slave station address to normal poll Entering 255 disables normal polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Poll Group Enter the quantity of active stations located in the normal poll range that you want polled during a 0 Size scan through the normal poll range before returning to the priority poll range If no stations are configured in the Priority Polling Range leave this parameter at 0 Publication 17
466. on 2 7 ps e Source A 5 8 us e Source B 6 5 us e Destination 24 5 Us Total 36 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 us 5 8 us 6 7 us True case e XIC 0 9 us 5 8 us 6 7 us False case MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 469 MicroLogix 1200 Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet i below Scan Time Worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion I O is used 55 us Expansion Input Words X 10 us or X 14 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 80 ps Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 30 us Expansion Output Words X 3 us or X 7 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1470 us Typical Case 530 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 200 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode Ous Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1762 RTC or 1762 MMI1RIC 100 us Housekeeping Overhead 270 us System Overhead Sub Total To
467. on in the MANUAL mode then place the processor in the RUN mode 6 While monitoring the PID display adjust the process manually by writing to the CO percent value 7 When you feel that you have the process under control manually place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode Q0 Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time 9 When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below the setpoint in an even manner record the time of 1 cycle That is obtain the natural period of the process Natural Period 4x deadtime Record the gain value Return to the MANUAL mode stop the process if necessary Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 10 11 12 13 14 15 Process Control Instruction 345 Set the loop update time and STI time interval if applicable to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period For example if the cycle time is 20 seconds and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate set the loop update time to 200 which would result in a 2 second rate Set the gain K value to 1 2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the process For example if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80 set the gain to 40 Set the reset term T to approximate the natural period If the natural period is 20 seconds as in our example you would set the reset term to 3 0 3 minutes per repeat
468. on procedure step illustration feature is provided on example guideline other explanation definition Technical Accuracy 1 Ze 9 Can we be more accurate all provided information is correct text illustration Clarity 1 2 3 How can we make things clearer all provided information is easy to understand Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form Your Name Your Title Function Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments Location Phone ___No there is no need to contact me Yes please call me Yes please email me at Yes please contact me via Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124 9705 Fax 440 646 3525 Email RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Publication CIG CO521C EN P May 2003 PN957782 91 PLEASE FASTEN HERE DO NOT STAPLE Other Comments PLEASE FOLD HERE NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE Allen Bradley RELIANCE FREER DOGE il Rockwell Automation PLEASE REMOVE 621 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to Suppo rt assist you in using its products At http support rockwellautomation com you can find technical manuals
469. onal tables do not need to be individually defined but sequentially follow the first integer or bit file For example if the first file is N10 or B10 then the additional five files will be N11 or B11 N12 or B12 N13 or B13 N14 or B14 and N15 or B15 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration 549 4 Enter the data table size and type for each required file The data table file s not including the five additional tables if Expanded is checked will be created automatically Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 550 Protocol Configuration When the system driver is Modbus RTU Slave the following communication port parameters can be changed Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher Processors only Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher Channel 0 and 1 1 LRP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 and 1 Driver Modbus RTU Slave Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even odd none Node Address 1 to 247 decimal 1 Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking Inter character 0 to 6553 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times 0 Timeout x1 ms Specifies the minimum delay betwe
470. onding or an invalid request of a DCM BT block transfer F7H PCCC Description The adapter is not able to communicate with a module F8H PCCC Description The 1771 module response was not valid size checksum etc F9H PCCC Description Duplicated Label Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 443 Error Code Description of Error Condition FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files FCH PCCC Description Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible off line only FDH PCCC Description Disk file is being used by another application update not performed off line only FFH Local communication channel is shut down TIP For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction e Codes EO to EF represent EXT STS codes 0 to F e Codes FO to FC represent EXT STS codes 10 to 1C Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 444 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only Chapter 22 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only This chapter describes how to use the Recipe and Data Logging functions Instr
471. onfigured for any of the DF1 communication drivers Select 0 for the channel number that is configured for DF1 or 1 for channel 1 on the 1764 LRP only and Yes for both the Receive and Transmit Buffers When the ACL instruction is executed any pending outgoing DF1 replies any pending incoming DF1 commands and any pending outgoing DF1 commands are flushed Any MSG instructions in progress on that channel will error out with an error code of Ox0C This instruction executes immediately upon the rung transitioning to a true state Any ASCII transmissions in progress are terminated when the ACL instruction executes TIP The ASCII queue may contain up to 16 instructions that are waiting to run Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 e Receive Buffer clears the Receive buffer when set to Yes and removes the Receive ASCII port control instructions ARL and ARD from the ASCII queue e Transmit Buffer clears the Transmit buffer when set to Yes and removes the Transmit ASCII port control instructions AWA and AWT from the ASCII queue Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 357 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used
472. onstant or an address The source data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 358 ASCII Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AIC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files ina Address Level 2 Parameter s S E S 1a S lw z L__eECERE LE gt 5 in jo l jo _ l E le a le le e IL Is o v lo elz h bh EEEE Ea Els k le 2 is 5 le Source e o e o e e o e o Destination AWA ASCII Write with Append Instruction Type output AWA _ ASCII Write Append CEN gt Channel ane eae se Poe Execution Time for the AWA Instruction String Length 12 lt ER gt i Carci Sent 0 Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12 us character 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 236 us 10 6 us character 12 5 us Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Use the AWA instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device This instruction adds the two appended characters that you configure on the Channel Configuration screen The default is a carriage return and line feed appended to the end of
473. onsumes 10 bytes So if only one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 4915 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 48K bytes 10 bytes 48 1024 10 4915 records Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 455 Configuring Data Log Data Logging is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software version V4 00 00 or later Queues 1 Open a 1764 LRP application The first step in using Data Logging is to configure the data log queue s Access to this function is provided via the RSLogix 500 Project tree EXAMPLE RESET DLG Me Eg E Help E Controler Program Files Double click G Data Files Configuration to 5p Data Logging access Data Log E Configuration Configuration E Status G Force Files E Custom Data Monitors 0 Database n H 2 The Data Log Que window appears Double click on Data Log Configuration Data Log Que Configuration x z Appearance of Data Data Log Configuration ppa a Log Que Configuration window before creating a queue 3 The Data Log Que dialog box appears as shown below Use this dialog box to enter the queue information Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 456 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Recip
474. oop Do not place the REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 288 Input and Output Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 18 Using Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and the interrupt function files The chapter is arranged as follows e Information About Using Interrupts on page 290 e User Interrupt Instructions on page 295 e Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 301 e Using the Event Input Interrupt EID Function File on page 308 See also Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 109 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 290 Using Interrupts Information About Using The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of Interrupts the User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt e When can the controller operation be interrupted e Priority of User Interrupts e Interrupt Latency e User Fault Routine What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended The Micrologix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support the follo
475. oose scaling Output Alarms You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and or below a selected output percent When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit in the PID instruction Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm CVH and lower alarm CVL Alarm values are specified as a percentage of the output If you do not want alarms enter zero and 100 respectively for lower and upper alarm values and ignore the alarm bits Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 342 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Output Limiting with Anti Reset Windup You may set an output limit percent of output on the control variable When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100 if you choose not to limit Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit bit OL and entering an upp
476. opics include e identifying controller faults e contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault Override at Power Up bit S 1 8 is set in the status file You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN every time the controller is power cycled This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller If the controller faults it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine To accomplish this set the following bits in the status file e 2 1 8 Fault Override at Power up e 2 1 12 Mode Behavior If the fault condition still exists after cycling power the controller re enters the fault mode For more information on status bits see System Status File on page 479 TIP You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults are FFOO to FFOF Publication 1762 RMO001F EN
477. or This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 111 The HSC is extremely versatile the user can select or configure each HSC for any one of eight 8 modes of operation Operating Modes are discussed later in this chapter See section HSC Mode MOD on page 128 Some of the enhanced capabilities of the High Speed Counters are e 20 kHz operation e High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 e Programmable High and Low presets and Overflow and Underflow setpoints e Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count e Run time editable parameters from the user control program The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram Overflow 2 147 483 647 maximum High Preset Low Preset Underflow Y 2 147 483 648 minimum Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 112 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter Each HSC is comprised of 36 sub elements These sub elements are either Function File bit word or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC function or provide HSC status information for use within the Sub Elements Summary control program Each of the sub elements and thei
478. or a number greater than 82 13 0x0D The requested length in the Control field is invalid Enter a valid length and retry operation either a negative number or a number greater than 82 14 0x0E Execution of an ACL instruction caused this None required instruction to abort 15 0x0F Communications channel configuration was changed None required while instruction was in progress Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 384 ASCII Instructions ASCII Character Set The table below lists the decimal hexadecimal octal and ASCII conversions Standard ASCII Character Set Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Ctrl DEC HEX OCT ASC DEC HEX OCT JASC IDEC HEX JOCT JASC DEC HEX JOCT IASC A 00 00 000 INUL 32 20 040 ISP 64 40 100 96 60 140 N AA 01 01 001 SOH 133 21 041 65 41 101 A 97 61 141 a AB 02 02 002 STX 134 22 042 l 66 42 102 B 98 62 142 b AC 03 03 003 ETX 35 23 043 Ol 67 43 03 IC 99 63 43 Ic AD 04 04 004 JEOT 136 24 044 68 44 04 ID 00 164 44 id AE 05 05 005 ENQ 137 25 045 69 45 05 JE 01 65 45 Ie AF 06 06 006 JACK 138 26 046 J amp 70 46 06 IF 02 J66 46 If AG 07 07 007 BEL 139 27 0477 71 47 07 JG 03 67 47 lg AH 08 08 010 BS 40 28 050 72 48 0 JH 04 68 50 Jh 09 09 011 HT 41 29 051 73 49 1 05 169 51 i AJ 10 0A 012 LF 42 2A 052 74 4A 2 W 06 J6A 52 j AK 11 0B 013 IVT 43 2B 053 75 4B 113 IK 07 6B 53 k AL 2 OC 014 IFF 44 2C 054 76 4C 114 IL 08 16C 54 I AM 3 0D
479. or the best result i e RSTune Rockwell Software catalog number 9323 1003D Procedure 1 Create your ladder program Make certain that you have properly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 344 Process Control Instruction 2 Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules Download your program to the processor Leave the processor in the program mode Ensure that all possibilities of machine motion have been considered with ATTENTION respect to personal safety and equipment damage It is possible that your output CV may swing between 0 and 100 while tuning TIP If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and or determine the initial loop update time of your system go to the procedure on page 345 3 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Ty of 0 a gain K of 1 and a loop update of 5 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm Maxs Mins scaling feed forward 4 Get prepared to chart the CV PV analog input or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value 5 Place the PID instructi
480. ord 246 SCL Scale 215 CTD Count Down 192 SCP Scale with Parameters 216 CTU Count Up 192 SQC Sequencer Compare 268 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 220 SQL Sequencer Load 274 DIV Divide 211 SQ0 Sequencer Output 271 DLG Data Log Instruction 457 SOR Square Root 218 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 221 STS Selectable Timed Start 296 END Program End 281 SUB Subtract 210 EQU Equal 197 SUS Suspend 280 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load 255 SWP Swap 266 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 258 TND Temporary End 280 FLL Fill File 249 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 226 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 222 TOF Timer Off Delay 188 GCD Gray Code 229 TON Timer On Delay 188 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To 199 UID User Interrupt Disable 297 GRT Greater Than 198 UIE User Interrupt Enable 299 HSL High Speed Counter Load 139 UIF User Interrupt Flush 300 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 283 XIC Examine if Closed 177 INT Interrupt Subroutine 295 XIO Examine if Open 177 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 285 XOR Exclusive OR 235 JMP Jump to Label 277 Function File Description Page JSR Jump to Subroutine 278 BHI Base Hardware Information 83 LBL Label 278 CS Communications Status 84 LEQ Less Than or Equal To 199 DAT Data Access Tool Information 80 LES Less Than 198 Ell Event Input Interrupt 308 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 261 HSC High Speed Counter 110 LFU Last In Firs
481. ord of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 272 Sequencer Instructions Word B10 1 B10 2 B10 3 B10 4 B10 5 If the position is equal to zero at start up when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode the instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan e If the rung is true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If the rung is false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It is fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It is variable if you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works Sao Sequencer Output L CEN gt File B10 1 Mask OFOF lt DN gt Dest 014 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Destination 0 14 0 External Outputs 0 14 at Step 2 15 87 0 00 0000 0101 0000 1010 01 g 0N 02 Mask Value OFOF 03 k ON 15 87 0 04 0000 1111 0000 1111 05 06 Se
482. organized into the following sections e DH 485 Communication Protocol on page 518 e DF1 Full Duplex Protocol on page 522 e DF1 Half Duplex Protocol on page 523 e DF1 Radio Modem Protocol on page 535 e Modbus RTU Protocol on page 544 e ASCII Driver on page 557 See your controller s User Manual for information about required network devices and accessories Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 518 Protocol Configuration DH 485 Communication Protocol Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It also helps you plan and operate the controller on a DH 485 network DH 485 Network Description The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers e interconnection of 32 devices e multi master capability e token passing access control e the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network e maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All ini
483. ot supported or improperly formatted the controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave will respond with one of the exception codes listed in below Modbus Error Codes Returned by Modbus RTU Slave MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Error Error Description Transmitted Code Exception Code 0 No error none 1 Function Code cannot Broadcast The function does not support Broadcast nothing transmitted 2 Function Code not supported The controller does not support this Modbus function or 1 subfunction 3 Bad Command Length The Modbus Command is the wrong size 3 4 Bad Length The function attempted to read write past the end of a data file 3 5 Bad parameter The function cannot be executed with these parameters 1 6 Bad File Type The file number being referenced is not the proper file type 2 7 Bad File Number The file number does not exist 2 8 Bad Modbus Address The function attempted to access an invalid Modbus address 13 9 Table Write protected The function attempted to write to a read only file 3 10 File Access Denied Access to this file is not granted 2 11 File Already Owned Data file is already owned by another process 2 1 If Modbus Command is sent with a valid Broadcast address then no exception reply will be sent for Error Codes 2 through 11 2 See on page 551 for valid Modbus memory mapping Modbus Error Codes in Modbus
484. our control program maximum rung time See MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 463 or MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 471 for more information 2 Multiply the maximum rung time by the Communications Multiplier corresponding to your configuration in the MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet on page 469 or MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet on page 477 Evaluate your results as follows Controller If the time calculated in step 2 is Then the Interrupt Latency is MicroLogix 1200 fless than 133 us 411 us greater than 133 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 278 us MicroLogix 1500 fless than 100 us 360 us greater than 100 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 260 us Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 294 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a controller shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or non recoverable user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults Faults are classified as recoverable non recoverable and non user faults A complete list of faults is shown in Fault Messages and Error Codes on page 507 The basic types of faults are described below Recoverable Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and may be recovered from by execu
485. ource B MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter and are described later in this chapter Both sources cannot be immediate values The valid data ranges for these instructions are 32768 to 32767 word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table EQU NEO GRT LES GEQ and LEQ Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files Address Address unction Files S Model Level PS 3 Parameter z HE E ES z a gje 67 fls leslie ol lS olaje 2 lz Elz sla a A E Sisielsle o _ lol ele EIB a lSlale SEB S S S El le alflal Elal Sla Source A elelelelelele ele ejojojojojojojo ojojo o ele ele Source B eljelelel elele ele e elelelelelelel ele eljelje e ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units N The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor ow See Important note about indirect addressing The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only ol Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LE
486. page 331 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Process Control Instruction 331 Automatic Manual AM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM _ binary bit Oor1 control read write The auto manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When off 0 it specifies automatic operation When on 1 it specifies manual operation In automatic operation the instruction controls the control variable CV In manual operation the user control program controls the CV During tuning set this bit to manual TIP Output limiting is also applied when in manual Control Mode CM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range _ Type User Program Descriptions Access CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM_ binary bit Oor1 control read write Control mode or forward reverse acting toggles the values E SP PV and E PV SP Forward acting E PV SP causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint Reverse acting E SP PV causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint PV in Deadband DB Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the
487. pare instruction 15 268 sequencer instructions 15 267 sequencer load instruction 15 274 sequencer output instruction 15 271 service communications instruction 27 387 sign flag C 482 sinking 1 605 SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Active stations monitoring 532 Channel Status 537 sourcing 1 606 SQC instruction 15 268 SOL instruction 15 274 SQO instruction 15 271 SOR instruction 10 278 square root instruction 10 278 startup protection fault bit C 484 static file protection 2 65 Station addresses defining F 527 Station list viewing 532 status 7 606 status file C 479 STI enabled bit C 488 executing bit C 488 file number status C 499 function file 18 301 lost status bit C 493 mode status C 488 pending status bit C 488 Quick Start example F 574 set point status C 499 string data file 20 353 STS instruction 18 296 SUB instruction 10 210 subroutine label instruction 76 279 subtract instruction 10 210 SUS instruction 16 280 suspend code status C 496 suspend file status C 496 suspend instruction 16 280 SVC instruction 27 387 swap instruction 14 266 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 SWP instruction 14 266 T target bit file 3 80 3 82 target integer file 3 80 temporary end instruction 76 280 terminal 1 606 throughput 1 606 timer accuracy 8 187 timer and counter instructions 8 785 timer files 8 185 timer off delay instruction 8 188 timer on delay instruction 8 788 timing diagrams ASCII 20 381 AWA and AWT instruct
488. pe User Program Access MD Mode HSC 0 MD lbi Done t Oor1 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The MD Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Count Down CD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2to7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The CD Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CD bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CD bit is cleared 0 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 128 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Count Up CU Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CU Count Up HSC 0 CU_ bi t Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The CU Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CU bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CU bit is cleared 0 HSC Mode MOD Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT control read only
489. pend appended AWT ASCII Write Write a string 361 ABL Test Buffer for Line Determine the number of characters in the buffer up MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or 365 to and including the end of line character later ACB Number of Characters Determine the total number of characters in the e MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or 366 in Buffer buffer later ACI String to Integer Convert a string to an integer value 367 ACN String Concatenate Link two strings into one 369 AEX String Extract Extract a portion of a string to create a new string 370 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Set or reset modem handshake lines 372 ARD ASCII Read Characters Read characters from the input buffer and place them 374 into a string ARL ASCII Read Line Read one line of characters from the input buffer and 375 place them into a string ASC String Search Search a string 378 ASR ASCII String Compare Compare two strings 379 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 350 ASCII Instructions Instruction Types and Operation Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 There are two types of ASCII instructions ASCII string control and ASCII port control The string control instruction type is used for manipulating data and executes immediately The port control instruction type is used for transmitting data and makes use of the ASCII queue More details are provided below ASCII String Control These instructions are used to
490. pose file consisting of 16 bit signed integer data words Floating Point F 8 9 to 255 1 The Floating Point File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit File IEEE 754 floating point data elements See Using the Floating Point F Data File on page 206 for more information String File ST 9 to 255 42 The String File is a file that stores ASCII characters See String ST Data File on page 353 for more information Long Word File L 9 to 255 2 The Long Word File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit signed integer data words Message File MG 9 to 255 25 The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 385 for information on the MSG instruction Programmable PLS 9 to 255 6 The Programmable Limit Switch PLS File allows you to configure the Limit Switch File High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS or rotary cam switch See Programmable Limit Switch PLS File on page 141 for information PID File PD 9 to 255 23 The PID File is associated with the PID instruction See Process Control Instruction on page 315 for more information 1 File Number in BOLD is the default Additional data files of that type can be configured using the remaining numbers Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Protecting Data Files During Download Controller Memory and File Types 63 Data File Download Protection Once a user program is in the controller there may
491. process variable is within the zero crossing deadband range Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 332 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 PLC 5 Gain Range RG Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit OQor1 control jread write When set 1 the reset TD and gain range enhancement bit RG causes the reset minute repeat value and the gain multiplier KC to be divided by a factor of 10 That means a reset multiplier of 0 01 and a gain multiplier of 0 01 When clear 0 this bit allows the reset minutes repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0 1 and a gain multiplier of 0 1 Example with the RG bit set The reset term TD of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 01 minutes repeat 0 6 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 01 and applied to the PID algorithm Example with the RG bit clear The reset term TI of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 1 minutes repeat 6 0 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 1 and applied to the PID algorithm TIP The rate multiplier TD is not affected by this selection Setpoint Scaling SC Tuning
492. processing This bit must be set 1 if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist e Low preset reached e High preset reached e Overflow condition count up through the overflow value e Underflow condition count down through the underflow value If this bit is cleared 0 the HSC sub system does not automatically scan the HSC subroutine This bit can be controlled from the user program using the OTE UIE or UID instructions If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE ATTENTION a this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung User Interrupt Executing UIX Description Address Data HSC Modes Type User Program Format Access UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions e Low preset reached e High preset reached e Overflow condition count up through the overflow value e Underflow condition count down through the underflow value Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 119 The HSC UIX bit can be used in the con
493. program contains a Temporary Non Recoverable e Correct the program INSTRUCTION IN End TND Refresh REF or Service Re ile reload th deni INTERRUPT FILE Communication instruction in an j aime pe ee o re interrupt subroutine STI Ell HSC or user fault routine 0036 INVALID PID An invalid value is being used fora Recoverable See page 315 Process Control Instruction for PARAMETER PID instruction parameter more information about the PID instruction 0037 HSC ERROR An error occurred in the HSC Recoverable See the Error Code in the HSC Function File configuration for the specific error 003B PTO ERROR An error occurred in the PTO Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PTO Function File for instruction configuration Non User the specific error 003C PWM ERROR An error occurred in the PWM Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PWM Function File instruction configuration Non User for the specific error 003D INVALID SEQUENCER A sequencer instruction SOO SOC Recoverable Correct the user program then re compile LENGTH POSITION SQL length position parameter is reload the program and enter the Run mode greater than 255 003E INVALID BIT SHIFT OR A BSR or BSL instruction length Recoverable Correct the user program or allocate more LIFO FIFO parameter is greater than 2048 or an data file space using the memory map then PARAMETER FFU FFL LFU LFL instruction length reload and Run parameter is greater than 128 word file or
494. pt To load data into the high preset the control program must do one of the following e Toggle Cow to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system e Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 139 The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSC 0 OVF parameter or an HSC error is generated Low Preset LOP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT control read write The LOP Low Preset is the lower setpoint Gin counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the low preset the control program must do one of the following e Toggle Cow to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 135 e Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 139 The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSC 0 UNF parameter or an HSC e
495. pts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To enable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to enable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIE instruction For example to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 300 UIF User Interrupt Using Interrupts Flush Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 UIF User Interrupt Flush Interrupt Types If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE ATTENTION i this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last A instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UIF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 12 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 6 us 0 0 us The UIF instruction is used to flush remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their cor
496. put Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Words 4 and 5 provide sensor channel status feedback The input data file for each configuration is shown below Word 15 7 0 Bit 0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Reserved 0C3 OC2 OC1 OCO Reserved s3 S2 S1 ISO UO 100 U1 101 U2 02 U3 103 Reserved Ey j N o The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for input channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range open circuit or input data not valid condition exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program See the MicroLogix 1200 RTD Resistance Input Module User Manual publication number 1762 UM003 for details OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs Short circuit detection for RTD inputs only Short circuit detection for resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number e Ox Over range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 using RTD inputs only These bits can be used in the control program for e
497. qual to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 4 To prevent Node 3 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 3 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view the store amp forward table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the DF1 Master channel Example Store amp Forward Table Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Double click on the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen Protocol Configuration 541 a Data File 2 STATUS Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 Debug Errors Protection Men 4 gt DF1 Radio Modem Store And Forward Table fSyelyelvelfelyelye Soyoyotols oyolololol Syoywoyolo ys ode 0 2 4 6 3 0 2 4 6 9 12 16 19 22 i i Properties 16 lo lololo olololo lololo o olololo Radix Structured Help zax DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status for DF1 Radio Modem Z chonnestorus E A Project a o a Hep Contruter i Controller Properties Q Processor Status Function Files HUO Configuration tg WE channel Contiguration 2 Gy
498. quencer Output File B10 1 07 Step 08 g ON 0000 0000 0000 10000 0 09 1010 0010 1111 10101 11 10 kW ON 1111 10101 0100 1010 2 Current Step 11 0101 10101 10101 10101 13 12 0000 1111 0000 11111 J4 13 14 15 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Sequencer Instructions 273 This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and stored in the destination TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask value When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through to destination When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to destination The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF word or 0 to OXFFFFFFFF long word TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Destination The destination operand is the sequencer location or file e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is
499. r e Upgrade the OS to be compatible with memory module e Obtain a new memory module 0007 0008 0009 MEMORY MODULE TRANSFER ERROR FATAL INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR FATAL INTERNAL HARDWARE ERROR Failure during memory module transfer An unexpected software error occurred An unexpected hardware error occurred Non User Non User Non User Re attempt the transfer If the error persists replace the memory module e Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists e Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 000A OS MISSING OR CORRUPT The operating system required for the user program is corrupt or missing Non User e Download a new OS using ControlFlash e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 000B BASE HARDWARE FAULT The base hardware faulted or is incompatible with the O
500. r Determines the queue to be read 0 to 255 Sub Element Number Always set to zero 0 Equation Record Field 1 Record Field 2 Record Field 3 Record Field 7 Formatted String Length Record Field Sizes Data Type Maximum Size Word 7 bytes characters Long Word 12 bytes characters Date Field 11 bytes characters Time Field 9 bytes characters TIP The formatted string length cannot exceed 80 bytes in length TIP The last byte will be a zero value representing the terminator character Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 462 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Reply Structure Controller Responds with Reply RC oT eNOS e OTT Field Function Description SRC Source Node DST Destination Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes DATA Formatted string Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 If the data integrity check fails the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of OxFO and ext STS of OxOE For more information on writing a DF1 protocol refer to Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual available from www theautomationbookstore com IMPORTANT The data in the retrieval file can only be read once Then it is erased from the processor The following con
501. r Logic on page 403 for examples using the message instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Communications Instructions 403 MSG Instruction Ladder Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation Logic The message instruction is enabled during the initial processor program scan and each time the message completes For example when the DN or ER bit is set MSG 0000 Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen Message Done Bit Message Enable Bit MG11 0 MG11 0 0001 JE u gt DN EN Message Error Bit MG11 0 J IE ER 0002 CEND gt 4 Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input This is an example of controlling when the message instruction operates Input I 1 0 could be any user supplied bit to control when messages are sent Whenever I 1 0 is set and message MG11 0 is not enabled the message instruction on rung 0001 is enabled Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 404 Communications Instructions User Supplied Message Input Enable Bit I 1 MG11 0 B3 0 0000 E A A gt 0 EN 0 The message instruction is enabled with each false to true transition of bit B3 0 0 B3 0 MSG ht 0001 J E Read Write Message CEN gt MSG File MG11 0 cDN gt Setup Screen CER gt Message Done Bit MG11 0 B3 0 0002 E CU DN 0 Message Error Bit MG11 0 ile fl ie ER 0003 CEND gt Publication 1762
502. r each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 3 correspond to output terminals 0 through 3 bits 4 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0A8 1769 OB8 1769 OW8 and 1769 OW8 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 X X X X X X X X r w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Word r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0A16 1769 0B16 1769 OB16P 1769 0V16 and 1769 OW16 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 34 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 E Output Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0
503. r information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 381 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 139 7 us 50 1 us character 11 7ps MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 1114 us 44 3 us character 10 6us Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 376 ASCII Instructions Use the ARL instruction to read characters from the buffer up to and including the Termination characters and store them in a string The Termination characters are specified via the Channel Configuration screen Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 17064 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 e Destination is the string element where you want the string stored e Control is the control data file See page 354 e String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters are read and moved to the destination A length of 0 defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 377 e Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffe
504. r r r r r r r r r r read only 1762 1032T Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to input terminals 0 31 z Bit Position h5 j4 j3 12 J1 ho 9 8 7 e 5 4 B 2 M Jo 0 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read only 1762 0X6l Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to output terminals 0 through 5 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration 21 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w gt Word o oo ao ol A oo N r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 OA8 1762 0B8 and 1762 OW8 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 0B16 and 1762 OW16 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminal
505. r respective functions are described in this chapter A summary of the sub elements is provided in the following table All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address DataFormat HSC Function User Program For More Modes Access Information PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN word INT Oto 7 control fread only 13 ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT Oto7 status read only 13 UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit Oto7 status read only 18 UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bit Oto7 control read write 118 UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit Oto7 status read write 119 UIP User Interrupt Pending HSC 0 UIP bit Oto 7 status read only 119 FE Function Enabled HSC 0 FE bit Oto7 control read write 115 AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit Oto7 control fread only 115 ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit Oto7 status read only 115 CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit Oto7 control read write 117 SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bit Oto7 control read write 117 LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM bit 2to7 control read write 120 HPM High Preset Mask HSC 0 HPM bit Oto7 control read write 122 UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 2to7 control read write 123 OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 0FM bit Oto7 control read write 126
506. r to the string 0 to 82 This field is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Parameter Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Address Jacll i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level N g z E E S z lg g 5 k 1 1 o 2 z l oO of e R 2 l l j ka lm 9 JE g Is Je o Je e je a e E aq ja in B wu lo io S la le a lo m a S la F 6 2 a E 6 la IS a e e e e e e e e Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable N bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit U is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer all characters Gncluding the Termination characters are moved to the destination s
507. r1 control read write 166 EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit Oor 1 control read write 158 EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN bit Oor1 status read only 159 ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only 167 OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write 159 OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz PTO 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only 160 JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write 165 TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to control read write 160 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 0PP long word 0 to status read only 160 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word see p 162 control read write 162 32 bit INT CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit Oor1 control read write 163 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using High Speed Outputs 155 PTO Output OUT Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OUT Output PTO 0 0UT word INT 20r3 control fread only The PTO OUT Output variable defines the output 00 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PTO instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program e When OUT 2 PTO pulses output 2 00 0 0 2 of the embedded outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762
508. rand to be used For example relay type instructions CXIC XIO etc must be programmed to the bit level timer instructions TON TOF etc must be programmed to the element level timers have 3 words per element and math instructions ADD SUB etc must be programmed to the word or long word level Programming Instructions Overview 103 Addressing Modes The MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support three types of data addressing e Immediate e Direct e Indirect The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing Indexed addressing can be duplicated with indirect addressing See Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing on page 107 How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed and the type of elements specified within the operands of the instruction By supporting these three addressing methods the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 allow incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated Each of the addressing modes are described below Immediate Addressing Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions For example You require a 10 second timer so you program a timer with a 1 second time base and a preset value of 10 The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing Direct Addressing When you use direct addressing you define a specific data location within the controller
509. raph Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1762 RN001 to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features See Firmware Upgrades on page 5 for details Enhanced features are added to the controllers through a firmware upgrade This firmware upgrade is not required except to allow you access to the latest features To use the newest features be sure your controller s firmware is at the following level Programmable Firmware Revision Catalog Numbers Controller MicroLogix 1200 Series C Revision H FRN12 1762 L24AWA L24BWA L24BXB L40AWA L40BWA and L40BXB controllers MicroLogix 1500 Series C Revision D FRN9 1764 LSP LRP processors To upgrade the firmware for a MicroLogix controller visit the MicroLogix web site at http www ab com micrologix To use all of the latest features RSLogix 500 programming software must be version 6 10 10 or higher The table below lists pages of this manual where new information appears For This New Information See Page Added 1762 10321 digital input module 20 Added 1762 OX6l digital output module 20 Added 1762 1762 0V32T 1762 0B32T digital output module 21 Added 1762 OF4 analog output module 24 Added 1769 I016F and 1769 1032 digital input modules 31 Added 1769 OB8 and
510. rate a single pulse The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle e Jog continuous not active e Enable not active The JP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate a single Jog Pulse e Cleared 0 Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub system PTO Jog Pulse Status JPS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit Oor1 status read only The PTO JPS Qog Pulse Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse The JPS bit operates as follows Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 166 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state TIP The output jog pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared O off PTO Jog Continuous JC Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit Oor 1 control read write The PTO JC Jog Continuous bit instructs the PTO s
511. ration When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit N is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The Done bit DN is set on completion of the instruction The controller determines the number of characters in the buffer and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no characters were found The Found bit FD is set when the POS filed is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACI Instruction Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 SeriesB word SS dC GS 72 us character OOps FRN 3 or later longword 24 6 us 11 6 us character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B 14 2 us 6 3 us character 0 0 us FRN 4 or later Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer word or long word value Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 368 ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source The contents of this location are converted to an integer value e Destination This is the location which receives the result of the conversion The data range is from 32 768 to 32 767 if the destination is a word and from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 if the
512. ration counts must be entered before the PTO is enabled If the four long elements are not properly identified the controller will return a 3 error in the PTO function file when going to run Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 162 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 ADP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADP Accel Decel PTO 0 ADP long word 32 bit see below control read write Pulses INT The PTO ADP Accel Decel Pulses defines how many of the total pulses TOP variable will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components The ADP will determine the acceleration and deceleration rate from 0 to the PTO Output Frequency OF The PTO Output Frequency OF defines the operating frequency in pulses second during the run portion of the profile When entering the ADP parameters the PTO will generate an Accel Decel Error if one of the following conditions occur e The total pulses for the acceleration and deceleration phases is less than 0 e The total pulses for the acceleration and deceleration phases is greater than the total output pulses to be generated TOP Acceleration and deceleration values can either be identical ADI 0 or a unique value for each ADI 1 In the example below e TOP total output pulses 12 000 e ADP accelerate decelerate pulses 6 000 This is the maximum ADP valu
513. rded as 00 00 0000 and the time as 00 00 00 4 After entering all the information for the data log queue click on OK The queue is added to the Data Log Que window with a corresponding queue number This is the queue number to use in the DLG instruction DLG Data Log Instruction DLG Data Log queue number 0 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix Instruction Type output Execution Time for the DLG Instruction 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 457 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP 67 5 us 11 8 us date stamp 6 7 us 12 4 us time stamp 9 1 us word logged 16 2 us long word logged IMPORTANT You must configure a data log queue before programming a DLG instruction into your ladder program The DLG instruction triggers the saving of a record The DLG instruction has one operand Queue Number Specifies which data log queue captures a record The DLG instruction only captures data on a false to true rung transition The DLG rung must be reset scanned false before it will capture data again Never place the DLG instruction alone on a rung It should always have preceding logic as shown below DLG Data Log queue number Publicat ion 1762 RMO01F EN P October 2009 458 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Data Log Status File Publication 1762 RMO001
514. re amp Forward nodes Protocol Configuration 543 3 Do the radio modems handle full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance If so and the answer to 2 is yes as well then you can take full advantage of the peer to peer message initiation capability in every node i e the ladder logic in any node can trigger a MSG instruction to any other node at any time If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to a single master node whose transmission can be received by every other node 4 Can I take advantage of the SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 channel to channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500 running on a PC connected to a local SLC processor via DH or Ethernet Yes with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem network Refer to the SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication number 1747 RMO001 for more passthru details and limitations when using the DF1 Radio Modem driver Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 544 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Protocol Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 This section shows the configuration parameters for Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit transmission mode protocol For more information about the Modbus RTU protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specification available from http www modbus org T
515. re in radio range nodes This is the starting address for the Store amp Forward Table Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking Half Duplex Modem with DCD No Handshaking Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS DCD Wait Delay 0 to 255 1 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode W
516. rent When a mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches have a small current flow when they are in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating must be less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan online When a device is scanning controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives a signal or command from the controller output scan The controller turns on off or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 604 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU proce
517. responding flush bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To flush interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to flush 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt Using Interrupts 301 4 Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 7 4 Function Files lolx Function File Hsc pro Sti en rtc eH MMi oatT tri all PFN Program File Number H ER Error Code H UIX User Interrupt Executing H UIE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled HAS Auto Start LED Error Detected L SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts ooooococo comn Th
518. riptions Access UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit OQor1 status read write The control variable upper limit alarm bit is set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 334 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 CV Lower Limit Alarm LL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set 1 when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit Setpoint Out Of Range SP Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the setpoint e exceeds the maximum scaled value or e is less than the minimum scaled value PV Out Of Range PV Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit Oor 1 status read write The process variable out of range bit is set 1 when the unscaled process variable e exceeds 16 383 or e is less than zero Done DN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program D
519. rl codes Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 2 1 Messaging Overview Communications Instructions This chapter contains information about the Message MSG and Service Communications SVC communication instructions This chapter provides information on e Messaging Overview on page 385 e SVC Service Communications on page 387 e MSG Message on page 391 e The Message Element on page 392 e Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction on page 399 e MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on page 403 e Local Messages on page 405 e Configuring a Local Message on page 407 e Local Messaging Examples on page 417 e Remote Messages on page 434 e Configuring a Remote Message on page 437 e MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 441 The communication instructions read or write data to another station Instruction Used To Page SVC Interrupt the program scan to execute the service communications part 387 of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction MSG Transfer data from one device to another 391 The communication architecture is comprised of three primary components e Ladder Scan e Communications Buffers e Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller For a message to transmit it must be scanned on a true rung of logic When scanned the message and the data defined within the message if it is
520. rmat Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only 303 ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only 303 UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 304 UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write 304 UIL User Interrupt Lost STI 0 UIL binary bit status read write 304 UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 306 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI O TIE binary bit control read write 306 AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only 306 ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only 307 SPM Set Point Msec STI 0 SPM word INT control read write 307 STI Function File Sub Elements STI Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when the timed interrupt times out A valid subroutine file is any program file G to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point STI Error Code ER Sub Element Description Addre
521. rmation about how the MSG instruction Start ST Bit works with DF1 Radio Modem and Modbus RTU Master 399 protocols In the Configuring a Local Message section added message configuration information regarding communications modules 408 to 417 1769 SDN and 1769 SM1 and protocols Modbus Radio Modem In the Local Messaging Examples section added information about configuring a Modbus RTU message type 417 In 2nd paragraph changed CIP stands for Control amp Information Protocol to CIP stands for Common Industrial Protocol 426 In the Local Messaging Examples section added Example 5 Configuring a Modbus Message 432 Added Modbus Error Codes to the list of MSG instruction error codes 441 Added Expansion 1 0 Communication Module Error to the list of MSG instruction error codes 442 Added section about S 4 Free Running Clock Comparison for SLC 500 and MicroLogix Controllers 491 Added Notes to RTC status addresses that the status value does not update while viewing online with RSLogix 500 The 501 value needs to be monitored in the RTC function file Added Error Codes 0042 invalid recipe number and 0044 invlaid write to RTC function file 512 Added DF1 Radio Modem to list of supported protocols 517 Added section describing DH 485 Broadcast Messages 519 Revised section on DF1 Half Duplex Protocol to add DF1 Half Duplex Master protocol information and information on 523 Broadcast Messages Added new section DF1 Radio Modem Protocol
522. rning to normal processing If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine continues to completion Then the lower priority interrupt runs before returning to normal processing The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 1 High Speed Counter Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 2 Event Interrupt 3 High Speed Counter Interrupt 1 MicroLogix 1500 only Selectable Timed Interrupt lowest priority Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Interrupt Latency Using Interrupts 293 Interrupt Latency is defined as the worst case amount of time elapsed from when an interrupt occurs to when the interrupt subroutine starts to execute The tables below show the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating cycle Program Scan Activity When an Interrupt Can Occur Input Scan Between word updates Ladder Scan Start of Rung Output Scan Between word updates Communications Service Anytime 2 Housekeeping Anytime 1 Communications Services includes 80 us to get into a subroutine 2 Communication Service includes 60 us for a ime tick To determine the interrupt latency 1 First determine the execution time for the longest executing rung in y
523. roLogix 1500 14 3 us 0 0 us The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 i 7 p Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level D Mode N E l Parameter gs g T lo S S a je Qa 2 o 1 ja ls e 9 z S S o jo io le gt la la IE S E le E o g Z 72 E aziz ia e Z 3 5 S o w o e 2 ja S la e b b ma S e 3 S a JE aE al 8 a Source e e e e e e e e Destination ejojo jojoj o 2 1 See Important note abo t indirect addressing 2 See TOD Instruction Destination Operand below IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files TOD Instruction Destination Operand The destination can be either a word address or math register The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 e 9999 if the destination is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the destination is the math register allowing a 5 d
524. rol Instruction Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Setpoint SPS Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS_ word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS The SPS Setpoint is the desired control point of the process variable Process Variable PV Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV Process user defined word INT Oto 16383 control read write Variable The PV Process Variable is the analog input variable Setpoint MAX MAXS Input Address Data Range Type User Parameter Format Program Descriptions Access MAXS Setpoint PD10 0 MAXS word 32 768 to 32 767 control read write Maximum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MAXS Setpoint Maximum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its maximum value Process Control Instruction 321 Setpoint MIN MINS InputParameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access MINS Setpoint PD10 0 MINS word 32 768 to 32 767 control read write Minimum INT If the SPV
525. rom in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 383 for error code descriptions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 364 ASCII Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AWT Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files ina Address Level a sS 3 Parameter 2 E o g 3 n S je oc a ae S 7B ls lS 2 l8 oO g ia jo le jo l _ l S e le Is a la E le 3 52 o la la e z ua amp Ef E 2 Elala ES El S la E l a S Sl Channel Source e e Control e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Example I AWT J E ASCII WRITE CEN 10 Channel 0 Source ST37 20 on Control R6 23 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set write 40 characters from String Length 40 eR ST37 20 to the display device Characters Sent 0 Error 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable N bit is set When the
526. rror detection Under range detection for direct resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number 1 0 Configuration 27 1762 1T4 Thermocouple Module Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs The input data file is shown below Word 15 14 7 0 Bit 0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 A 1 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Z 2 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Z 3 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Z 4 Reserved OC4 OC3 OC2 OC1 OCO Reserved S4 S3 S82 S1 SO 5 UO 100 jU1 01 U2 102 U3 03 U4 04 Reserved The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 SO through S3 and the CJC sensor S4 This bit is set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program Refer to the MicroLogix 1200 I O Thermocouple mV Input Module User Manual publication number 1762 UMO002 for additional details e OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 OCO through OC3 and the CJC sensor OC4 e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 O0 through O3 and the CJC sensor O04 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 U0 through U3 and the CJC sensor U4 Th
527. rror is generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value Overflow OVF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT control read write The OVF Overflow defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated When the overflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value and the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the overflow variable the control program must toggle dow to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Underflow UNF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT control read write The UNF
528. rs support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected When the system driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Full Duplex Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Source ID Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Full Duplex modem no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Embedded Responses auto detect enabled auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled enabled ACK Timeout
529. rt the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost TIP If the math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed four digits be sure to clear word S 14 before executing the FRD instruction If 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value is placed in the destination word Conversion Instructions 225 Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below l1 MOV MOVE eau N72 p 0001 0010 0011 0100 4660 Dest 13 4660 A CLR CLEAR Dest S 14 0 FRD FROM BCD S 13 and S 14 are Source a a splayed in BCD format Dest N7 0 1234 F 0000 0100 1101 0010 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N7 2 into the math register Status word S 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 226 Conversion Instructions TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD Instruction Type output TOD ToBCD Source N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the TOD Instructions Dest N7 1 0000h lt Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 17 2 us 0 0 us Mic
530. rtical Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 Dy i i Expansion Slot 2 Expansion Slot 5 Ja Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 30 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 0 Configuration Horizontal Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 1D 4 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 a fal a Expansion Expansion TIP In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 46 for complete information on address formats Expansion Power Supplies and Cables To use a MicroLogix 1500 controller with a 1769 Expansion I O Power Supply verify that you have the following e MicroLogix 1500 Processor Catalog Number 1764 LSP FRN 3 and higher Catalog Number 1764 LRP FRN 4 and higher e Operating System Version You can check the FRN by looking at word 8 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File IMPORTANT If your processor is at an ol
531. rved Channel 1 DCD 0 1 2 Reserved 3 4to15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets Message Packets Retried NAK Packets Received 1 Bad Message Packets Received No Buffer Space 1 Duplicate Message Packets Received 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 to 22 Reserved eathannel Status T DF1 Half Duplex Slave Messages Received Undelivered Messages Polls Received MessagesSent 0 si Messages Retried 9 od oid Duplicate Messages Received oid ReceivedNAK oO Bad Packets Received Lack of Memory Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD E Clear Function Files 91 DF1 Half Duplex Master Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 3 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 Message Packets Retried 14 Reserved 15 Polls Sent 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 Last
532. s User Program Access read write When set 1 the major error code S 6 represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error System Status File 493 Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 8 binary Oor1 status read write When this bit is set 1 by the controller it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to S 1 10 Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program or S 1 11 Load Memory Module Always being set in an attached memory module user program This bit is not cleared 0 by the controller Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan using bit S 1 15 on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power up occurred This information is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S 1 10 or bit S 1 11 set Memory Module Password Mismatch Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 binary Oor1 status read write At power up if Load Always is set and the controller and memory module passwords do not match the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit is set 1 SeePassword Protection on page 66 for more information STI Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 10 bi
533. s are placed in the status file S 7 and S 8 The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from 32768 to 32767 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TND Instruction Controller WhenRungls True False MicroLogix 1200 0 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program On a true rung TND stops the processor from scanning the rest of the program file In addition this instruction performs the output scan input scan and housekeeping aspects of the processor scan cycle prior to resuming scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine it terminates execution of all nested subroutines END Program End C END gt MCR Master Control Reset C MCR gt Program Control Instructions 281 Instruction Type output The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program For the main program file file 2 this instruction ends the program scan For a subroutine interrupt or user fault file the END instruction causes a return from subroutine Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MCR Instructions Controller Instruction When Rung Is
534. s 0 through 15 Bit Position BRT PP Py PPPPPE a tt ee ew we r w read and write 1762 OV32T 1762 0B32T Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to output terminals 0 31 Bit Position 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 r w r w ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w gt Word r w r w ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w r w read and write Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 22 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Analog 1 0 Configuration The following table shows the data ranges for 0 to 10V dc and 4 to 20 mA Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range Raw Proportional Data Scaled for PID 0 to 10V de 10 5V de 32760 16380 0 0V de 0 0 Ato 20 mA 21 0 mA 32760 16380 20 0 mA 31200 15600 4 0 mA 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 1762 IF20F2 Input Data File For each input module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for each configuration is shown below Raw Proportional Format it Position 15
535. s Instructions 399 Start ST Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ST Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Start Bit ST is set when the processor receives acknowledgment ACK from the target device The ST bit is cleared when the DN ER or TO bit is set The DF1 Radio Modem and Modbus RTU Master protocols do not have acknowledgements When the channel that the MSG instruction is being initiated on is configured for either of these two drivers the Start Bit ST is set when the message has been successfully transmitted The following section describes the timing diagram for a message instruction 3 Target node 5 Target node processes packet 1 Rung goes true receives packet successfully and returns data read or acknowledges receipt write 1 2 3 Ji EN EW ST DN ER TO 1 If there is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung becomes true and the MSG is scanned the EN and EW bits for this message are set If this is a MSG write instruction the source data is transferred to the message buffer at this time Not shown in the diagram If the four message buffers are in use the message request is put in the message queue and only the EN bit is set The message queue works on a first in first out basis that allows the controller to remember the order in which the message Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 400 Communica
536. s of all instructions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 29 us Expansion Output Words X 2 us or X 6 5 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1100 us Typical Case 400 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 150 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode Ous Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 0 Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 1 Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1764 RTC 1764 MM1RITC or MM2RTC 80 us Add this number if your system includes a 1764 DAT 530 us Housekeeping Overhead 240 us 240 System Overhead Sub Total Totals Sum of all Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Time Tick Multiplier X1 02 Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K 2 4K 1 2K 600 300 Inactive Protocol DF1 Full Duplex 1 39 1 20 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 00 DF1 Half Duplex 1 18 1 12 1 09 1 08 1 07 1 07 1 06 1 06 1 01
537. s place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LA Load Always on page 79 Power Up Mode Behavior Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 12 binary Oor1 control read only If Power Up Mode Behavior is clear 0 Last State the mode at power up is dependent upon the e position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 e mode at the previous power down If Power Up Mode Behavior is set 1 Run the mode at power up is dependent upon the e position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 If you want the controller to power up and enter the Run mode regardless IMPORTANT l as ae of any previous fault conditions you must also set the Fault Override bit S 1 8 so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 486 System Status File The following table shows the Power Up Mode under various conditions MicroLogix 1200 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Halted Mode Behavior Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t
538. s set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit LL is set If CV is below the minimum value the output is not overridden and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 324 Process Control Instruction Output Parameters The table below shows the output parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write 324 CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 to 100 control read write 324 SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only 325 Control Variable CV Range Type User Program Access control read write Output Parameter Address Data Descriptions Format CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 The CV Control Variable is user defined See the ladder rung below PID 0000 PID PID File PD10 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Control Variable Percent CVP Output Parameter Address Data Range Type _ User Program Descriptions Format Access CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT O to 100 co
539. s used in this manual 7 75 communication instructions 27 385 communication protocols DF1 full duplex 522 DF1 half duplex 523 DH485 F 518 Modbus Slave RTU F 544 communication scan 1 598 communications active status bit C 500 channel 0 status C 499 mode selection status bit C 500 status file 3 84 compare instructions 9 195 compiler revision build number status C 505 release status C 505 contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance D 516 control profile 1 598 control program 1 598 control register error status bit C 492 controller definition 1 598 fault messages D 508 mode C 486 mode status C 482 overhead A 469 B 477 1 598 status file C 479 controller properties 2 67 conversion instructions 11 219 convert from binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 222 convert to binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 226 COP instruction 14 248 copy file instruction 14 248 copy word instruction 14 246 count down instruction 8 192 count up instruction 8 792 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 counters counter file 8 790 counter file and status bits 8 792 definition 1 598 how counters work 8 190 CPU central processing unit definition 1 598 CPW instruction 14 246 CS function file 3 84 CTD instruction 8 192 CTU instruction 8 192 D DAT configuration 3 80 function file 3 80 data file download protection 2 63 data file overwrite protection lost status bit C 507 data files 2 56 2 59 2 62 bit B 2 62 control R
540. sage and Instruction Execution Time Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Read Characters ARD 10 7 108 44 char 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Read Line ARL 10 6 114 443 14 3 char ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 13 4 3 5 16 0 matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 7 5 3 5 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 12 5 10 6 13 4 char ASCII Write AWT 12 8 237 10 6 13 4 char Bit Shift Left BSL 1 4 26 4 1 06 13 8 word Bit Shift Right BSR 1 4 26 1 1 07 13 8 word Clear CLR 0 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 5 5 1 0 File Copy coP 0 0 15 9 0 67 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply word Copy Word CPW 0 0 15 8 0 7 word Count Down CTD 8 5 75 2 4 Count Up CTU 8 5 6 4 2 4 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 0 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 10 3 2 0 0 0 36 7 35 Data Log DLG 6 7 67 5 11 8 2 4 6 7 67 5 11 8 date 2 4 date stamp stamp 12 4 time 12 4 time stamp stamp 16 2 long word 9 1 word logged logged Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 6 8 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 9 2 6 2 6 FIFO Load FFL 9 8 10 0 3 4 9 7 10 9 3 9 FI
541. sage instruction Protocol Configuration 545 When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFFh the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based on the Modbus function TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in the field The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Modbus RTU Slave TIP Modbus RTU Slave driver can be used with the following controllers e All MicroLogix 1200 controllers e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher e All MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP The coil and contact files can contain up to 4096 coils or contacts in each register when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words Each input register and holding register file can contain up to 256 registers when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words With the Expanded box checked the controllers can be specifically configured to use up to six 256 word data table files for a total of 1536 Modbus Holding registers TIP A request to access a group of holding registers that span across two
542. se Timing Range 0 001 seconds Ss lt Ct t r tO 32 767 seconds 0 01 seconds 0 to 327 67 seconds 1 00 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control and status word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulated value Timer File Word Bit 15 4 13 12 foj js p je 5 ajb 2 1 0 Word0 JEN TT DN Internal Use Word1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit ATTENTION Do not copy timer elements while the timer enable bit EN is set Unpredictable machine operation may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Filesi Function Files Address Address Mode Level A Parameter E gt g a z S c a SFZ 5E o _ olalle a ERER E Taaa Eg eal Eza Timer e Time Base e Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Timer Files only Timer and Counter Instructions 187 TIP Use an RES instruction to reset a timer s accumulator and status bits Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction
543. sed for emphasis e Change bars appear beside information that has been changed or added since the last revision of this manual Change bars appear in the margin as shown to the right of this paragraph Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 16 Preface Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor For Read this Document Document Number Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1200 Programmable MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 INO06 Controller including a mounting template and door labels Controllers Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 UM001 your MicroLogix 1200 system Controllers User Manual Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1500 Base Units MicroLogix 1500 Programmable 1764 IN001 including a mounting template for easy installation Controllers Base Unit Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1500 Programmable 1764 UM001 your MicroLogix 1500 system Controllers User Manual A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also Advanced Interface Converter AlC User 1761 6 4 contains information on network wiring Manual Information on ho
544. ser configured battery backed queue The size of the queue is 48K bytes independent of the rest of the processor memory Configuring the DLG instruction in the Micrologix 1500 LRP 1 Create a new RSLogix 500 project for the 1764 LRP processor 2 Create a new rung of ladder logic in File 2 as shown below DLG Data Log queue mmber FYI The DLG instruction ONLY captures data on a false to true rung transition 3 Double Click Data Logging Configuration in the controller organizer to access the Data Log Queue Configuration window Knowledgebase Quick Starts 589 DATALOGEXAMPLE RSS lolx H Help a Controller i Controller Properties oN Processor Status Function Files UH 10 Configuration Bis Channel Configuration aG Program Files SYS0 SYS1 Lap 2 Data Files Cross Reference E 00 outeut E n input E s2 status E 53 BINARY E 14 Timer Ei cs COUNTER E R6 CONTROL Ei N7 INTEGER E F8 FLOAT a Data Logging Ej Configuration E Status FYI Every time Configuration above is double clicked a new queue is added To delete queues simply select the queue with the mouse and press the lt delete gt key on the keyboard 4 Double Click on Data Log configuration to open the Configuration window Data Log Queue Configuration x Data Log Configuration Cancel Help 5 Complete the Data Log Queue as shown below The Number of records and Addresses selected were arbitrary for this
545. set data range is from 32768 to 32767 e Accumulator The accumulator contains the current count The accumulator data range is from 32768 to 32767 The accumulated value is incremented CTU or decremented CTD on each false to true rung transition The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false and when power is cycled on the controller The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter TIP The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files Address Address ata Files gt Mode Level 2 l sse z Parameter X E ol ee 5j S glalole 5 g le a 2 3 e fe gt S gja zl alle HHRH ol_lolmlelele Riu lS ELE RS SSISE I lelalelaleale sia Counter Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Counter Files only Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 192 Timer and Counter Instructions Using Counter File Control and Status Bits Like the accumulated value
546. setpoint is entered the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set 41H Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected 1 Deadband lt 0 or 1 Deadband lt 0 or Change deadband to Change deadband to 0 lt deadband lt 0 lt deadband lt 16383 2 Deadband gt 3 Deadband gt 16383 Be MaxS MinS MaxS MinS lt 16383 51H 1 Output high limit lt 0 or Change output high limit to 0 lt output high limit lt 100 2 Output high limit gt 100 52H 1 Output low limit lt 0 or Change output low limit to 0 lt output low limit lt output high limit lt 100 2 Output low limit gt 100 53H Output low limit gt output high limit Change output low limit to 0 lt output low limit lt output high limit lt 100 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Analog 1 0 Scaling Process Control Instruction 337 To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters In the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 the process variable PV in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0 to 16 383 The 1769 Compact I O analog modules 1769 IF4 and 1769 OF2 are capable of on board scaling Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input to the input range of the PID instruction The ability to perform scaling in the I O modules reduces
547. sical output and the output LED will be set to the forced state TIP If you force an output controlled by an executing PTO or PWM function an instruction error is generated The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers allow users to configure groups of DC inputs for high speed or normal operation Users can configure each input group s response time A configurable filter determines how long the input signal must be on or off before the controller recognizes the signal The higher the value the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller Higher values provide more filtering and are used in electrically noisy environments Lower values provide less filtering and are used to detect fast or narrow pulses You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters latching inputs and input interrupts Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software To configure the filters using RSLogix 500 Latching Inputs 1 0 Configuration 49 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab The input groups are pre arranged Simply select the filter time you require for each input group You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the input groups Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 Input Groups e Qand 1 e 0and1 e2and3 e 2 and 3 e 4 and
548. sing surge suppressors in your or internal hardware failure controller s User Manual e The default program is loaded e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix MicroLogix 1500 only 1500 only e Retentive Data is lost See page e Contact your local Rockwell Automation 493 MicroLogix 1200 only representative if the error persists 0003 MEMORY MODULE Memory module memory error This Non User Re program the memory module If the error USER PROGRAM IS ferror can also occur when going to persists replace the memory module CORRUPT the Run mode 0004 MEMORY INTEGRITY While the controller was powered Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then ERROR up ROM or RAM became corrupt re download your program and start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists Publication 762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Error Code Hex 0005 Advisory Message RETENTIVE DATA IS LOST MicroLogix 1200 only Description Retentive Data is lost See page 493 Fault Classification Recoverable Fault Messages and Error Codes 509 Recommended Action Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0006 MEMORY MODULE HARDWARE FAULT The memory module hardware faulted or the memory module is incompatible with OS Non Use
549. sitive or 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word if the result is negative Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 490 System Status File Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation Watchdog Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 3H Byte 2 to 255 control read write This byte value contains the number of 10 ms intervals allowed to occur during a program cycle The timing accuracy is from 10 ms to 0 ms This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is generated code 0022H System Status File 491 Free Running Clock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 4 binary 0 to FFFF status read write This register contains a free running counter This word is cleared 0 upon entering an executing mode Bits in status word 4 can be monitored by the user program The bits turn on and off at a particular rate cycle time The On Off times are identical and are added together to determine the cycle time S 4 Free Running Clock Comparison for SLC 500 a
550. ss S 1 5 binary 1 status read only This bit is always set 1 by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled Forces Installed Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 6 binary Oor1 status read only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs are forced When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 484 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 System Status File Fault Override At Power Up Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 8 binary Oor1 control read only When set 1 causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 at power up The power up mode is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also FO Fault Override on page 78 Startup Protection Fault Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 9 binary Oor1 control read only When set 1 and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation If the User Fault Routine does not clear bit 1 13 the controller
551. ss Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only Error codes detected by the STI sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 304 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts STI Error Code Recoverable Fault Description Controller Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist STI User Interrupt Executing UIX Error Code User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PFN The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI User Interrupt Enable UIE User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the STI subroutine at the co
552. ss Format symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this device E6H PCCC Description Illegal Address address does not exist or does not point to something usable by this command E7H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large E8H PCCC Description Cannot complete request situation changed file size for example during multi packet operation ESH PCCC Description Data or file is too large Memory unavailable EAH PCCC Description Request is too large transaction size plus word address is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable EDH PCCC Description Resource is already available condition already exists EEH PCCC Description Command cannot be executed EFH PCCC Description Overflow histogram overflow FOH PCCC Description No access F1H Local processor detects illegal target file type F2H PCCC Description Invalid parameter invalid data in search or command block F3H PCCC Description Address reference exists to deleted area FAH PCCC Description Command execution failure for unknown reason PLC 3 histogram overflow F5H PCCC Description Data conversion error F6H PCCC Description The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter This could be due to the scanner not scanning the selected adapter not being scanned the adapter not resp
553. ssor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs MicroLogix controllers support multiple program files program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the program scan the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated programming device Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams protocol The rules of data exchange via communications read To acquire data For example the processor reads information from other devices via a read message relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of binary or discrete logic restore To transfer a program from a device to a controller Glossary 605 reserved bit A location reserved for internal use retentive data Information data that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits run mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program rung A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true energized
554. stants or an address but both sources cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Math Instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address Data Files Function Files a 3 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E f g E E z 5 5 SF S Biga fe Ele oO g iW je B Sl l z E E l ly 2 IE e Is lx Is IE o lo lm e z Els In E a E 2 E lE le S lo e IS e alf l la 8 E Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source B e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor for the following math instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG and SCP 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMEO
555. ster space 6th Holding Register file 3 6 16 Modbus Commands The controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave responds to the Modbus command function codes listed in below Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Slave MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Command Read Coil Status Function Code Subfunction Code decimal decimal 1 Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Holding Register Echo Command Data Clear Diagnostic Counters Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Holding Registers gt CO o DM OT A wt N 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Master MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Command Function Code Subfunction Code decimal decimal Read Coil Status 1 Read Input Status 2 Read Holding Registers 3 Read Input Registers 4 Write Single Coil 5 Write Single Holding Register 6 Write Multiple Coils 15 Write Multiple Holding Registers 16 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 554 Protocol Configuration 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes 555 Upon receiving a Modbus command that is n
556. struction Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More Descriptions Program Information Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 327 TI Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 327 TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 327 TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Oor1 control read write 329 LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write 329 ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 ZCD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 330 FF Feed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 16 383 control read write 330 SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 32 67 status read only 330 AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit Oor1 control read write 331 CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit Oor 1 control read write 331 DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit Oor1 status read write 331 RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit Oor 1 control read write 332 SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit Oor1 control read write 332 TF Loop Update Too Fast PD10 0 TF binary bit Oor1 status read write 333 DA Derivative Action Bit PD10
557. subroutine when an EII event occurs If you need to restrict when the EI subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and EII subroutine processing resumes Ell User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost EII O UIL binary bit status read write UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track and clear the lost condition Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 311 Ell User Interrupt Pending UIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending Ell O UIP binary bit status read only UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the
558. t Data Table Address Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller The data table address is used for a 500CPU and PLC5 type messages A valid address is any valid configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the controller Valid combinations are shown below Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 416 Communications Instructions Message Type Local File Type Target File Type 500CPU and PLC5 0 1 B N FO L 0 1 S B N FO L T T C C R R ATcl2 N RTC 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 Series C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages A valid offset is any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target s Common Interface File CIF The type of device determines whether it is a word or byte offset MicroLogix controllers and SLC processors use word offset PLC 5 and ControlLogix processors use byte offset Modbus MB Data Address 1 65536 Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function e coils generally address
559. t Example 2 3 off 0 off 0 off 0 fon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 off 0 lon 1 Reset accumulator to zero Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 jon 1 Hold accumulator value Example 7 off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B 3 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care tt rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 134 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Accumulator ACC Description Address __ Data Format Type User Program Access ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT control read write The ACC Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the value of the software accumulator is cleared 0 when a high preset is reached or when an overflow condition is detected High Preset HIP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT control read write The HIP High Preset is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interru
560. t Out LIFO Unload 264 IOS 1 0 Status 99 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 618 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 List of Instructions and Function Files Instruction Description Page Instruction Description 8 Page MCR Master Control Reset 281 PTO Pulse Train Output 153 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal 200 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 169 MOV Move 237 RTC Real Time Clock 71 MSG Message 391 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt 301 MUL Multiply 211 TPI Trim Pot Information 76 MVM Masked Move 240 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 How Are We Doing PANE Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback wy You can complete this form and mail or fax it back to us or email us at RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Pub Title Type MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Cat No Bulletins 1762 and 1764 Pub No 1762 RMO001F EN P Pub Date October PartNo 40072 079 01 6 Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature 1 needs improvement 2 satisfactory and 3 outstanding Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you ZS 3 Can we add more information to help you Completeness all necessary informati
561. t apply matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 9 2 4 0 1 8 matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 ASCII Write AWT 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 Bit Shift Left BSL 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Bit Shift Right BSR 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Clear CLR 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 6 3 1 0 File Copy CoP 0 0 19 0 8 word 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Copy Word CPW 0 0 18 3 0 8 word Count Down CTD 9 0 9 0 2 4 Count Up CTU 9 2 9 0 24 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 1 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 12 2 2 0 0 0 42 8 3 5 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 7 2 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 9 2 8 2 6 FIFO Load FFL 11 1 11 3 3 4 11 2 11 7 3 9 FIFO Unload FFU 10 4 33 0 8 word 3 4 10 4 36 1 5 long word 3 4 Fill File FLL 0 0 14 0 6 word 2 0 0 0 15 1 2 long word 2 5 Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 14 1 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Gray Code GCD 0 0 9 5 Greater Than or Equal To GEQ 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Greater Than GRT 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 4 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 46 7 7 3 0 0 41 3 7 8 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 26 4 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask 10M 0 0 22 3 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 1 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 4 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or Equal To LEQ 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Less Than LES 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 LIFO Load LFL 10 4 25 5 3 4 10 4 31 6 3 9 LIFO Unload LFU 10 4 29
562. t min x rate Rate and Offset can both be immediate values The data range for rate and offset is 32768 to 32767 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 C ua Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 gt Mode Level nw a E sig a Parameter a Elo ig H Sie a e S F S Bisis js 2 E gla le gloz Elgler le la E ezel FS o lvla lezla a S le E SIE IG SS eela Eais Source ele elele ele e Rate ele ejele elele e Offset ele ejlele ejele e Destination e ojojo ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the SCL instruction Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 216 Math Instructions SCP Scale with Parameters Instruction Type output SCP Scale w Parameters Input 7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the SCP Instruction Input Min 7 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Input Max 7 2 0 lt True False taled Min ie Mi
563. t number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 42 words in length as shown in Subelement delimiter s Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from 0 to 41 You can also specify LEN for word 0 and DATA 0 through DATA 40 for words 1 to 41 The subelement represents a word address Examples ST9 2 String File 9 Element 2 T17 1 LEN String File 17 Element 1 LEN Variable ST13 7 DATA 1 String File 13 Element 7 word 2 characters 2 and 3 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 354 ASCII Instructions Control Data File NOTE The RN bit is not addressable via the Control R file Format Explanation R Control file File Description The control data element is used by ASCII instructions to store control information required to operate the instruction The control data element for ASCII instructions includes status and control bits an error code byte and two character words as shown below ASCII Instructions Control Data File Elements Control Element Word 15 0 EN JEU IDN fem 4 eR Jul rnl7 Fpl8 Error Code Byte 1 Number of characters specified to be sent or received LEN 2 Number of characters actually sent or received POS 1 EN Enable Bit indicates that an instruction is enabled due to a false to true transition This bit remains set until the instruction completes execution or generates an error 2 EU Queue Bit when set indicates that an ASCII ins
564. t until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan IMPORTANT Do not set this bit from the control program Enabled and Waiting EW Address MG11 0 EW Data Format Binary Range On or Off Type Status User Program Access Read Only The Enabled and Waiting Bit EW is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer not in the queue and waiting to be sent The EW bit is cleared after the message has been sent and the processor receives acknowledgement ACK from the target device This is before the target device has processed the message and sent a reply Error ER Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ER Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Error Bit ER is set when message transmission has failed An error code is written to the MSG File The ER bit and the error code are cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Done DN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 DN Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Done Bit DN is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction Communication
565. tals Sum of all sub totals Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K 2 4K 1 2K 600 300 Inactive Protocol DF1 Full Duplex 1 50 1 27 1 16 1 12 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 08 1 00 DF1 Half Duplex 1 21 1 14 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 07 1 01 DH 485 N A 1 16 1 11 N A N A N A N A N A 1 10 at 19 2K 1 07 at 9 6K Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 470 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Modbus 1 22 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 00 ASCII 1 55 1 33 1 26 1 22 1 21 1 19 1 19 1 18 1 01 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network Appendix B Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each ins
566. tated to hee ek ee eed 21 385 SVG Service COMMUNICAtIONS 464 Oe ew 8 KO Ak Oe 21 387 MSG MESSAGE ao ka tose en aA Bld Bieta es By Slee Bete 21 391 The Message Element n 500454344 o bo eb ed wees 21 392 Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction 21 399 MSG Instruction Ladder LOsie c 0 2 ea ok eo see 21 403 Local Messages awe lee B24 6S Sa Rete eee ale 21 405 Configuring a Local Message scoot Ay We ew 21 407 Local Messaging Examples nanana aaa 21 417 Remote Messages onnon aana 21 434 Configuring a Remote Message pti gt eke ees Px 21 437 MSG Instruction Error Codes 6 os ok e24 gwen sabi a 8 21 441 Chapter 22 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only 22 445 Pata Noe ee rte e R he hd a ON ae Poh es ee Dok DOSS 22 451 Queues and Records 5 58 Ge Noe bap dn Se ehh cd eb es OG 22 451 Configuring Data Log Queues v6 0 iad bo Gale ale gL ee 22 455 DLG Data Log Msinictioni aos vues dees een Rewer 22 457 Data Log Status Piles 2 cong oesa we ade a bho d dain ude Bowe BOOS 22 458 Retrieving Reading Records te he a aR Raed ee 22 460 Accessing the Retrieval File 00005 22 460 Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File 22 462 Appendix A Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time A 463 MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet yar nd Saw ba tino eGo Kare A 469 Appendix B Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time B 471 Micr
567. tatus C 504 program control instructions 16 277 program end instruction 16 287 program file definition 7 604 program files 2 59 program mode 7 604 program scan definition 7 604 MicroLogix 1200 scan time worksheet A 469 MicroLogix 1500 scan time worksheet B 477 programmable limit switch 5 709 5 141 programmable limit switch file 5 747 programming device 1 604 programming instructions 4 101 proportional integral derivative application notes 19 338 PID instruction 19 378 PID tuning 79 343 runtime errors 19 336 the PID concept 19 315 the PID equation 79 316 protocol 1 604 DF1 full duplex 522 DF1 half duplex 523 DF1 radio modem F 535 DH485 communication F 578 Modbus RTU F 544 protocol configuration E 517 F 559 PTO function file 6 753 instruction 6 747 Quick Start example F 559 publications related 1 16 pulse train output function file 6 753 instruction 6 747 Quick Start example F 559 pulse width modulation function file 6 769 instruction 6 168 Quick Start example F 563 Purpose of this Manual 7 75 PWM function file 6 769 instruction 6 768 Quick Start example F 563 0 quadrature encoder 5 132 queue 22 445 RAC instruction 5 740 RCP instruction 22 445 read 1 604 real time clock accuracy 3 72 battery low indicator bit 3 72 disabling 3 72 function file 3 77 real time clock Quick Start example F 577 real time clock adjust instruction 3 74 recipe 22 445 recipe instruction 22 445 REF instruction
568. tatus of the embedded and local expansion I O The data file is structured as Word Description 0 Embedded Module Error Code Always zero 1 to6 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the I O module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1200 1 to 1g 1 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the 1 0 module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1500 1 1 to 8 for Series A Base Units Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 100 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Set Chapter 4 Programming Instructions Overview The following table shows the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 programming instructions listed within their functional group MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only Functional Group Description Page High Speed Counter HSL RAC The high speed counter instructions along with the HSC function file allow you to monitor 1109 and control the high speed outputs Generally used with DC inputs High Speed Outputs PTO PWM The high speed output instructions along with the PTO and PWM function files allow you 1147 to monitor and control the high speed outputs Generally used with FET outputs BXB units Relay Type Bit XIC X10 OTE OTL OTU OSR ONS OSF The
569. tem Status File RTC Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 38 word 1 to 12 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MON SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 39 word 1 to 31 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DAY SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 71 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RSLogix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Hours Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 40 word 0 to 23 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 HR SeeRe
570. terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 k i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode A Parameter E s g E o amp z a a 8 T 3 is 2 5 z o o a je g S li Lit 2 li z il la 93 E e Is le Js E la o l l a e z a a 5 la E 2 E5 lEz a Ejs El eS E l E l eis File e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Source e e e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO IMPORTANT PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Instruction Type output File Instructions 255 FFL FIFO Load CEN gt Source N7 0 nro ee CON gt Execution Time for the FFL Instruction ontro x Length 1 lt lt M gt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Position 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 11 3 us 11 1 us long word 11 7 us 11 2 us MicroLogix 1500 word 10 0 us 9 8 us long word 10 9 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the FFL instruction loads words or long words into
571. ters Information on what services a target device supports is usually provided in the device s documentation MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 CIP Generic Read Assembly Write Assembly Write Qutput Point Read Output Point Read Input Point Read Parameter Write Parameter Read Analog Input Write Analog Output Generic Get Attribute Single Generic Set Attribute Single Generic Get Member Generic Set Member Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 432 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Example 5 Configuring a Modbus Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the Modbus communication commands Since configuration options are dependent on which channel is selected the programming software has been designed to only show the options available for the selected channel Before configuring the MSG instruction open the Channel Configuration screen and set the Driver to Modbus RTU Master For more information on Channel Configuration see Modbus RTU Master Configuration on page 545 Message Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 4 E Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File MG11 0 CDN gt Setup Screen CER gt F MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 General f This Controller m Control Bits Ehana Ignore if timed out TO fo Modbus Command 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxnx Data Table Address N10 0 Awaiting Execution EW B
572. the HSC Error Detected ED Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ED Error HSC 0 ED lbi Detected t Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set 1 you should look at the specific error code in parameter HSC 0 ER Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 116 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 117 Counting Enabled CE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CE Counting HSC 0 CE bi Enabled 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 t Oto7 control jread write The CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed Counter When set 1 counting is enabled when clear 0 default counting is disabled If this bit is disabled while the counter is running the accumulated value is held if the bit is then set counting resumes This bit can be controlled by t
573. the Source string exceeds 82 characters Manipulation Error When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code S 6 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 ASCII Instructions 369 ACN String Concatenate ACN Source A Source B Dest String Concatenate ST10 11 ST10 12 ST10 10 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACN Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False 22 6 us 11 5 us character 0 0 us 17 9 us 10 2 us character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later The ACN instruction combines two ASCII strings The second string is appended to the first and the result stored in the destination Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source A is the first string in the concatenation procedure e Source B is the second string in the concatenation procedure e Destination is where the result of Source A and B is stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACN Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Address ata Files Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode N l c o 5 Parameter S E lo amp G El ke 2 z amp ja 5 Je S S
574. the counter status bits are also retentive until reset as described below CTU Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 12 C5 0 0V OV overflow Is Set When the accumulated value wraps from 32 767 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU indicator to 32 768 and continues to count up instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value gt preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 15 C5 0 CU CU countup rung state is true e rung state is false enable e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled CTD Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 11 C5 0 UN UN underflow Is Set When the accumulated value wraps from 32 768 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD indicator to 32 767 and continues to count down instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value gt preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator e aRES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 14
575. the interrupt executes or not Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 585 18689 Quick Start RTC The following example illustrates a message write from an SLC 5 03 or Synchronization Between Controllers higher processor to a Micrologix 1500 processor with an installed RTC module that has been enabled This example can also be applied for messaging between Micrologix 1200 and 1500 controllers When messaging from a Micrologix 1200 1500 controller to another Micrologix 1200 1500 it is recommended that RTC 0 be used as the source instead of S 37 S 42 Minimum Hardware Software requirements Micrologix 1200 Series B FRN 2 Micrologix 1500 Series B FRN 4 RSLOGIX 500 is 4 10 00 02 Example The example shows network connections using DH 485 however DF1 Full or Half Duplex will also work Micrologix 1200 1500 s 1761 CBL HM02 1 Configure the SLC s Channel 0 port for DH 485 protocol Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 586 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 2 Enter the following ladder logic into the SLC processor EGS LAD 2 iof x MSG Al 0000 Read Write Message EN m Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write DN gt Target Device SOOCPU Local Remote Local ER gt Control Block N100 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen N100 0 53 0 N100 0 0001 ec et 13 0 15 N100 0 12 MSG N100 0 14 Elements 4
576. the message buffers until all four message buffers are full If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue the ER bit in the MG file is set 1 and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error When a valid message instruction is loaded into a message buffer the EN and EW bits for this message are set 1 The controller then exits the end of scan REF or SVC portion of the scan The controller s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the message instruction Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits you can service up to four active message instructions per channel at any given time If the target node successfully receives the message it sends back an acknowledge ACK The ACK causes the processor to clear 0 the EW bit and set 1 the ST bit The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request Once the ST bit is set 1 the controller waits for a reply from the target node The target node is not required to respond within any given time frame TIP Communications Instructions 401 If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction you will never receive a reply This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 402 Communications Instructions 4 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an
577. the string You configure append characters via the Channel Configuration screen The default append characters are carriage return and line feed TIP Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port ASCII Instructions 359 If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to IMPORTANT te re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction will execute on either a false or true rung However if you want to repeat this instruction the rung must go from false to true When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 382 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 e Source is the string element you want to write e Control is the control data file See page 354 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is word 1
578. they are not set to 0 the invalid data flag Ex will be set for that channel by the module However the channel will continue to operate with the previously converted value defined as follows Sign bit in two s complement format Always positive equal to zero for the 1769 IF4XOF2 module e Ix Over range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection When set to 1 the bits signal that the input signal is outside the normal operating range However the module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value When the over range condition is cleared the bits automatically reset 0 Ox Word 5 bits 0 and 1 provide over range indication for output channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection When set to 1 the bits signal that the output signal is outside the normal operating range However the module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value When the over range condition is cleared the bits automatically reset 0 1 0 Configuration 37 TIP Under range indication is not provided because zero is a valid number e Ex When set 1 this bit indicates that invalid data e g the value sent by the controller is outside the standard output range or increment e g 128 256 etc has been set in the output data bits 0 through 6 or the sign bit 15 e Hx Hold Last State bits When
579. tiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 or higher processor Protocol Configuration 519 DH 485 Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command is sent as a DH 485 Send Data No Acknowledgement SDN packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned DH 485 Configuration Parameters When communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed Parameter JOptions Programming Software Default _ Baud Rate 9600 19 2K 19 2K Node Address 1 to 31 decimal 1 Token Hold Factor 1to4 2 Max Node Address 1 to 31 31 The major software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specif
580. time Gf the radio modem network supports full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance Like DF1 Half Duplex protocol up to 255 devices are supported with unique addresses from 0 to 254 A node ignores any packets received that have a destination address other than its own with the exception of broadcast packets A broadcast write command initiated by any DF1 radio modem node is executed by all of the other DF1 radio modem nodes that receive it No acknowledgement or reply is returned Unlike either DF1 Full Duplex or DF1 Half Duplex protocols DF1 Radio Modem protocol does not include ACKs NAKs ENQs or poll packets Data integrity is ensured by the CRC checksum Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 536 Protocol Configuration Using the DF1 Radio Modem Using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be configured as the system mode driver for Channel 0 in MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 or higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 or higher and for Channel 1 in MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 or higher Channel configuration appears as follows Figure shows Channel 0 configuration and Figure shows Channel 1 configuration options DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel Configuration f 3 xj General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem 1 decimal Baud 19200 w Parity NONE Store and Forward File 0
581. ting logic in the user fault routine The user can attempt to clear the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 Non Recoverable Non Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and cannot be recovered from The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs However the fault cannot be Non User Fault Non User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs cleared Note You may initiate a MSG instruction from the controller to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Status File Data Saved The Arithmetic Flags Status File word S 0 are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re written upon exiting the subroutine Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a subroutine file Program Files 3 to 255 can be used 2 Enter the file number in word S 29 of the status file Controller Operation The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable faults causes the controller to read S 29 and execute the subroutine number identified by 8 29 If the fault is recoverable the routine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in its current executing mode The routine does not execute
582. tions Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 instructions were enabled When a buffer becomes available the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer and the EW bit is set 1 TIP The control program does not have access to the message buffers or the communications queue Once the EN bit is set 1 it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN ER or TO bit is set 1 The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set 1 If the timeout period expires before the MSG instruction completes its function the ER bit is set 1 and an error code 37H is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout error At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction the controller determines if it should examine the communications queue for another instruction The controller bases its decision on the state of the channel s Communication Servicing Selection CSS and Message Servicing Selection MSS bits the network communication requests from other nodes and whether previous message instructions are already in progress If the controller determines that it should not access the queue the message instruction remains as it was Either the EN and EW bits remain set 1 or only the EN bit is set 1 until the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction If the controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue it unloads the communications queue entries into
583. tions Instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Example 1 Local Read from a 500CPU Message Instruction Setup 24 MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 General This Controller Communication Command Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 0 Size in Elements r Target Device Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address Channet 0 Local Node Addr dec Local Remote Control Bis Awaiting Execution EW 0 Enor ER 0 Message done ON 0 Message Enabled EN octal a Eror Enor Code Hex 0 In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o 10 BNL lt gt read write 0 1 S B N L T lt gt read write il C lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R RTC gt write N RTC 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B an
584. tions Status File CSO corresponds to Channel 0 on the controller Communications Status File CS1 corresponds to Channel 1 on the 1764 LRP processor TIP You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues The data file is structured as Communications Status File Word Description Applies to Controller Details on Page Oto5 General Channel Status Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 85 6to22 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 88 23 to 42 DLL Active Node Table Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 98 words 43 to 70 when using DF Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex DH 485 or ASCII 1 43 End of List Category Identifier Code MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 always 0 43to70 Reserved e MicroLogix 1200 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Function Files 85 Communications Status File Word Description Applies to Controller Details on Page words 43 to 70 when using Modbus RTU Slave 43 to 69 Modbus Slave Diagnostic Counters Block e MicroLogix 1200 93 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 70 End of List Category Identifier Code e MicroLogix 1200 always 0 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 1 ASCII can only be used with the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher and 1764 LRP Processors The following tables show the
585. tpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Ty of 0 a gain K of 1 and the loop update time determined in step 17 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward Return to page 344 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 348 Process Control Instruction Notes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 20 General Information ASCII Instructions This chapter contains general information about the ASCII instructions and explains how they function in your control program This chapter is arranged into the following sections e Instruction Types and Operation on page 350 e Protocol Overview on page 352 e String ST Data File on page 353 e Control Data File on page 354 ASCII Instructions The ASCII instructions are arranged so that the Write instructions precede the Read instructions Instruction Function Valid Controller s Page ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clear the receive and or transmit buffers e MicroLogix 1200 355 AIC Integer to String Convert an integer value to a string e MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or 357 AWA ASCII Write with Write a string with user configured characters later 358 Ap
586. tput The TON instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached When the accumulator equals the preset timing stops The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs accumulated value gt preset value rung state goes false bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value lt preset value e rung state goes false e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false TOF Timer Off Delay TOF Timer Off Delay L C EN gt Timer 4 0 Time Base 1 0 CDN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TOF Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 2 9 us 13 0 us MicroLogix 1500 2 5 us 10 9 us Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output The TOF instructio
587. transmit either replies to a command received earlier or MSG commands triggered locally in ladder logic the slave station will transmit the first message packet in the transmit queue Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 526 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 If the standard mode selection is single message per poll scan then the master station will then go to the next station in the poll list If the standard mode selection is multiple messages per poll scan the master station will continue to poll this slave station until its transmit queue is empty The master station knows the slave station has no message packets queued up to transmit when the slave station responds to the master poll packet with a 2 byte poll response Every time a slave station responds or fails to respond to its poll packet the master station automatically updates its Active Node Table again even if it s in program mode In this list one bit is assigned to each possible slave station address 0 to 254 If a slave station does not respond when it is polled its Active Node Table bit is cleared If it does respond when it is polled its Active Node Table bit is set Besides being an excellent online troubleshooting tool two common uses of the Active Node Table are to report good bad communication status for all slave stations to an operator interface connected to the master station for mo
588. tration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces 1761 NET DND connected to an Ethernet network using an SLC 5 05 In this configuration controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to requests from devices on the Ethernet network but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks DNI DNI DNI MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 05 SLC 5 05 PLC 5E Communications Instructions 437 Configuring a Remote You configure for remote capability in the RSLogix 500 Message Setup screen Message Example Configuration Screen and Network The message configuration shown below is for the MicroLogix 1500 at node 12 on the DH 485 network This message reads five elements of data from the SLC 5 04 node 51 on the DH network starting at address N 50 0 The SLC 5 04 at Node 23 of the DH network is configured for passthru operation TIP The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example i This Controller Control B s Communication Command Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements 5 Awaiing Execution EW 0 Channet f_ r Target Device Enor ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting IST 0 Data Table Address Message Enabled EN 0 Local Bridge Addr dec octal Local Remote Remote Remot
589. tring The number of characters moved is stored in the POS word of the control data file The number in the Characters Read field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters have been read Exception If the controller finds termination characters before done reading the Done bit DN is set and the number of characters found is stored in the POS word of the control data file TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 381 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 378 ASCII Instructions ASC String Search ASC String Search Source ST10 6 Index 5 String Search ST10 7 Result N7 1 0 lt ASC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ASC Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later When Instruction Is True 16 2 us 4 0 us matching character False 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 13 4 us 3 5 us matching character 0 0 us Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string This instruction executes on a true rung Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the string you want to find e Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 within the search string An index of 1 indicates the
590. trol program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing The HSC sub system will clear 0 the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine User Interrupt Pending UIP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIP User HSC 0 UIP Ibi Interrupt Pending t Oto7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically User Interrupt Lost UIL Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIL User HSC 0 UIL bi Interrupt Lost t Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 128 The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 120 Using the High Speed Counter and Program
591. troller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 Reserved 5 Yes Yes No Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is either less than zero or greater than 1000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter Relay Type Bit Instructions Use relay type bit instructions to monitor and or control bits in a data file or function file such as input bits or timer control word bits The following instructions are described in this chapter Instruction UsedTo Page XIO Examine if Open Examine a bit for an OFF condition 177 OTE Output Enable Turn ON or OFF a bit non retentive 179 OTL Output Latch Latch a bit ON retentive 180 OTU Output Unlatch Unlatch a bit OFF retentive 180 ONS One Shot Detect an OFF to ON transition 181 OSR One Shot Rising Detect an OFF to ON transition 182 OSF One Shot Falling Detect an ON to OFF transition 182 These instructions operate on a single bit of data During operation the processor may set or reset the bit based on logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires XIC Examine if Closed XI0 Examine if Open Instruction Type input B3 0 ae Execution Time for the XIC and XIO Instructions B3 0 Controller When Instruction Is aE True False MicroLogix
592. truction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided The tables below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or long word as the data format Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 11 4 94 7 6 char 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply Absolute Value ABS 0 0 3 1 ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 11 0 84 2 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply Buffer ASCII String to Integer ACI 0 0 14 2 6 3 1 5 0 0 20 3 9 5 char 1 5 char ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 203 9 receive 24 7 transmit 29 1 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 i 10 2 2 0 char Add ADD 0 0 2 5 3 3 0 0 10 4 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 1244 2 6 25 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 108 83 3 5 3 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0 0 25 4 3 char 1 4 0 0 68 7 1 6 And AND 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 472 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory U
593. truction set RSS Fije x B Project E Help E Controller 5 Program Fiks 3 Data Files Cross Reference E 00 OUTPUT D n D s D as INPUT STATUS BINARY TIMER COUNTER CONTROL INTEGER PD file created by RSLogix 500 Process Control Instruction 317 The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 and higher processors Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file In the SLC family of processors the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file The Micrologix 1200 and 1500 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub element whenever a PID instruction is programmed on a rung The PD file then appears in the list of Data Files as shown in the illustration Each PD data file has a maximum of 255 elements and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element Each PD element is composed of 20 sub elements which include bit integer and long integer data All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub element 0 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 318 Process Control Instruction PID Proportional I
594. truction was placed in the ASCII queue This action is delayed if the queue is already filled 3 DN Asynchronous Done Bit is set when an instruction successfully completes its operation 4 EM Synchronous Done Bit not used 5 ER Error Bit when set indicates that an error occurred while executing the instruction 6 UL Unload Bit when this bit is set by the user the instruction does not execute If the instruction is already executing operation ceases If this bit is set while an instruction is executing any data already processed is sent to the destination and any remaining data is not processed Setting this bit will not cause instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue This bit is only examined when the instruction is ready to start executing 7 RN Running Bit when set indicates that the queued instruction is executing 8 FD Found Bit when set indicates that the instruction has found the end of line or termination character in the buffer only used by the ABL and ACB instructions Addressing Control Files The addressing scheme for the control data file is shown below R e s b f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 3 words in length as shown in Subelement delimiter s Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from 0
595. tructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 15 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 14 8 us 0 0 us The RES instruction resets timers counters and control elements When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data defined by the RES instruction The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false The following table shows which elements are modified Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Timer and Counter Instructions RES Instruction Operation When using a RES instruction with a Timer Element Counter Element Control Element The controller resets the The controller resets the The controller resets the ACC value to 0 ACC value to 0 POS value to 0 DN bit OV bit EN bit TT bit UN bit EU bit EN bit DN bit DN bit CU bit EM bit CD bit ER bit UL bit Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur ATTENTION a Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 z y Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level PA i 6
596. tructions 409 If Channel 0 or Channel 1 is selected with that channel configured for Modbus RTU Master then the next line will display Modbus Command Otherwise the next line displays Communication Command Communication Command 2MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 General This Controller Channel Slot Communication Command 500CPU Read Data Table Address forre am Size in Elements 500CPU write Pot 2 z PLC5 Read Message Timeout Pi C5 write Data Table Address CIP Generic Local Node Addr dec 0 octal o Local Remote The controller supports six seven for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher different types of communications commands If the target device supports any of these command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported commands include Communication Command Types Communication Description Used For Command 500CPU Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 500CPU Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers A85CIF Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data A85CIF PLC2 A85CIF Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data A85CIF PLC2 PLC5 Read
597. ts 0 3 Sign Bit always resets TIP Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit S 1 EQU FRD EQUAL FROM BCD tame 15 Source A N7 1 Source 1 0 0 0 0 Source B 0 0 Dest N7 2 0 0 MOV MOVE Ze Source 1 0 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 224 Conversion Instructions 14 0000 15 0 The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value 1 0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it executes the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD FRD _ From BCD Source 13 00032760 lt Dest N7 0 32760 lt 13 0000 0000 0011 0010 0111 0110 0000 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 3 2 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 7 6 0 Pid 2 7 6 0 N7 0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not conve
598. ts Read the scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well The control output percentage word 16 is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to 16383 CV range The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between 0 and 16383 When you select scaling the instruction scales the setpoint deadband process variable and error You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling Process Control Instruction 341 Zero Crossing Deadband DB The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output DB SP _ _____ gt Error range DB Time Zero crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint Once it crosses the setpoint error crosses zero and changes sign and as long as it remains in the deadband the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word word 9 in the control block The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter A value of zero inhibits this feature The deadband has the same scaled units as the setpoint if you ch
599. ub system to generate continuous pulses The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle e Jog Pulse not active e Enable not active The JC bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous Jog Pulses e Cleared 0 The PTO sub system does not generate Jog Pulses When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared the current output pulse is truncated PTO Jog Continuous Status JCS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit Oor1 status read only The PTO JCS Jog Continuous Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses The JCS bit operates as follows Pulse Train Output Error Codes Using High Speed Outputs 167 e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses PTO Error Code ER Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 3 to 7 status read only PTO ER Error Codes detected by the PTO sub system
600. ublication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Word 0 e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in source TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant word or file which is applied to both file and source When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through for comparison When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to for comparison The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF or 0 to OXFFFFFFFF TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Source This is the value that is compared to file e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 1 Length contains the number of steps in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence ER Erro ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next f
601. uction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 26 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 22 5 US 0 0 us Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 284 Input and Output Instructions The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan This instruction uses the following operands Slot This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file The location specifies the slot number and the word where data is to be obtained For example if slot 1 0 input data from slot 0 starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file 1 0 starting at word 0 for the specified length If slot 10 1 word 1 of slot 0 is used and so on IMPORTANT Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IIM cannot be used with expansion 0 Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the slot If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file A O prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file The mask value can range from 0 to OXFFFF Real Input Mask Input Data Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word File Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file Addressing Modes and File Typ
602. uction Type output Execution Time for the RCP Instruction Controller Operation When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 Load 30 7 us 7 9 us word 0 0 us 13 8 us long word or floating point Store 28 5 us 8 5 us word 0 0 us 15 1 us long word or floating point The RCP file allows you to save custom lists of data associated with a recipe Using these files along with the RCP instruction lets you transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of user specified locations in the controller file system When you create a recipe file you chose whether to store the recipe data in User Program memory or Data Log Queue memory IMPORTANT The Data Log Queue option can only be used with 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 Series C or higher controllers If you are using a 1764 LSP MicroLogix 1500 controller you must select User Program This section contains the following topics e Recipe File and Programming Example on page 447 e Example Queue 0 on page 452 e Example Queue 5 on page 453 e Retrieval Tools on page 460 e Information for Creating Your Own Application on page 461 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 446 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only The following reasons may help you chose which type of memory to use e The advantage to using User Program memory is that you can save the recipe data to the controller s memory module If
603. ult Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the User Fault Routine is able to clear 1 13 and the fault condition the controller continues to execute the control program If the fault cannot be cleared the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes If you clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 when the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only is in the RUN position the controller immediately enters the RUN mode ATTENTION Future Access OEM Lock Address Data Format Type User Program Access 1 14 binary Oor1 status read only When this bit is set 1 it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program SeeAllow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 68 for more information First Scan Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 15 binary Oor 1 status read write When the controller sets 1 this bit it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following entry into an executing mode The controller clears this bit after the first scan Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 488 System Status File TIP The First Scan bit S 1 15 is set during execution of the start up protection fault routine Refer to 1 9 for more information STI M
604. umber if the devices are on a DH 485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND DF1 or Modbus network TIP To initiate a broadcast message on a DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem network set the local node address to 1 To initiate a broadcast message on a Modbus network set the slave node address to 0 Do not initiate more than one Modbus broadcast message at a time When sequentially triggering multiple Modbus broadcast messages insert at least 10 msec delay in between each message Local Remote This variable defines the type of communications that is used Always use local when you need point to point communications via DF1 Full Duplex or network communications such as Ethernet IP using 1761 NET END DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem For DH 485 use local if the target node is on the same DH 485 network as this controller or remote if the path to the target node goes through one or more communication bridges Five examples of local messaging are shown in this section e 500CPU message type e 485CIF message type e PLC5 message type e CIP Generic message type over DeviceNet via 1747 SDN e Modbus RTU Message type Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 418 Communications Instructions Parameter This Controller A summary of the message instruction configuration parameters is shown in the following table Channel Description Identifies the communicatio
605. unction Code 5 Message Counter Set Clear Single Output Coil 4 30523 Function Code 6 Message Counter Read Write Single Holding Register 4 30524 Function Code 8 Message Counter Run Diagnostics 4 30525 Function Code 15 Message Counter Set Clear for Block of Output Coils 4 30526 Function Code 16 Message Counter Read Write for Block of Holding Registers 4 30527 Modem Status 4 30528 Total messages responded to by this slave 4 30529 Total messages to this Slave 4 30530 Total Messages Seen 4 30531 Link Layer Error Count 4 30532 Link Layer Error 4 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File 4 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 1st Holding Register file 3 6 16 40257 to 40512 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 2nd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40513 to 40768 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 3rd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40769 to 41024 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 4th Holding Register file 3 6 16 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map Detail MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Protocol Configuration 553 Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code decimal 41025 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 5th Holding Register file 3 6 16 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File 3 6 16 41793 to 42048 Read Write Modbus Holding Regi
606. ung goes from false to true An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 415 because it simplifies the user program This built in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is non zero It defaults to 5 seconds so unless you change it the internal timeout control is automatically enabled When the internal timeout is used and communications are interrupted the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action if desired To disable the internal timeout control enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter If communications are interrupted the processor waits indefinitely for a reply If an acknowledge ACK is received indicated by the ST bit being set but the reply is not received the MSG instruction appears to be locked up although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 398 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Enable EN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EN Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Enable Bit EN is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of the MSG buffers or the request is put in the MSG queue It remains se
607. uously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to IMPORTANT ee re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 352 ASCII Instructions Protocol Overview Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1200 Series A and MicroLogix 1500 Series A The AWA and AWT instructions only successfully transmit an ASCII string out of the RS 232 port when the channel is configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol If the RS 232 port is configured for any protocol other than DF1 Full Duplex the AWA and AWT instructions will error out with an error code of 9 DF1 Full Duplex packets take precedence over ASCII strings so if an AWA or AWT instruction is triggered while a DF1 Full Duplex packet is being transmitted the ASCII instruction will error out with an error code of 5 See on page 522 for the DF1 Full Duplex protocol parameters that you set via the Channel O configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later and MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later For the AWA and AWT instructions you can use DF1 Full Duplex protocol as described above To use the ful
608. urce B and place the result in the Destination Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination If the Sources are single words and the Destination is directly addressed to S 13 math register then the quotient is stored in S 14 and the remainder is stored in S 13 If long words are used then the results are rounded Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 212 Math Instructions NEG Negate NEG Negate Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0 lt CLR Clear CLR Clear Dest N7 0 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the NEG Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 9 us 0 0 us long word 12 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 9 us 0 0 us long word 10 4 us 0 0 us Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the Destination Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CLR Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 0 0 us long word 6 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 0 0 us long word 5 5 us 0 0 us Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of zero ABS Absolute Value Math Instructions 213 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ABS Instruction ABS Abs
609. ured by the user in the poll list s in round robin fashion as soon as the end of the polling list is reached the master station immediately goes back and starts polling slave stations from the top of the polling list over again This is independent and asynchronous to any MSG instructions that might be triggered in the master station ladder logic In fact this polling continues even while the master station is in program mode When a MSG instruction is triggered while the master station is in run mode the master station will transmit the message packet just after it finishes polling the current slave station in the poll list and before it starts polling the next slave station in the poll list no matter where it currently is in the poll list If multiple MSG instructions have been triggered simultaneously at least four message packets may be sent out between two slave station polls Each of these messages will have an opportunity to complete when the master polls the slave station that was addressed in the message packet as it comes to it in the poll list If each of the transmitted message packets is addressed to a different slave station the order of completion will be based upon which slave station address comes up next in the poll list not the order in which the MSG instructions were executed and transmitted When a slave station receives a poll packet from the master station if it has one or more message packets queued up to
610. urrent 7 602 normally closed 7 602 normally open 7 602 not equal instruction 9 797 NOT instruction 12 236 0 OEM lock 2 68 OEM lock status bit C 487 offline 1 602 offset 1 603 off state leakage current 1 603 one shot 1 603 one shot falling instruction 7 782 one shot instruction 7 787 one shot rising instruction 7 182 online 1 603 ONS instruction 7 787 operating system catalog number status C 504 FRN status C 504 series letter status C 504 operating voltage 1 603 OR instruction 12 234 OSF instruction 7 182 OSR instruction 7 182 OTE instruction 7 179 OTL instruction 7 180 OTU instruction 7 180 outgoing message command pending status bit C 500 output device 1 603 output instruction 7 179 output latch instruction 7 180 output scan 1 603 output unlatch instruction 7 180 Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 overflow flag C 481 overflow trap status bit C 492 P password protection 2 66 PCCC 1 603 PD data file 19 317 PID analog 0 scaling 19 337 application examples 19 343 application notes 19 338 errors 19 336 PID concept 19 375 PID equation 19 316 PID instruction 19 378 tuning parameters 19 326 PLS file 5 141 Polled report by exception defined 526 power save timeout 3 80 power up mode behavior bit C 485 process control instruction 19 315 processor 1 604 processor battery low status bit C 494 processor catalog number status C 504 processor files 1 604 processor revision status C 505 processor series s
611. us Enable Hard Stop Enable Status follows rung state Error Code Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz C g 456 45 6 Pulse Width Modulated The variables within each PWM element along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed Function File Elements i ividually below Summary Element Description Address Data Format Range lype User Program For More Access Information OUT PWMOutput lt lt i lt d PWM0UT word INT 20r3 Istatus readonly MM DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit Oor1 status read only 171 RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit Oor 1 status read only 171 AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bit Oor1 status read only 172 PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bit Oor1 control read write 172 IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit Oor 1 status read only 173 ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit Oor1 status read only 173 NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit Oor1 status read only 173 EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit Oor 1 control read write 174 ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit Oor 1 status read only 174 OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 0F word INT Oto 20 000 jcontrol read write 174 OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT Oto 20 000 status read only 175 DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1to1000
612. us 2 5 us The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value GEQ and LEQ Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GEQ A B true A lt B false LEQ A gt B false A lt B true IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 200 Compare Instructions MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Instruction Type input MEQ Masked Equal Source N7 0 0 lt Execution Time for the MEQ Instructions Mask N7 1 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Compare N7 2 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 9 us 1 8 us long word 3 9 us 3 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 7 us 1 7 us long word 3 5 us 2 9 us The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value source is equal to a second value compare through a mask The source and the compare are logically ANDed with the mask Then these results are compared to each other If the resulting values are equal the rung state is true If the resulting values are not equal the rung state is false For example Source Compare
613. user program did not configuration to match the actual match the actual configuration configuration or or e With power off correct the actual 1 0 e The expansion 0 configuration configuration to match the user program in the user program specified a configuration module but one was not found or e The expansion I O module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding xxgglt EXPANSION 1 0 The number of input or output image Non User e Correct the user program I O MODULE words configured in the user configuration to reduce the number of CONFIGURATION program exceeds the image size in input or output words and ERROR the expansion 1 0 module e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode xxgglt2 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non User e Refer to the I O status file MODULE ERROR ALENON e Consult the documentation for your specific O module to determine possible causes of a module error xxQAli2 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O cable is _ Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a CABLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH ERROR configured in the user program but no cable is present or e an expansion 1 0 cable is configured in the user program and a cable is physically present but the types do not match cable that is not present e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode or e Add the missing cable e Cyc
614. using an OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Never use an output address at more than one place in your logic program Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output coil ATTENTION A Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 180 Relay Type Bit Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 Data Files Function Files im Mode Address Level Parameter a EE ez im gt fs i wn io a E V mM E Z ua 5 a a E Destination Bit e o o ojojo ele ejo o ry 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch B3 0 Db Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October
615. w to install configure and commission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set 1770 6 5 16 Reference Manual In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state programmable Application Considerations for SGI 1 1 controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Solid State Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 Rockwell Automation Support this publication first Before you contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance we suggest you please review the troubleshooting information contained in If the problem persists call your local distributor or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following ways Phone United States Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States Canada Internet Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 You can access the phone number for your country via the Internet 1 Go to http Awww ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell co
616. when it performs Communications Servicing whichever comes first Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 558 Protocol Configuration When the driver is set to ASCII the following parameters can be changed ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Parameter Description Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver ASCII Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K and 38 4K 1200 Parity Toggles between None Odd and Even None Termination 1 Specifies the first termination character The termination character defines the one or two character d sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the first ASCII termination character to undefined ff indicates no ASCII receiver line termination is used Termination 2 Specifies the second termination character The termination character defines the one or two ff character sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the second ASCII Termination character to undefined ff and the first ASCII Termination character to a defined value d indicates a single character termination sequence Control Line Delete Mode Toggles between No Handshak
617. wing User Interrupts e User Fault Routine e Event Interrupts 4 e High Speed Counter Interrupts e Selectable Timed Interrupt An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program 1 suspends its execution 2 performs a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred 3 returns to the suspended operation i Program File 2 Interrupt Operation Example rung 0 Program File 10 Program File 2 is the main control program rung 123 Program File 10 is the interrupt routine SS e An Interrupt Event occurs at rung rung 275 123 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Using Interrupts 291 Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occurs 1 2 the controller stops its normal execution determines which interrupt occurred goes immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt begins executing the User Interrupt subroutine or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine calls a subsequent subroutine completes the subroutine s resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted The Micrologix 1200 and 1500 controllers only al
618. wise reset Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 230 Conversion Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Chapter 12 Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on individual words Instruction Used To Page AND Bit Wise AND Perform an AND operation 233 OR Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR operation 234 XOR Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation 235 NOT Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation 236 Using Logical When using logical instructions observe the following Instructions e Source and Destination must be of the same data size e all words or all long words Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the IMPORTANT Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions e Source A and Source B can be a constant or an address but both cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 232 Logical Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Logical Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 102 3 Address Data Files Function Files a 3 Address Level gt Mode a sS Parameter E ESE
619. word Temporary End TND 0 0 0 9 0 5 Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 17 2 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply Off Delay Timer TOF 13 0 2 9 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 3 0 18 0 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 12 3 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 8 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open X10 0 8 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 3 0 2 8 0 0 9 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers 2 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 467 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions for the Micrologix 1200 controllers The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types e Input D and Output O e Bit B Integer N e Timer T Counter C and Control R Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted Micr
620. work If no other devices are on the network this bit is cleared 0 5to14 Reserved 15 Communications Toggle Push Button Communications Defaults Active This bit is set 1 whenever Channel 0 is in the default communications mode The bit is cleared 0 when Channel 0 is in user configured communications mode Always 0 for 1764 LRP Processor Channel 1 This bit is not available with the Series A controllers Oto7 Node Address This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network 8to15 Baud Rate This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the network Function Files 87 Diagnostic Counter Block of Communications Status File With RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and later formatted displays of the diagnostic counters for each configured channel are available under Channel Status These displays include a Clear button that allows you to reset the diagnostic counters while monitoring them online with the programming software For the MicroLogix 1500 LRP with OS Series C FRN 8 and higher clicking on the Clear button while online monitoring Channel Status of either channel 0 or channel 1 will reset all of the channel status diagnostic counters for both channels to zero Prior to OS Series C FRN 8 the only channel status diagnostic counters that are reset when the Clear button is clicked are the ones on the channel that the programming terminal is connected through For instance if your
621. x protocol This is a point to point or One Device to One Device protocol using this protocol no other devices can be connected To create a network of multiple processors or devices use the DH485 protocol and 1761 NET AIC devices Note This example was written using a ML1500 communicating to a ML1000 however any DF1 or DH485 device could have been substituted for the ML1000 i e MicroLogix 1200 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 PLC 5 Bar Code Scanners etc Publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 574 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the processor to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspend task at the point where it suspended STI Definition The STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example A Block of logic that needs to be scanned more often then the rest of the ladder program Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the STI tab See Below F4 Function Files OF x Jen aTe oat TP MMi Behi cso ios 3 HSC PTO PWM L PFN Program File Number 0 l ER Error Code 0 H UIK User Interrupt Executing 0 H UIE User
622. xample 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on IU loff on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 I Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge V falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 132 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using the Quadrature Encoder The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution o Input 0 A p Input 1 B Quadrature Encoder Input 2 Z Reset input Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation L A A Y Y B 1 2 3
623. y be used with the controller s embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PWM instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PWM Instruction Controller MicroLogix 1500 When Rung Is True False Micrologix1200 M26 6us t lt irAM SC 107 4 us 21 1 us PWM Function Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File Using High Speed Outputs 169 The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form The PWM profile has two primary components e Frequency to be generated e Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction along with the HSC and PTO functions are different than all other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these instructions The interface to the PWM sub system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PWM instruction is on is solved true the PWM is started 2 A waveform at the specified frequency is produced 3 The RUN phase is active
624. y of month day of week hour minute and second information to the Real Time Clock RTC Function File in the controller The Real Time Clock parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below Real Time Clock Function File Feature Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access YR RTC Year RTC 0 YR word 1998 to 2097 status read only MON RTC Month RTC 0 MON word 1 to 12 status read only DAY RTC Day of Month RTC 0 DAY word 1 to 31 status read only HR RTC Hours RTC 0 HR word 0 to 23 military time status read only MIN RTC Minutes RTC 0 MIN word 0 to 59 status read only SEC RTC Seconds RTC 0 SEC word 0 to 59 status read only DOW RIC Day of Week RTC 0 DOW word 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday status read only DS Disabled RTC 0 DS binary Oor1 status read only BL RTC Battery Low RTC 0 BL binary Oor1 status read only Writing Data to the Real Time Clock The programming screen is shown below z3 Function Files oix Hsc Pro sti en ATC em mmi oat tri cs PwM ios Day of Week Budy DD MM YYYY Date 0 0 0 MON Month HH MM SS DAY Da a z Hour Time 0 0 OJ MIN Minute SEC Second Set Date amp Time L DOW Day Of The Week Disable Clock DS Disabled BL RATC Battery is Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take ef
625. you use Data Log Queue you cannot save the recipe data to the controller s memory module e The advantage to using Data Log Queue memory is that the recipe data will not consume User Program space If you are not using the data logging function choosing Data Log Queue memory allows you more memory up to 48K bytes for RCP files You can use the Data Log Queue for data logging and recipe data but the total cannot exceed 48K bytes e If you choose to use the Data Log Queue for one RCP file all the RCP files in your project will also use the Data Log Queue memory space See step 2 Create a RCP File on page 447 for the recipe file procedure The RCP instruction uses the following parameters e Recipe File Number this is the file number that identifies the custom list of addresses associated with a recipe e Recipe Number specifies the number of the recipe to use If the recipe number is invalid a user fault code 0042 is generated e File Operation identifies whether the operation is a Load from the database or a Store to the database When executed on a True rung the RCP instruction transfers data between the recipe database and the specified data locations Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table RCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2
626. ype User Program Access S 61 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series of the processor System Status File 505 Processor Revision Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 62 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the revision Boot FRN of the processor User Program Functionality Type Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 63 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller Compiler Revision Build Number Address Data Format S 64 low byte byte Range 0 to 255 Type status User Program Access read only This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller Compiler Revision Release Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 64 high byte _ byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 506 System Status File Notes Publication 1762 RMO001F EN P October 2009 Appendix D Identifying Controller Faults Fault Messages and Error Codes This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller T

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Verflüssigungssätze - Emerson Climate Technologies  Schulische Lernprozesse gestalten - Forschungsergebnisse  PRP 5000  C2G RapidRun, 6ft  Bulletin Technique  Etre salarié de son conjoint / Diversification : apprenez à vendre ! Du  Инструкция для Archos 48 Internet Tablet ENG  user manual - Pro Audio Centre    ダウンロード（PDF 1.90 MB）  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file